EcoStruxure™

Power Monitoring Expert 9.0

Web Applications Guide
7EN02-0409-00
09/2018
Legal Information
The Schneider Electric brand and any registered trademarks of Schneider Electric Industries SAS
referred to in this guide are the sole property of Schneider Electric SA and its subsidiaries. They
may not be used for any purpose without the owner's permission, given in writing. This guide and its
content are protected, within the meaning of the French intellectual property code (Code de la
propriété intellectuelle français, referred to hereafter as "the Code"), under the laws of copyright
covering texts, drawings and models, as well as by trademark law. You agree not to reproduce,
other than for your own personal, noncommercial use as defined in the Code, all or part of this guide
on any medium whatsoever without Schneider Electric's permission, given in writing. You also
agree not to establish any hypertext links to this guide or its content. Schneider Electric does not
grant any right or license for the personal and noncommercial use of the guide or its content, except
for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at your own risk. All other rights are
reserved.

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.

As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of
the information given in this publication.
Safety Information
Important Information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the
device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain it. The following special
messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential
hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of either symbol to a "Danger" or "Warning" safety label

indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if
the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.

DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.

Please Note
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of
the use of this material.

A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction, installation, and
operation of electrical equipment and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the
hazards involved.
Contents
Safety Precautions 9
Overview 11
About this document 11
Document updates 11
Resources 11
Configuring 13
(Software) Alarm Configuration 14
Real-time Alarms 14
Logged Data Alarms 14
Alarm Configuration considerations 16
Adding a new Alarm Rule 18
Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule 20
Editing an Alarm Rule 21
Duplicating an Alarm Rule 22
Deleting an Alarm Rule 23
Using the Setpoint Calculator 24
Adding a Schedule 25
Schedules 26
Alarm View configuration 27
Adding a new Alarm View 28
Copying an Alarm View 30
Editing an Alarm View 31
Sharing an Alarm view 31
Moving an Alarm View 33
Deleting an Alarm View 34
Setting a default Alarm View 35
Deactivating alarms 36
Dashboards configuration 38
Adding a new dashboard 39
Editing a dashboard 41
Sharing a dashboard 42
Moving a dashboard 43
Deleting a dashboard 44
Set default options for a dashboard 45
Configuring a slideshow 46
Adding a gadget to a dashboard 48
Editing a gadget 49
Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard 50
Diagrams configuration 51
Configuring Devices diagrams 52
Configuring a Network diagram 53

7EN02-0409-00 Page4
 Web Applications Guide

Creating custom diagrams 54

Set default options for a diagram 55
Configuring Diagrams regional settings 56
Diagram Library 57
Diagrams registry settings 59
Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access 61
Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams 63
Hierarchy Manager 64
Hierarchy templates 64
Creating a hierarchy 67
Creating an apportioned meter 74
Creating a virtual meter 75
Dynamic hierarchy 77
Meter apportionment 77
Virtual meter 78
Using hierarchies in other applications 78
Rate Editor 80
Rate Editor User Interface 80
Reports configuration 81
Setting Reports prerequisites 83
Meeting individual report requirements 85
Adding a new report 86
Copying a report 88
Editing a report 90
Moving a report 91
Deleting a report 92
Sharing a report 93
Subscribing to a report 94
Changing a report subscription 98
Deleting a report subscription 99
Uploading a Report Template 100
Configuring the Energy Modeling report 102
Web Applications Settings 105
Settings 105
Trends configuration 111
Adding a new trend 112
Editing a trend 113
Sharing a trend 114
Moving a trend 115
Deleting a trend 116
User Manager 117
Users 119
Adding a standard user 122
Adding a Windows user 124

Page 5 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide

Adding a Windows group 126

Changing a username 128
Changing a user password 130
Changing a user access level 132
Changing user details 134
Deleting a user 136
User Groups 138
Adding a user group 141
Adding a user to a user group 143
Adding sources to a user group 145
Changing a user group name 147
Removing a user from a user group 149
Removing sources from a user group 151
Changing application access for a user group 153
Moving a user between user groups 155
Deleting a user group 156
Viewing Web Applications user license information 158
Operating 161
Alarm View operation 162
Overview 162
View Types 162
Incidents, Alarms, and Events 163
Alarm Acknowledgment 164
Time display 164
Terminology 164
Incidents 165
Timeline Analysis 167
Alarms 168
Events 171
Waveforms 173
Viewing Incidents 174
Viewing a Timeline Analysis 175
Viewing Alarms 177
Viewing Events 178
Viewing Waveforms 179
Acknowledging Alarms 180
Dashboards operation 184
Time display 184
Viewing Dashboards 185
Dashboard Slideshows 186
Playing a Slideshow 187
Gadgets 188
Diagrams operation 214
Time display 214

7EN02-0409-00 Page 6
 Web Applications Guide

The Diagrams user interface 216

User authentication 217
Viewing historical (trend) data 218
Viewing meter events 220
Stale data and error indicators 221
Power Quality Performance diagrams 222
Operating Room diagrams 231
UPS Auto Test diagrams 261
EPSS diagrams 264
Breaker Aging diagrams 268
Reports operation 271
Overview 271
Report templates 271
Subscriptions 274
Ownership and Sharing 274
Time display 274
Terminology 274
Generating a report 275
Downloading a report 276
Report descriptions 277
Trends operation 451
Time display 451
Web Applications 452
Web Applications user interface 452
Time display in Web Applications 453
Troubleshooting 455
Dashboards troubleshooting 456
Where is my measurement? 457
Diagrams troubleshooting 458
Diagrams Services 459
Page cannot be displayed 460
Tick labels for gauges are unreadable 461
No real-time data is displayed 462
Unable to access the Diagrams application 463
Reports troubleshooting 464
Subscription errors and solutions 465
Reference 467
Configuration references 468
Alarm Configuration references 469
Dashboards references 480
Reports references 493
Trends references 495
User Manager references 500
Operation references 508

Page 7 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide

Alarms references 509

Dashboards references 533
Power Quality Performance Module references 537
Reports references 541
Trends references 592

7EN02-0409-00 Page 8
Safety Precautions Web Applications Guide

Safety Precautions
During installation or use of this software, pay attention to all safety messages that occur in the
software and that are included in the documentation. The following safety messages apply to this
software in its entirety.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Do not use the software or devices for critical control or protection applications where human
or equipment safety relies on the operation of the control action.
• Do not use the software to control time-critical functions.
• Do not use the software to control remote equipment without proper access control and status
feedback.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices to help prevent unauthorized access to the software.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Work with facility IT System Administrators to ensure that the system adheres to the site-specific
cybersecurity policies.

Page 9 7EN02-0409-00
Safety Precautions Web Applications Guide

Page10 7EN02-0409-00
Overview
About this document
This guide is intended as a reference for users and administrators of the EcoStruxure™Power
Monitoring Expert (PME) Web Applications.

This document is not a tutorial, it was written with the assumption that you have been trained in the
use and administration of PME.
This document does NOT discuss:

l The non-Web Applications functionality of PME.

l The planning, design, installation, upgrade, integration, or administration of the PME system.

l The planning, design, and operation of the electrical power system that is being monitored.

Document updates
This document is available online through the Schneider Electric website. We may update the online
version over time to improve clarity and accuracy. If you see differences between your local copy
and the online version, use the online version as your reference. See Resources for contact
information.

Resources
Documentation

l EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert System Guide

l EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert IT Guide

Support

Schneider Electric Support

7EN02-0409-00 Page11
Overview Web Applications Guide

Page12 7EN02-0409-00
Configuring
This chapter describes the different tools and tasks for configuring Power Monitoring Expert (PME)
Web Applications.

Use the information in the tables below to find the content you are looking for.
Applications

Application Task
Alarm Views Configure Views for the Alarms application.
Dashboards Configure Dashboards, Gadgets, and slideshows.
Diagrams Configure Diagrams.
Reports Configure Reports.
Trends Configure Trends.

Tools

Tool Task
Software Alarms Configure software alarms.
Configure Hierarchies, Apportioned Meters, Virtual
Hierarchy Manager
Meters.
Rate Editor Configure rates for billing reports.
Configure Web Apps Themes, Localization, Ecostruxure
Web Applications Settings Web Services (EWS), Diagnostics and Usage, Report
Themes, Alarm Viewer and Annunciator.
User Manager Configure Users and User Groups.

References

Configuration Links to reference information related to the content of the Configuring

references chapter.

7EN02-0409-00 Page13
Configuring Web Applications Guide

(Software) Alarm Configuration

TIP: You can open Alarm Configuration from the SETTINGS > Configuration Tools page in Web
Applications or from Management Console > Tools > Web Tools.

Use Alarm Configuration to set up software based alarms in PME. For software based alarms, the
alarm conditions are defined and monitored in the software instead of on the device. PME provides
Alarm Templates to simplify the configuration of software based alarms. Software based alarms
can be defined for real-time data or for logged data.

Real-time Alarms
These Alarms are based on real-time data coming from monitoring devices. Reliable communication
links to the devices are required for these Alarms to function correctly. Use real-time Alarms for
alarming on power system operational parameters such as currents and voltages.

The following real-time Alarm Templates are available:

See Real-time Alarms UI for information on Real-time Alarms configuration.

Logged Data Alarms

These Alarms are based on data that has been logged to the database. Logging of the required data
must be configured and data logs must be in the database for these Alarms to function correctly.
Use logged data Alarms for alarming on consumption type parameters, such as energy or WAGES.

PME provides two types of logged data Alarms, Fixed Setpoint Alarms and Smart Setpoint Alarms:

Fixed Setpoint Alarms

Fixed Setpoint Alarms use pre-defined, fixed threshold values for the Active and Inactive
conditions. For example, you can configure an Over Demand Alarm that goes Active when the
Demand exceeds 800 kW, and goes Inactive when the Demand falls below 600 kW. The following
Fixed Setpoint Alarm templates are available:

Template Notes
Set up Alarms for over or under demand. Demand
data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
Demand
generated by this template are categorized as
Demand Alarms.
Set up Alarms for water consumption. Water volume
data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
Water Consumption
generated by this template are categorized as Water
Alarms.
Set up Alarms for compressed air monitoring. Air
volume data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
Air Consumption
generated by this template are categorized as Air
Alarms.

Page 14 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Template Notes
Set up Alarms for fuel gas monitoring. Gas volume
data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
Gas Consumption
generated by this template are categorized as Gas
Alarms.
Set up Alarms for electric consumption. Electric
energy data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
Electricity Consumption
generated by this template are categorized as
Electricity Alarms.
Set up Alarms for steam monitoring. Steam volume
data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
Steam Consumption
generated by this template are categorized as Steam
Alarms.
Set up Alarms for any logged analog measurement in
Datalog Setpoint your system. Data logs for the measurement are
required for this Alarm.
Set up Alarms for any logged digital measurement in
Datalog Digital Setpoint your system. Data logs for the measurement are
required for this Alarm.

See Logged Data Alarms UI (Fixed Setpoint) for information on fixed setpoint logged data Alarm
configuration.

Smart Setpoint Alarms

Smart Setpoint Alarms use threshold values for Active and Inactive conditions that are based on
data of the monitored input measurement itself. For example, you can configure an Over Demand
Alarm that goes Active when the Demand is the "Highest Value in last 30 days", or when the value
is "Abnormally High for the day of the week". The following Smart historical Alarm Templates are
available:

Template Notes
Set up Alarms for over or under demand. Demand
Demand data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
(Smart Setpoint) generated by this template are categorized as
Demand Alarms.
Set up Alarms for water consumption. Water volume
Water Consumption data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
(Smart Setpoint) generated by this template are categorized as Water
Alarms.
Set up Alarms for compressed air monitoring. Air
Air Consumption volume data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
(Smart Setpoint) generated by this template are categorized as Air
Alarms.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 15
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Template Notes
Set up Alarms for fuel gas monitoring. Gas volume
Gas Consumption data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
(Smart Setpoint) generated by this template are categorized as Gas
Alarms.
Set up Alarms for electric consumption. Electric
Electricity Consumption energy measurement data logs are required for this
(Smart Setpoint) Alarm. Alarms generated by this template are
categorized as Electricity Alarms.
Set up Alarms for steam monitoring. Steam volume
Steam Consumption data logs are required for this Alarm. Alarms
(Smart Setpoint) generated by this template are categorized as Steam
Alarms.
Set up Alarms for any logged analog measurement in
Datalog Setpoint
your system. Data logs for the measurement are
(Smart Setpoint)
required for this Alarm.

See Logged Data Alarms UI (Smart Setpoint) for information on fixed setpoint logged data Alarm
configuration.

Alarm Configuration considerations

Take the following into account when using the Alarm Configuration application:

l Configuring many Alarm Rules with short update intervals can affect overall system per-
formance.

l Alarm state is not evaluated if a device is disabled in Management Console. For example, a
communication loss is not triggered ON or OFF for a disabled device. Activities like main-
tenance on a meter can be done without the need to change the Alarm Rule.

l Communication Loss Alarms are only applied to physical devices. Any logical devices or down-
stream devices are removed from the Alarm Rule.

l The Alarm Rule name must be unique in the system. That means you cannot have two Alarm
Rules defined with the same name.

l The Alarm Name must be unique for a source. That means you cannot enable two Alarms with
the same Alarm Name for the same source.

To configure software Alarms, see:

l Adding a new Alarm Rule

l Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule

l Editing an Alarm Rule

l Duplicating an Alarm Rule

l Deleting an Alarm Rule

l Using the Setpoint Calculator

l Adding a Schedule

Page 16 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

For reference information see:

l Schedules

l Alarm Configuration UI

l Add Alarm Rule UI

l Schedules Configuration UI

7EN02-0409-00 Page 17
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Adding a new Alarm Rule

Add a new Alarm Rule to monitor and alarm on specific conditions in your power system.
To add a new Alarm Rule:

1. In Alarm Configuration, select the Alarm Rules tab, and then click Add Alarm Rule to open
the Add Alarm Rule window.

2. In Add Alarm Rule, select the Alarm Template that best matches the Alarm you want to cre-
ate. Click Next.

3. Select the measurements to alarm on. Click Next.

NOTE: Some Alarm Templates have preselected, recommended measurements. You can
accept these recommended measurements, or select your own.

4. Specify an Alarm Name, the Input Evaluation, Active Condition, Inactive Condition, and
Advanced settings. Click Next.

NOTE: For Smart Alarms, specify the Smart Setpoint conditions instead of the Input
Evaluation.

5. Select the sources to which you want to apply this Alarm Rule. Click Next.

NOTE: Source selection is optional for adding a new alarm rule. However, the alarm rule
cannot be enabled until the sources are selected.

6. (Optional) Select an Alarm Schedule that you want to use for this Alarm Rule. Click Next.

You can Add a new Schedule by clicking Add Schedule. See Adding a Schedule for more
information

7. Specify an Alarm Rule name, enable or disable the Rule, and enable or disable real-time Alarm
Status measurements.

NOTE: By default, real-time Alarm Status measurements are disabled, which means that
information about the state of the Alarm is only available through the Alarms application.
Enable real-time Alarm Status measurements if you want to access Alarm state information
in Diagrams, Trends, or other real-time applications in PME. These status measurements
are not currently available in the VIP/Designer.

8. Click Finish.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm Rule

l Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule

l Editing an Alarm Rule

l Duplicating an Alarm Rule

l Deleting an Alarm Rule

l Using the Setpoint Calculator

Page 18 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

l Adding a Schedule

l (Software) Alarm Configuration

For reference information see:

l Schedules

l Alarm Configuration UI

l Add Alarm Rule UI

l Schedules Configuration UI

7EN02-0409-00 Page 19
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule

Enable an alarm rule to start monitoring the alarm conditions defined in the rule for the linked
sources. Disable an alarm rule to stop monitoring the alarm conditions defined in the rule for the
linked sources.
To enable or disable an Alarm Rule:

1. In Alarm Configuration, select the Alarm Rules tab.

2. In the Alarm Rules table, find the row of the Rule which you want to enable or disable , and
then turn Enabled on or off in this row.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm Rule

l Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule

l Editing an Alarm Rule

l Duplicating an Alarm Rule

l Deleting an Alarm Rule

l Using the Setpoint Calculator

l Adding a Schedule

l (Software) Alarm Configuration

For reference information see:

l Schedules

l Alarm Configuration UI

l Add Alarm Rule UI

l Schedules Configuration UI

Page 20 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Editing an Alarm Rule

Edit an existing Alarm Rule to add or remove sources and measurements, or to modify the Alarm
Rule parameters such as Active and Inactive conditions.
To edit an Alarm Rule:

1. In Alarm Configuration, select the Alarm Rules tab.

2. In the Alarm Rules table, find the row of the Rule which you want to edit, and then click Edit
in this row to open the Edit Alarm Rule window.

TIP: You can also open the Edit Alarm Rule window by double-clicking the Alarm Rule in the
table or through the Edit command in the right-click context menu.

3. In Edit Alarm Rule, select the tab that contains the settings you want to change.

4. Update the settings.

5. Click Save.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm Rule

l Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule

l Editing an Alarm Rule

l Duplicating an Alarm Rule

l Deleting an Alarm Rule

l Using the Setpoint Calculator

l Adding a Schedule

l (Software) Alarm Configuration

For reference information see:

l Schedules

l Alarm Configuration UI

l Add Alarm Rule UI

l Schedules Configuration UI

7EN02-0409-00 Page 21
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Duplicating an Alarm Rule

Duplicate an existing Alarm Rule to save time when creating a new Rule that is similar to an
existing Rule.
To duplicate an Alarm Rule:

1. In Alarm Configuration, select the Alarm Rules tab.

2. In the Alarm Rules table, find the row of the Rule which you want to duplicate, and then click

Duplicate in this row to open the Edit Alarm Rule window.

TIP: You can also duplicate an Alarm Rule through the Duplicate command in the right-click
context menu.

3. In Edit Alarm Rule, review the Rule settings in the different tabs and update the settings for
the duplicated Rule as needed.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm Rule

l Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule

l Editing an Alarm Rule

l Duplicating an Alarm Rule

l Deleting an Alarm Rule

l Using the Setpoint Calculator

l Adding a Schedule

l (Software) Alarm Configuration

For reference information see:

l Schedules

l Alarm Configuration UI

l Add Alarm Rule UI

l Schedules Configuration UI

Page 22 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Deleting an Alarm Rule

Delete Alarm Rules that are no longer needed.
To delete an Alarm Rule:

1. In Alarm Configuration, select the Alarm Rules tab.

2. In the Alarm Rules table, find the row of the Rule which you want to delete, and then click
Delete in this row. This opens the Delete Alarm Rule confirmation box.

TIP: You can also delete an Alarm Rule through the Delete command in the right-click
context menu.

3. Click Delete.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm Rule

l Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule

l Editing an Alarm Rule

l Duplicating an Alarm Rule

l Deleting an Alarm Rule

l Using the Setpoint Calculator

l Adding a Schedule

l (Software) Alarm Configuration

For reference information see:

l Schedules

l Alarm Configuration UI

l Add Alarm Rule UI

l Schedules Configuration UI

7EN02-0409-00 Page 23
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Using the Setpoint Calculator

Use the Setpoint Calculator to calculate values for the Active and Inactive Alarm conditions.

1. Click Calculate Values in the Add Alarm Rule - Details window for a new Alarm Rule, or
the Details tab in the Edit Alarm Rule window for an existing Alarm Rule. This opens Setpoint
Calculator.

2. In Setpoint Calculator, enter a baseline value for the measurement you want to monitor in the
Baseline entry field.

For example, for an Over Voltage alarm, assume you enter a baseline value of 480.

3. Enter a percentage value in the On Setpoint entry field to calculate when the alarm is set ON.

Using the voltage baseline of 480, if you enter a 105 as the percentage value for On
Setpoint, the calculated value is 504, which displays below the entry field.

Initially, the On Setpoint and Off Setpoint entry fields are linked. That is, the value you enter
in On Setpoint is automatically duplicated in the Off Setpoint entry field.

4. To set a different value for Off Setpoint , click the link button to disable the linking of the
entry fields, and then enter a percentage value in the Off Setpoint entry field.

The off setpoint value is calculated and displays below the entry field. For example, using the
voltage baseline of 480, if you enter 95 as the percentage value for Off Setpoint, the
calculated value is 456, which displays below the entry field.

5. Click Apply to add your setpoint values to the respective Active Condition and Inactive
Condition fields, or click Cancel to discard your entries and to close the Setpoint Calculator.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm Rule

l Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule

l Editing an Alarm Rule

l Duplicating an Alarm Rule

l Deleting an Alarm Rule

l Using the Setpoint Calculator

l Adding a Schedule

l (Software) Alarm Configuration

For reference information see:

l Schedules

l Alarm Configuration UI

l Add Alarm Rule UI

l Schedules Configuration UI

Page 24 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Adding a Schedule
Add a Schedule to be used for controlling when Alarm Rules are active and inactive. The new
Schedule will be available in the Select Alarm Schedule selection box in the Add Alarm Rule -
Schedule window for a new Alarm Rule, or the Schedule tab in the Edit Alarm Rule window for an
existing Alarm Rule.
To add a Schedule:

1. Click Add Schedule.

You can access this control in the:
Schedules tab of the main Alarm Configuration user interface

Add Alarm Rule - Schedule window (when adding a new Alarm Rule)

Edit Alarm Rule > Schedule tab (when editing an existing Alarm Rule)

2. Enter a Schedule Name.

3. Define the active and inactive days and times of the Schedule.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm Rule

l Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule

l Editing an Alarm Rule

l Duplicating an Alarm Rule

l Deleting an Alarm Rule

l Using the Setpoint Calculator

l Adding a Schedule

l (Software) Alarm Configuration

For reference information see:

l Schedules

l Alarm Configuration UI

l Add Alarm Rule UI

l Schedules Configuration UI

7EN02-0409-00 Page 25
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Schedules
Use Schedules to enable or disable Alarm Rules based on the time of day and the day of the week.
For example, you can set up an Over Demand Alarm with certain threshold conditions for
weekdays, and another Over Demand Alarm with different threshold conditions for weekends.
The following rules apply to Schedules:

l Schedules are applied in the timezone of each source. If an Alarm Rule has sources from dif-
ferent timezones, then it is possible for a Schedule to be active for some sources, and inactive
for other sources at the same time.

l If an Alarm is in the Active State when a Schedule transitions to inactive, then the Alarm is deac-
tivated.

l Real-time measurement Alarms are only evaluated when the schedule is active.

l Historical measurement Alarms are only evaluated against data that was logged when the
Schedule was active.

NOTE: A historical data log timestamp marks the end of the logging interval. For example, a
data log with a 15 minute logging interval and timestamp of 17:00 represents data for the time
interval of 16:45 - 17:00.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm Rule

l Enabling or disabling an Alarm Rule

l Editing an Alarm Rule

l Duplicating an Alarm Rule

l Deleting an Alarm Rule

l Using the Setpoint Calculator

l Adding a Schedule

l (Software) Alarm Configuration

For reference information see:

l Schedules

l Alarm Configuration UI

l Add Alarm Rule UI

l Schedules Configuration UI

Page 26 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Alarm View configuration

TIP: You can open the Alarm Viewer from the ALARMS link in the Web Applications banner.

Use the Alarms application to view Incidents, Alarms and Events. You access the information in the
Alarms application through Views which are saved in the View Library. PME comes with a number
of pre-configured System Views. These System Views cannot be deleted or modified, but you can
create additional Views and customize them to meet your needs.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

For information on how to configure the Alarms application, see:

l Adding a new Alarm View

l Copying an Alarm View

l Editing an Alarm View

l Sharing an Alarm view

l Moving an Alarm View

l Deleting an Alarm View

l Setting a default Alarm View

l Changing the Alarm Viewer settings

l Deactivating alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarms UI

For information on how to use Alarms, see Alarm View operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 27
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Adding a new Alarm View

Add new Alarm Views to access certain types of Alarms, Incidents, or Events. For example, create
Views to only see unacknowledged Alarms, high priority Alarms, or power quality Incidents. You
can also create Views that only include certain sources, and so eliminate information you are not
interested in.
To add a completely new Alarm View:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open the View Library and navigate to the folder where you want to create
the View.

(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

NOTE: The System Views folder is read-only. You cannot add folders or Alarm Views to the
System Views folder.

2. In the View Library, at the bottom of the panel, click Add View , or click Add View in the
Options menu at the top of the Library. This creates a new View and opens View Settings.

3. In View Settings, enter a View Name, select a Location where to save the View in the library,
set access permissions, and select the View Type.

4. Adjust the filter settings for Priority, State, Sources, and Categories to customize the View if
necessary.

NOTE: Not all of these filters are available for all View Types.

5. Save the View.

To add a copy of an existing Alarm View:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open the View Library and navigate to the View you want to copy.

2. Right-click the View name or click Options for this View, and select Duplicate to create a
copy in the same folder. Select Copy To to create a copy in a different folder.

3. (Optional) In the View Library, select the new View, right-click the View name or click Options
for this View, and select Edit to open View Settings. You can also open View Settings by
double-clicking the View name. Change the View name, and adjust the filter settings for Pri-
ority, State, Sources, and Categories to customize the View if necessary.

NOTE: Not all of these filters are available for all View types.

4. Save the View.

NOTE: To add a copy of a System View, use Copy To to create a copy in a different location. You
can also open the System View for Edit and then click Save as New in the View Settings to create
a copy in View Library > Home. You cannot use Duplicate because the System Views folder is
read-only.

Page 28 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm View

l Copying an Alarm View

l Editing an Alarm View

l Sharing an Alarm view

l Moving an Alarm View

l Deleting an Alarm View

l Setting a default Alarm View

l Changing the Alarm Viewer settings

l Deactivating alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarms UI

For information on how to use Alarms, see Alarm View operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 29
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Copying an Alarm View

Copy Alarm Views to quickly create new Views that are the same as, or similar to existing Views.
For example, create a copy of a View to experiment with the View Settings without affecting the
original View. You can also use a copy of a View as a starting point for a new View that shares
many of the settings of the original View.
To copy an Alarm View:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open the View Library and navigate to the View you want to copy.

2. Right-click the View name or click Options for this View, and select Duplicate to create a
copy in the same folder. Select Copy To to create a copy in a different folder.

3. (Optional) In the View Library, select the new View, right-click the View name or click Options
for this View, and select Edit to open View Settings. You can also open View Settings by
double-clicking the View name. Change the View name, and adjust the filter settings for Pri-
ority, State, Sources, and Categories to customize the View if necessary.

NOTE: Not all of these filters are available for all View types.

4. Save the View.

NOTE: You cannot Duplicate a System View because the System Views folder is read-only. Use
Copy To instead to create a copy in a different location.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm View

l Copying an Alarm View

l Editing an Alarm View

l Sharing an Alarm view

l Moving an Alarm View

l Deleting an Alarm View

l Setting a default Alarm View

l Changing the Alarm Viewer settings

l Deactivating alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarms UI

For information on how to use Alarms, see Alarm View operation.

Page 30 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Editing an Alarm View

Edit Alarm Views to update the View name, the filter settings, or the location of the View in the View
Library.

NOTE: You cannot overwrite System Views. If you edit the settings of a System View and click
Save as New, a copy of the View is created in View Library > Home.

To edit an Alarm View:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open the View Library and navigate to the View you want to edit.

2. Right-click the View name or click Options for this View, and select Edit to open View Set-
tings. You can also open View Settings by double-clicking the View name. Change the View
name, and adjust the filter settings for Priority, State, Sources, and Categories to customize
the View as necessary.

NOTE: Not all of these filters are available for all View types.

3. Save the View.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm View

l Copying an Alarm View

l Editing an Alarm View

l Sharing an Alarm view

l Moving an Alarm View

l Deleting an Alarm View

l Setting a default Alarm View

l Changing the Alarm Viewer settings

l Deactivating alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarms UI

For information on how to use Alarms, see Alarm View operation.

Sharing an Alarm view

Share Alarm Views with other user groups.

NOTE: For Sharing to be enabled, at least one user group, in addition to the Global group, must be
configured. To share an item with another user group, you must be a member of that group.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 31
Configuring Web Applications Guide

To share an Alarm View:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open the View Library and navigate to the View you want to share.

2. Right-click the View name or click Options for this View, and select Share. This opens the
Share View window.

3. In Share View, select the User Groups you want to share this View with.
(Optional) Specify a name for the shared View. The groups you are sharing this View with will
see this name. The name of the original View remains unchanged.

4. Click OK to share this View.

NOTE: When you share an item with another User Group, it appears in the Shared folder of this
group. You cannot share a shared item.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm View

l Copying an Alarm View

l Editing an Alarm View

l Sharing an Alarm view

l Moving an Alarm View

l Deleting an Alarm View

l Setting a default Alarm View

l Changing the Alarm Viewer settings

l Deactivating alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarms UI

For information on how to use Alarms, see Alarm View operation.

Page 32 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Moving an Alarm View

Move Alarm Views to a different location in the View Library to make them easier to find or easier to
manage.
To move an Alarm View:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open the View Library and navigate to the View you want to move.

2. Right-click the View name or click Options for this View, and select Move To. This opens
the Select Location window.

3. In Select Location, select the location you want to move this View to.

4. Click OK to move the View .

NOTE: You cannot move System Views or the System Views folder.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm View

l Copying an Alarm View

l Editing an Alarm View

l Sharing an Alarm view

l Moving an Alarm View

l Deleting an Alarm View

l Setting a default Alarm View

l Changing the Alarm Viewer settings

l Deactivating alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarms UI

For information on how to use Alarms, see Alarm View operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 33
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Deleting an Alarm View

Delete Alarm Views that are no longer needed.
To delete an Alarm View:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open the View Library and navigate to the View you want to delete.

2. Right-click the View name or click Options for this View, and select Delete

3. In Delete Content, click Yes, to delete the View from the View Library.

NOTE: You cannot delete System Views or the System Views folder.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm View

l Copying an Alarm View

l Editing an Alarm View

l Sharing an Alarm view

l Moving an Alarm View

l Deleting an Alarm View

l Setting a default Alarm View

l Changing the Alarm Viewer settings

l Deactivating alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarms UI

For information on how to use Alarms, see Alarm View operation.

Page 34 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Setting a default Alarm View

The default Alarm View is the View that opens when you first open the Alarms application. You can
set a default for your own workspace or the entire system.

NOTE: Only users with Supervisor access level can set a default for the system.

To set a default Alarm View:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open the View Library and navigate to the View you want to set as
default.

2. Right-click the View name or click Options for this View, and select Set as default. This
opens the Configure Default Item dialog.

3. In Configure Default Item, enable Set as my default or Set as system default.

4. Click OK to save the default settings.

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm View

l Copying an Alarm View

l Editing an Alarm View

l Sharing an Alarm view

l Moving an Alarm View

l Deleting an Alarm View

l Setting a default Alarm View

l Changing the Alarm Viewer settings

l Deactivating alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarms UI

For information on how to use Alarms, see Alarm View operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 35
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Deactivating alarms
Active alarms can continue to appear in the Alarms viewer if, for example, an alarm dropout has not
been configured, or a device has been removed from the network after an alarm was issued. In such
cases you can use the Deactivate Alarms utility to remove these permanently active alarms from
the Alarms viewer.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

To use the Deactivate Alarms utility:

1. Open Management Console and select Tools > Deactivate Alarms to open the dialog.

2. Select a date for the Show Active Alarms older than field if you want to change the default
date.

3. Click Load Active Alarms to display a list of the active alarms that are older than the date
specified.

4. Use the Select column to select the alarms that you want to set to an inactive state. You can
also click Select All to select all of the alarms displayed in the grid. Use Select None to clear
the selection of any alarms listed.

5. Click Set Selected Alarms to Inactive.

The Active column displays N for all alarms set to the inactive state.

6. Click Done to close the Deactivate Alarms dialog and then close Management Console.

When you log in to Management Console again and open the Deactivate Alarms dialog, the
number of alarms shown in the Alarms Displayed field matches the number in the Alarms
Displayed field in the All Active Alarms view in the Alarms application. (The Alarms
application is available in the Web Applications component.)

Related topics:

l Adding a new Alarm View

l Copying an Alarm View

l Editing an Alarm View

l Sharing an Alarm view

Page 36 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

l Moving an Alarm View

l Deleting an Alarm View

l Setting a default Alarm View

l Changing the Alarm Viewer settings

l Deactivate alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarms UI

For information on how to use Alarms, see Alarm View operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 37
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Dashboards configuration
Use the Dashboards application to view high level historical and real-time data, for example Key
Performance Indicators (KPIs). The information in the Dashboards application is accessed through
dashboards with gadgets. Dashboards are saved in the Dashboard Library. In addition to viewing
individual dashboards, you can create slideshows to automatically display a sequence of
dashboards.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Power Monitoring Expert (PME) does not provide any pre-configured dashboards or slideshows.
Configure your own dashboards, gadgets, and slideshows to meet your needs.

Open the Dashboards application from the Dashboards link in the Web Applications banner.
For information on how to configure the Dashboards application, see:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see Dashboards user interface (UI).

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

Page 38 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Adding a new dashboard

Add new dashboards to view high level historical and real-time data, for example in the form of Key
Performance Indicators (KPIs).

NOTE: Only you and supervisor level Users can view, edit, and delete a Private dashboard.

To add a completely new dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the folder where you want to cre-
ate the dashboard.

2. (Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

3. In the Dashboard Library, at the bottom of the panel, click Add Dashboard . This creates
a new dashboard and opens the Dashboard Settings.

4. In Dashboard Settings, enter a dashboard name, select a location and set the access per-
missions to Public or Private.

5. (Optional) Click Styling to open the Dashboard Styling window. In Dashboard Styling, select
a background image or background color for the dashboard and set the default opacity for the
gadgets. See Styling a dashboard for more details.

6. (Optional) You can add gadgets to the dashboard now, or save the empty dashboard and add
gadgets later. See Adding a gadget to a dashboard for more details.

7. Save the dashboard.

To add a copy of an existing dashboard to the Library:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to copy.
(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard, and select Duplicate to
create a copy in the same folder. Select Copy To to create a copy in a different folder.

3. (Optional) In the Dashboard Library, select the new dashboard, right-click the dashboard name
or click Options for this dashboard, and select Edit to open the Dashboard Settings.
Change the dashboard name.

4. Save the modified Dashboard Settings.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

7EN02-0409-00 Page 39
Configuring Web Applications Guide

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

Page 40 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Editing a dashboard
Edit dashboards to update the dashboard name, add new gadgets, change the dashboard styling,
change the access permissions or change the location of the dashboard in the Dashboard Library.

NOTE: Only you and supervisor level Users can view, edit, and delete a Private dashboard.

To edit a dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to edit.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard, and select Edit to open
the Dashboard Settings. Change the dashboard name, add gadgets, change the dashboard
styling, change the access permissions, or change the location of the dashboard in the
Library. For dashboard styling, see Styling a dashboard for more details.

3. Save the modified dashboard settings.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 41
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Sharing a dashboard
Share dashboards with other User Groups.

NOTE: For Sharing to be enabled, at least one user group, in addition to the Global group, must be
configured. To share an item with another user group, you must be a member of that group.

To share a dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to share.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard, and select Share. This
opens the Share Dashboard window.

3. In Share Dashboard, select the User Groups you want to share this dashboard with.

4. (Optional) Specify a name for the shared dashboard. The groups you are sharing this dash-
board with will see this name. The name of the original dashboard remains unchanged.

5. Click OK to share this dashboard.

NOTE: When you share an item with another User Group, it appears in the Shared folder of this
group. You cannot share a shared item.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

Page 42 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Moving a dashboard
Move dashboards to a different location in the Dashboard Library to make them easier to find or
easier to manage.
To move a dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to move.
(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard, and select Move To....
This opens the Select Location window.

3. In Select Location, select the location where you want to move this dashboard.

4. Click OK to move the dashboard.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 43
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Deleting a dashboard
Delete dashboards that are no longer needed.
To delete a dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to delete.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard, and select Delete

3. In Delete Content, click Yes, to delete the dashboard from the Dashboard Library.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

Page 44 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Set default options for a dashboard

The default dashboard is the one that is displayed when you first open Dashboards. You can set a
dashboard to be your own personal default, or the default for the system.

NOTE: For each user, Set as my default supersedes Set as system default. For example, if a
user with supervisor level access sets a dashboard as the system default dashboard, and another
user sets a different dashboard as their default dashboard, that user's default dashboard takes
priority over the system default dashboard, but only for them.

To set the default options for a dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library and navigate to the dashboard you want to set as
default.

2. Right-click the dashboard name or click Options for this dashboard, and select Set as
default to open the Configure Default Item dialog.

3. Turn on one or both of Set as my default and Set as system default.

4. Click OK to save the modified Dashboard Settings.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 45
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Configuring a slideshow
Use the Slideshow Manager to create, edit, or delete a slideshow.

Creating a slideshow
To create a slideshow:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library, and click Slideshow Manager in the Settings
menu at the top of the library

2. In Slideshow Manager, click Add Slideshow to open the Add New Slideshow dialog.

3. Type a name for the slideshow in the Name field.

4. Click any of the dashboards in the Shared Dashboards list to add them to the Dashboard
Playlist area on the right. Alternatively, begin typing in the Search field to filter the list for
selection.

The dashboards are listed in the Playlist area in the order that you selected them.

5. To modify the list of dashboards in the Dashboard Playlist, click the dashboard name to dis-
play the edit options, then:
a. Click the Delete icon to remove the dashboard from the Playlist.

b. Click the Up or Down arrow to move the dashboard to an earlier or later sequence in the
Playlist, respectively.

6. Select the speed for the transition from dashboard to dashboard in the Select Transition
Time list.

7. Click OK to save your slideshow.

8. Click Close to close the Slideshow Manager.

Editing an existing slideshow

To edit an existing slideshow:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library, and click Slideshow Manager in the Settings
menu at the top of the library

2. In Slideshow Manager, click the slideshow you want to edit, then click Edit to open the Edit
Slideshow dialog.

3. Change the name of slideshow, modify the dashboards in the play list, change the slide cap-
tion for the slideshow, or adjust the slide transition time.

4. Click OK to save your changes and to return to the Slideshow Manager.

5. Click Close to close the Slideshow Manager.

Deleting a slideshow
To delete a slideshow:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library, and click Slideshow Manager in the Settings
menu at the top of the library

2. In Slideshow Manager, click the slideshow you want to delete, then click Delete to open the
Delete Slideshow dialog.

Page 46 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

3. Click OK to permanently delete the slideshow and to return to the Slideshow Manager.

4. Click Close to close the Slideshow Manager.

Sharing a slideshow
To share a slideshow:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboard Library, and click Slideshow Manager in the Settings
menu at the top of the library

2. In Slideshow Manager, click the slideshow you want to share, then click Share to open the
Share Slideshow URL dialog.

The dialog includes the URL for the slideshow, which you can copy and distribute so that
others can access the slideshow.

NOTE: The client browser must have access to the URL to view the slideshow.

3. Click Close to close the Slideshow Manager.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 47
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Adding a gadget to a dashboard

Add gadgets to a dashboard to display historical and real-time data. Without gadgets, a dashboard
does not display any data.

NOTE: Gadgets that require special licensing only appear in the list after the correct licensing has
been installed.

To add a gadget to the dashboard:

1. Click Add Gadget to open the Gadget Setup dialog.

By default, all gadgets are included in the dialog. To filter the gadgets by category, click one of
the categories on the left, for example Common or Comparison.

2. Select the gadget that you want to add to the dashboard and click Next.
Gadget settings are specific to each gadget. For example, some gadgets require a data series
consisting of sources and measurements, while other gadgets have no such requirement.

See Configuring Gadgets for a description of the settings.

3. Click Next to proceed through the pages of the Gadget Setup dialog.

4. Click Finish to close the Gadget Setup dialog and to add the gadget to the dashboard.

5. Repeat the process to add additional gadgets to your dashboard.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

Page 48 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Editing a gadget
To edit the settings for a gadget:

1. Click Settings in the gadget and select Edit to open the Gadget Setup.

2. In Gadget Setup, change any of the settings on the tabs.

See Configuring Gadgets for more details.

3. Click Save to update the gadget settings and to close the Gadget Setup dialog.

TIP: In gadgets where a time range has been specified when the gadgets are configured, the time
range selection is included on the gadgets in the dashboard. You can quickly change the time
range for the gadget by selecting another period of time from the list in the time range field. The
time range is applied to the gadget only while you continue to view the dashboard. If you navigate
to another dashboard and then come back to this dashboard, the time range on the gadget reverts
to the value that you set when you configured the gadget.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 49
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

You can move or resize a gadget on a dashboard when the dashboard is in edit mode.

Moving a gadget
1. Right-click a dashboard name in the Dashboard Library, then click Edit in the menu.

2. Position the mouse pointer in the title area of the gadget that you want to move.

The pointer changes to the Move shape (an image with 4 arrows).

3. Drag and drop the gadget to another position on the dashboard.

Other gadgets on the dashboard are re-positioned if additional space is required.

4. Click Finish in Dashboard Controls to save your change.

Resizing a gadget
1. Right-click a dashboard name in the Dashboard Library, then click Edit in the menu.

2. Position the mouse pointer at the lower right corner of the gadget.

A small triangular shape indicates that you can drag the corner.

3. Drag the corner to increase or reduce the size of the gadget.

Other gadgets on the dashboard are re-positioned if additional space is required.

4. Click Finish in Dashboard Controls to save your change.

Related topics:
Dashboards:

l Adding a new dashboard

l Editing a dashboard

l Sharing a dashboard

l Moving a dashboard

l Deleting a dashboard

l Set default options for a dashboard

l Configuring a slideshow

Gadgets:

l Adding a gadget to a dashboard

l Editing a gadget

l Moving or resizing a gadget on a dashboard

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to use Dashboards, see Dashboards operation.

Page 50 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Diagrams configuration
Use the Diagrams application to view historical and real-time data in one-line and graphics
diagrams.

Open the Diagrams application from the Diagrams link in the Web Applications banner.

NOTE: To display the correct local time for monitoring device data in the Diagrams application,
you must configure the TZ Offset, DST Start, DST End, and DST Offset settings on the device.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

For information on how to configure the Diagrams application, see:

l Configuring Devices diagrams

l Configuring a Network diagram

l Creating custom diagrams

l Set default options for a diagram

l Configuring Diagrams regional settings

l Diagram Library

l Diagrams registry settings

l Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

l Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

For information on how to use Diagrams, see Diagrams operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 51
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Configuring Devices diagrams

The Devices diagrams display a device type specific diagram for each device that is configured in
the system. Devices diagrams are created automatically. All you need to do is add a new device to
the Management Console, wait a short period of time for the system to generate the diagram and
update the Devices list, and then restart the Diagrams application.

The device type specific diagrams are the same as the ones used in the default Vista network
diagram.
Related topics:

l Configuring Devices diagrams

l Configuring a Network diagram

l Creating custom diagrams

l Set default options for a diagram

l Configuring Diagrams regional settings

l Diagram Library

l Diagrams registry settings

l Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

l Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

For information on how to use Diagrams, see Diagrams operation.

Page 52 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Configuring a Network diagram

Before you can view the Network Diagram in the Diagrams application, you must generate a
network diagram (network.dgm) in Vista. The Diagrams application uses the network diagram
generated in Vista for display in the browser. The network diagram is automatically added to the
Diagram Library, all you need to do is generate the network diagram in Vista, save it in the default
location, and then restart the Diagrams application.

Note that the Vista component is installed with Power Monitoring Expert on a primary server or
Engineering Client.
To generate a default network diagram in Vista:

1. Start Vista.

2. Click File > Generate network diagram.

3. Click File > Save.

Related topics:

l Configuring Devices diagrams

l Configuring a Network diagram

l Creating custom diagrams

l Set default options for a diagram

l Configuring Diagrams regional settings

l Diagram Library

l Diagrams registry settings

l Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

l Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

For information on how to use Diagrams, see Diagrams operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 53
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Creating custom diagrams

You create a custom diagram for the Diagrams application with Vista. After you created the
diagram, you must add it to the Diagram Library in the Diagrams application to make it available for
viewing.
To create a diagram:

1. Open Vista and create a new diagram. Use the Vista tools to create display objects and
embedded graphics as applicable.

2. Save the diagram to ...\Power Monitoring Expert\config\diagrams\ud or any

subfolder in this location.

Related topics:

l Configuring Devices diagrams

l Configuring a Network diagram

l Creating custom diagrams

l Set default options for a diagram

l Configuring Diagrams regional settings

l Diagram Library

l Diagrams registry settings

l Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

l Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

For information on how to use Diagrams, see Diagrams operation.

Page 54 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Set default options for a diagram

The default diagram is the one that is displayed when you first open Diagrams. You can set a
diagram to be your own personal default, or the default for the system.

NOTE: For each user, Set as my default supersedes Set as system default. For example, if a
user with supervisor level access sets a diagram as the system default diagram, and another user
sets a different diagram as their default diagram, that user's default diagram takes priority over the
system default diagram, but only for them.

To set the default options for a diagram:

1. In Diagrams, open the Diagram Library and navigate to the diagram you want to set as default.

2. Right-click the diagram name or click Options for this diagram, and select Set as default to
open the Configure Default Item dialog.

3. Turn on one or both of Set as my default and Set as system default.

4. Click OK to save the modified Diagram Settings.

Related topics:

l Configuring Devices diagrams

l Configuring a Network diagram

l Creating custom diagrams

l Set default options for a diagram

l Configuring Diagrams regional settings

l Diagram Library

l Diagrams registry settings

l Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

l Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

For information on how to use Diagrams, see Diagrams operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 55
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Configuring Diagrams regional settings

Use Diagrams Configuration in the Management Console, under the Tools menu to specify the
Regional Settings.

NOTE: Only users with Windows administrative privileges can change the regional settings for
Diagrams. This authority level is required because Windows services need to be restarted to apply
the changes.

To configure Diagrams regional settings:

1. In the Regional settings for formatting dates, times, and numbers field, select the lan-
guage and country from the list to apply the regional format for dates, times, and numbers.

2. Click OK to save your selection.

Related topics:

l Configuring Devices diagrams

l Configuring a Network diagram

l Creating custom diagrams

l Set default options for a diagram

l Configuring the Diagrams Regional Settings

l Diagram Library

l Diagrams registry settings

l Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

l Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

For information on how to use Diagrams, see Diagrams operation.

Page 56 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Diagram Library
Use the Diagram Library to access all the diagrams that you can view in the Diagrams application.
You can add diagrams to the library, edit them, share them, or delete them.

NOTE: You cannot add, edit, share, or delete Devices diagrams. See Configuring Devices
diagrams for details.

NOTE: A Network Diagram is automatically added to the library when it is generated in Vista. See
Configuring a Network diagram for details.

To add a diagram to the library:

1. In Diagrams, open the Diagram Library and navigate to the folder where you want to create the
diagram.

(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

2. In the Diagram Library, at the bottom of the panel, click the Add Diagram icon . This
opens the Diagram Settings.

3. In Diagram Settings, enter a diagram name, select a location, and select the diagram you want
to add.

4. Save the diagram.

To add a copy of an existing diagram to the library:

1. In Diagrams, open the Diagram Library and navigate to the diagram you want to copy.

2. Right-click the diagram name or click the Options icon for this diagram, and select Duplic-
ate to create a copy in the same folder. Select Copy To... to create a copy in a different folder.

(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

3. (Optional) In the Diagram Library, select the new diagram, right-click the diagram name or
click the Options icon for this diagram, and select Edit to open the Diagram Settings.
Change the diagram name.

4. Save the modified diagram settings.

To edit an existing diagram in the library:

1. In Diagrams, open the Diagram Library and navigate to the diagram you want to edit.

2. Right-click the diagram name or click the Options icon for this diagram, and select Edit to
open the Diagram Settings. Change the diagram name or location.

3. Save the modified Diagram Settings.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 57
Configuring Web Applications Guide

To share an existing diagram in the library:

1. In Diagrams, open the Diagram Library and navigate to the diagram you want to share.

2. Right-click the diagram name or click the Options icon for this diagram, and select Share....
This opens the Share Diagram window.

3. In Share Diagram, select the user groups you want to share this diagram with.

(Optional) Specify a name for the shared diagram. The groups you are sharing this diagram
with will see this name. The name of the original diagram remains unchanged.

4. Click OK to share this diagram.

NOTE: When you share a diagram with another user group, it appears in the Shared folder of this
group. You cannot share a shared diagram.

To move an existing diagram to a different location in the library:

1. In Diagrams, open the Diagram Library and navigate to the diagram you want to move.

(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

2. Right-click the diagram name or click the Options icon for this diagram, and select Move
To.... This opens the Select Location window.

3. In Select Location, select the location you want to move this diagram to.

4. Click OK to move the diagram.

To delete a diagram from the library:

1. In Diagrams, open the Diagram Library and navigate to the diagram you want to delete.

2. Right-click the diagram name or click the Options icon for this diagram, and select Delete

3. In Delete Content, click Yes, to delete the diagram from the Diagram Library.

Related topics:

l Configuring Devices diagrams

l Configuring a Network diagram

l Creating custom diagrams

l Set default options for a diagram

l Configuring Diagrams regional settings

l Diagram Library

l Diagrams registry settings

l Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

l Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

For information on how to use Diagrams, see Diagrams operation.

Page 58 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Diagrams registry settings

NOTICE
IRREVERSIBLE OPERATING SYSTEM DAMAGE OR DATA CORRUPTION
Before making any changes, back up your Windows Registry in a network folder or other remote
location.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in irreparable damage to your computer's
operating system and all existing data.

NOTE: Registry edits must be performed only by qualified and experienced personnel.

The registry keys for Diagrams on a 32-bit system are located in HKEY_LOCAL_
MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Schneider Electric\Power Monitoring Expert\9.0\WebReach.

On a 64-bit system, the registry keys are located in HKEY_LOCAL_

MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Schneider Electric\Power Monitoring
Expert\9.0\WebReach.
The following table lists the default Diagrams registry entries and settings.

Default Registry
Default Setting Description
Entries
Timeout period for the autodiagram
components to communicate with the device
AutoDiagramTimeout 20000 milliseconds
and determine the appropriate template to
open.
Time limit for a diagram subscription to update
its timestamp. If the subscription is not
ExpireTimeLimit 600 seconds
updated within this time period, it is
considered expired and is removed.
HTTPRefreshInterval 10 seconds The web page refresh rate.
The name (tag) that the subscription service
SubscriptionObject pmlitem:webreachstore:
uses to find Diagrams-related information.
The part of the Web address that points to the
VirtualDirectory ION Diagrams-generated Vista diagrams for
displaying in the browser.
The real time data update rate on the web
XMLRefreshInterval 3000 milliseconds
page.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 59
Configuring Web Applications Guide

The following table lists the optional registry entries you can set for custom functionality. Modifying
system registry keys without sufficient knowledge or experience in these procedures can damage
the computer's operating system and all existing data.

Optional Registry
Default Setting Description
Entries
This value specifies the network diagram to
display as the homepage for Diagrams. The value
x-pml:/diagrams/ud/
NetworkDiagram can be a relative path, such as the default setting,
network.dgm
or it can be an absolute file path (e.g.:
D:\customdiagrams\ud\networkB.dgm).
This value determines how long Diagrams waits
for the results of a query to return from the
database before timing out. If this registry entry is
not created or no QueryTimeout value is
specified, Diagrams times out after 60 seconds.
QueryTimeout See description
This optional registry entry is useful if you know
that a query will take more than 60 seconds to
return its results and you do not want Diagrams to
time out before then. Specify a value that gives
you enough time to get your query results.

Related topics:

l Configuring Devices diagrams

l Configuring a Network diagram

l Creating custom diagrams

l Set default options for a diagram

l Configuring Diagrams regional settings

l Diagram Library

l Diagram registry settings

l Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

l Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

For information on how to use Diagrams, see Diagrams operation.

Page 60 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

If you access the Diagrams pages directly from a browser, without the Web Applications
framework, you will not have access to the Diagram Library. In this case, Diagrams will
automatically display the default network diagram generated with Vista.

NOTE: If you access Diagrams from outside the Web Applications framework, through a browser
using the URL http://server_name/ion (where server_name is the fully-qualified name of
the server or its IP address), you are prompted to log in using your Power Monitoring Expert
credentials.

If you have a custom network diagram on the primary server that you want to use instead of the
automatically generated network diagram, you need to modify the registry settings of the computer
where you run the Diagrams application to specify the location of the custom network diagram.
Modifying system registry keys without sufficient knowledge or experience in these procedures can
damage the computer's operating system and all existing data.

NOTICE
IRREVERSIBLE OPERATING SYSTEM DAMAGE OR DATA CORRUPTION
Before making any changes, back up your Windows Registry in a network folder or other remote
location.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in irreparable damage to your computer's
operating system and all existing data.

NOTE: Registry edits must be performed only by qualified and experienced personnel.

1. Start Windows Registry Editor and navigate to:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Schneider Electric\Power Monitoring
Expert\9.0\WebReach
If the Diagrams application is run on a 64-bit operating system, navigate to:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Schneider Electric\Power
Monitoring Expert\9.0\WebReach

2. Right-click to add a new string value and name it “NetworkDiagram”.

3. Right-click NetworkDiagram, select Modify, then type the path and name of your custom net-
work diagram in the Value data field.

4. Click OK.

5. Restart IIS on your computer to apply the changes.

For more information, refer to the NetworkDiagram item in the table under Diagrams registry
settings. If there is no NetworkDiagram entry in the registry, then the default value “x-
pml:/diagrams/ud/network.dgm” is used.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 61
Configuring Web Applications Guide

The Network Diagram navigation button located on the date range page and the results page is
automatically updated to link to the custom network diagram you specified. However, the Network
Diagram button that exists in each meter user diagram uses a hard-coded link to “x-
pml:/diagrams/ud/network.dgm”. Use Vista to manually update the Network Diagram link in the
meter user diagrams. If you do not have access to Vista, contact your system administrator to
change the link for the grouping object in the network diagram as described below.

Changing the link for the grouping object in the network diagram
1. Start Vista and select Options > Show Toolbox to switch to Edit mode.

2. Right-click the grouping object in the network diagram to open the Grouping Object Con-
figuration dialog.

3. Select the Action tab and select Open User Diagram.

4. Click Browse to locate your custom network diagram. Select the diagram filename, then click
Open.

5. Click OK to save your changes.

Related topics:

l Configuring Devices diagrams

l Configuring a Network diagram

l Creating custom diagrams

l Set default options for a diagram

l Configuring Diagrams regional settings

l Diagram Library

l Diagrams registry settings

l Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

l Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

For information on how to use Diagrams, see Diagrams operation.

Page 62 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

NOTE: These diagrams are part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

Before you can use these diagrams, you must first configure the Power Quality Performance
module. You must complete the following tasks, as part of the Power Quality Performance module
configuration:

l Deploy the VIP framework for Power Quality Performance using Designer.

l Deploy and configure the Power Quality Performance Indicator and Equipment Vista diagrams.

l Configure which devices to include and exclude for each type of power quality event and dis-
turbance.

Related topics:

l Configuring Devices diagrams

l Configuring a Network diagram

l Creating custom diagrams

l Set default options for a diagram

l Configuring Diagrams regional settings

l Diagram Library

l Diagrams registry settings

l Configuring a custom network diagram for direct browser access

l Configuring Power Quality Performance diagrams

For information on how to use Diagrams, see Diagrams operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 63
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Hierarchy Manager
Depending on the number of devices you are currently monitoring, organizing the data coming from
those devices can be a difficult task. Hierarchy Manager allows you to organize the devices in
EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert into recognizable views by defining their relationships as
parts of a system model. Once the model has been created, energy data associated with the
hierarchy can be grouped, aggregated, and used by other components of Power Monitoring Expert.

The Hierarchy Manager views are intended to represent the real world electrical, physical, and
business characteristics of your organization. The items contained in a view, and how those items
relate to each other are specified using a template approach. There are several example templates
included in the product to help you create the views applicable to your organization. One of these
templates is configured when Power Monitoring Expert is first installed.

Open the Hierarchy Manager application from the Configuration Tools section on the Settings page
in the Web Applications banner. You can also open Hierarchy Manager from the Tools menu in the
Management Console.
The following topics provide specific information regarding the features and use of the Hierarchy
Manager application:

l Hierarchy templates
Nodes

Node properties

Common elements of hierarchy templates

l Creating a hierarchy

l Creating an apportioned meter

l Creating a virtual meter

l Dynamic hierarchy

l Meter apportionment

l Virtual meter

l Using hierarchies in other applications

After you have configured the views of the hierarchy structure, you can use them in different areas
of Power Monitoring Expert.

NOTE: Before using Hierarchy Manager, ensure that devices, logical devices, or managed circuits
have been added to Power Monitoring Expert through the Management Console component.

Hierarchy templates
When the Hierarchy Manager application opens, everything displayed in the application is based on
the hierarchy template defined in the system. This template defines the parameters of the model. If
you were to describe the physical layout of a building for example, you could describe the name of

Page 64 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

the building, each floor of the building, and the rooms or areas that each floor contains. The
hierarchy template for a building's physical layout does the same thing, using Nodes to represent
the different aspects of the model.

Note that a Virtual Meter Node is included in the hierarchy template. You can define virtual meters
without associating them with a hierarchy, or you can include virtual meters in a hierarchy the same
way that you include devices. You can select virtual meters for many of the reports in the Reports
application.

Each Node contains instances of that particular Node type, which in turn are defined by a set of
properties. These properties not only define the different parts of the model, they also define the
relationships that exist between the different Nodes. This is useful when aggregating the device
data used in other parts of Power Monitoring Expert.

Once the model has been created, the devices that are collecting data can be associated with the
different levels of the hierarchy that are defined in the template.

Nodes
A Node can be described as the building block of a hierarchy. Nodes are used to model a customer
system and can represent:

l Electrical equipment

l Logical concepts

l Physical locations

l Other real-world objects

Nodes are displayed in Hierarchy Manager as a set of tabs. Each tab is labeled with the name of the
part of the model it represents. Each Node displays a number of Node instances in a grid format. In
Hierarchy Manager, a Node can be described as the type of object required to model a system,
while Node instances can be thought of as the reference to the real-world objects in that system.
For example, if 'Car' is used as an example of a Node, then 'my Corvette' could describe an
instance of the Car Node.

A hierarchy that represents the physical layout of a company's industrial site might have a Site
Node, a Building Node, and an Areas Node. Each of those Nodes can contain instances of that
Node type. Under the Building Node for example, you could list the different buildings located in a
particular site. The Properties of each of these Nodes are specified by the user.

Each Node instance is represented in the system as a set of properties that define the
characteristics of that instance. These properties can be further broken down into Attributes and
References.

Node properties
Attributes and References can be used to describe the properties of a Node, and their relationships
to other Nodes. These properties provide the context that helps to describe the different parts of the

7EN02-0409-00 Page 65
Configuring Web Applications Guide

model. For example, a Node called Floors might contain attributes such as floor number, and
references such as the association between the Floors Node and the Building Node, or the
association between Floors and Areas.

Attributes
The Attributes of a Node describe the properties of that Node, such as its name and characteristics.
These Attributes could include the breaker rating of an electrical panel or contact information of a
tenant. For example, a Node called Buildings that is part of a physical layout hierarchy could have
an Attribute such as the building name.

Attributes are configurable by entering information into an Attribute field. To add Attribute content to
a new Node instance, select a tab and click Add. To edit existing Attribute content, double-click a
Node instance, or highlight it and click Edit. When the Properties dialog opens, select an attribute
field by clicking in the applicable field and entering the necessary information. Click OK when you
finish specifying all of the necessary attributes for the Node.

References
References describe how a Node in a hierarchy is associated with other Nodes. For example, in a
hierarchy that describes the physical layout of a company's building, a Node called Floor could have
a reference that describes its association with a Node called Areas. These references indicate
which offices are part of each floor. In this example, since a Floor can contain many offices, it is
considered a one-to-many association. Since an office can only be associated with a single floor, it
is considered a one-to-one association. By making these connections between the Nodes, the
hierarchy structure of the model begins to take shape.

Reference fields require clicking Add, Edit, or Delete. To add reference content to a Node instance,
click Add for the reference, then select the appropriate entry from the list that appears. You can also
enter dynamic hierarchy time ranges in this section.

To edit existing reference content, double-click the entry in the grid, or highlight it and click Edit, and
then make the necessary changes. In most cases, this change would involve either the start or end
dates of the particular reference.

To delete existing reference content, select an entry from the applicable reference type and click
Delete.

NOTE: The Delete button should not be used to end an association with a particular Node
instance. In situtations where a relationship between two Node instances ends after a certain
date, the ideal solution is to edit the references and change the To field to a specific end date that
defines the time range for the relationship. See Creating a hierarchy for more information.

Common elements of hierarchy templates

The components that make up Hierarchy Manager can appear differently depending on the hierarchy
template installed in the system. Although these different hierarchy templates can have different tab
and property names, and the relationships between the Nodes differ, the method used to modify the
hierarchy is similar for most templates. This section provides information regarding the basic steps
to modifying a hierarchy, regardless of the template used.

Page 66 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Hierarchy Manager has a series of tabs across the top of the page. These tabs are the
representation of the Nodes. Clicking on any of these tabs displays the instances of the Node types
in a grid format.

The process involved with creating an instance of a Node type is the same for most hierarchy
templates. To create a new instance, select the applicable tab and click Add. The Properties
window opens, containing fields that represent the properties for that particular Node instance. Any
required fields are identified with a Required message. Click in the attribute fields and enter the
necessary information. Reference fields are selected from a grid, and can also have a time
dimension associated with them (see Dynamic hierarchy for additional information). Click Add to
open the Select dialog and select the applicable item from the grid. If there are no items to choose
from, you might need to create a new instance for that Node type.

To edit an instance of a Node type, click the applicable tab, double-click an instance in the grid, or
select it and click Edit. Make the changes to the applicable fields in the Properties dialog and click
OK.

To delete an existing instance of a Node type, select the applicable tab, select an instance on that
tab and click Delete. After you confirm the delete action, the instance disappears from the grid, and
any reference information regarding the deleted instance is removed from all affected Node
instances.

Tree View
Displaying the views of a template is also similar for most template types. You can see the view of
a hierarchy by clicking the Show Views link. The view shows the different levels of the hierarchy,
and the date range for each entry of the hierarchy.

Date Range: Use the To and From fields to select the date range to display the hierarchy.

Available Views: Use this section to switch between different views if there is more than one view
available. The available views are determined by the hierarchy template. Click Update when you
change the date range, the scale, or view.

Scale: Select Days or Months to provide the appropriate scale to the hierarchy view.

Beside each hierarchy level is a bar that indicates when in the date range the Node was part of the
hierarchy. If the bar has a rounded edge, the Node reference has an end date within the date range.
If the bar has a square edge, the Node reference continues beyond the date range.

You can click the pencil (edit) icon to the left of the bars to open and edit the properties for the
related item.

If you do not see a node in the hierarchy view, make sure the date range includes the date that Node
was part of the hierarchy. You can view the date range for a hierarchy entry by hovering the pointer
on it.

Creating a hierarchy
The following example uses the default hierarchy template (with Site, Buildings, and Areas nodes)
to illustrate the basic functionality of Hierarchy Manager.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 67
Configuring Web Applications Guide

In this scenario, you are the facility manager for Faber College. The college includes three buildings,
two of which have already been added to Hierarchy Manager. Building Three has just been
completed, and you must add this building information into Hierarchy Manager. This involves
creating a new building and areas entries, and adding devices to the areas, all beginning on a
specific date.

At the same time, renovations to Building Two have just been completed which include the
replacement of several meters. In Hierarchy Manager, you must swap the old devices with the new
by changing the end date for the existing devices to the day they were removed. New devices must
be associated with their correct areas and their start dates must correspond to the date they were
installed.

Open Hierarchy Manager

You need an access level of Supervisor, Controller, or Operator to use the application.

1. Open Hierarchy Manager in one of the following ways:

Click Settings in Web Applications, and then click Hierarchy Manager in the Con-
figuration Tools panel.

Open Management Console and click Tools > Hierarchy Manager.

2. Type a user name and password in the Log In dialog, if required, and click OK to open
Hierarchy Manager.

Site, Buildings, and Areas tabs represent each Node type.

In the following steps, devices have already been added to the system through Management
Console, and the hierarchy has been populated with site, building, and area information. For
additional information regarding adding devices to the system, refer to the "Management
Console" section of the Power Monitoring Expert System Guide.

Add Building Three to the hierarchy

1. Click the Buildings tab.

The Buildings grid includes Building One and Two, the site they are associated with, and the
areas defined for each building.

Page 68 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

2. To add Building Three, click Add above the Buildings grid to open the Properties dialog for the
Buildings node, then type Building Three in the Name field.

3. Click Add above the Site grid to open the Add Site References dialog and select the Faber
College site name in the grid.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 69
Configuring Web Applications Guide

4. Click the From date field or click the calendar icon beside it. Select a start date of March 15 in
the calendar.

When you select the date, the calendar closes.

5. Confirm that the date has changed in the Start Date column under Sites, then click OK.

Page 70 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Associate areas and devices to Building Three

1. Click the Areas tab.

Four new areas need to be created: Room 3A to Room 3D. You need to associate these areas
with the new building, and assign devices to each area. Set the start date for all of these to
March 15.

2. Click Add above the Areas grid to open the Properties dialog for the Areas node, then type
Room 3A in the Name field.

3. Click Add above the Building grid to open the Add Building References dialog.

4. Select Building Three in the grid.

5. Click the From field or click the calendar icon beside it. Select the start date of March 15 in the
calendar.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 71
Configuring Web Applications Guide

When you select the date, the calendar closes.

6. Confirm that the date has changed in the From field under Building, then click OK.

7. Click Add above the Device grid to open the Add Device References dialog.

8. Select Faber.Bldg3A to assign it to the Room 3A.

9. Click the From field or click the calendar icon beside it. Select the start date of March 15 in the
calendar.

When you select the date, the calendar closes.

10. Confirm that the date has changed in the Start Date column under Device, then click OK.

11. Follow the same steps to create Room 3B, 3C, and 3D as areas, and assign the respective
devices Faber.Bldg3B, Faber.Bldg3C, and Faber.Bldg3D to them. The following image shows
the complete set of entries on the Areas tab.

View the hierarchy in a tree configuration

To see the hierarchy in a tree organization, switch to the Tree View by clicking Show Views. You
can use this window to select the type of view you want to see (if multiple views are available), and
the date range for the view. Click Update to refresh the view after you make your selections.

Page 72 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Click:

l The plus sign in the view to expand that entry.

l The minus sign beside an entry to collapse that part of the hierarchy.

l The pencil (edit) icon to open and edit the properties for the related item.

l The bar for each entry to see the Node name and the effective date range for that entry.

l Click Show Types to return to the initial Hierarchy Manager page.

Adding and removing devices

This part of the example involves replacing two devices in Building Two after a renovation. Set the
end dates for the devices you are replacing to the date they are removed. Then assign new devices
to the areas with their start dates set to the day the devices are installed.

The devices that you are replacing are associated with Room 2B and 2C in Building Two.
When this task is complete:

l The entry for each device is grayed-out and italicized in the hierarchy if the End Date is the cur-
rent date or earlier.

l Any reports that include these areas only includes data collected by these devices up to this
new end date.

NOTE: Date ranges extend from start of day to start of day. This means that the end date does not
include data collected for that day.

1. Open Hierarchy Manager and click the Areas tab.

2. Double-click Room 2B in the grid, or select it and click Edit to open the Properties for Room
2B dialog.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 73
Configuring Web Applications Guide

3. Double-click Faber.Bldg2B in the Device grid, or select it and click Edit to open the Edit
Device References dialog.

4. Click the To field, or click the calendar icon beside it. Select the end date of March 15 in the
calendar.

When you select the date, the calendar closes.

5. Confirm that the date has changed in the End Date column under Device, then click OK.

You can now associate the new device with this area. For the purposes of this example the
new device has already been added to the system through Management Console.

6. Click Add above the Device grid to open the Add Device References dialog.

7. Select the new device, Faber.Bld2BN.

8. Click the From field, or click the calendar icon beside it. Select the start date of March 15 in
the calendar.

When you select the date, the calendar closes.

9. Confirm that the date has changed in the Start Date column under Device, then click OK.

10. Perform the same steps for Room 2C.

When you complete these tasks, any reports that include these areas with a date range that
extends beyond the device start date includes data collected by these new devices as of their start
date. The reports do not include any data for the removed devices as of their end date.

Creating an apportioned meter

You can create an apportioned meter when you add a device to a hierarchy node by changing the
value in the Percentage field in the Add Device References dialog. The default value is 100 percent.
The percentage can be a negative, positive, or integer value. The percentage field is restricted to 15
characters. Time intervals for apportioned meters function in the same way as devices. See Meter
apportionment for more information.

Page 74 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

NOTE: You cannot edit the percentage for an apportioned device after you set it. To change the
percentage, you need to change the end date and add the device with a new start date and updated
apportionment percentage, or delete it from the hierarchy and add it again as new entry with the
required percentage.

To create an apportioned meter:

1. Select the device you want to apportion in the Add Device References dialog.

2. Change the value in the Percentage field.

3. If required, click the From or To fields to change the start and end dates for the apportioned
meter.

4. Click OK.

The following image shows that Faber.Bldg2A has an apportioned value of 75 percent as of March
15.

Creating a virtual meter

The Virtual Meter tab includes Add, Edit, and Delete controls above a data grid showing any
previously created virtual meters.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 75
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Add: Selecting Add opens the Properties dialog. Type a name for the virtual meter and click Add in
the Devices area to select devices to attach to it. You can attach a device, a previously created
virtual meter, or an apportioned meter in the same way you attach a device to a hierarchy node.

Time intervals of the attached devices operate in the same manner as time intervals on meters
attached to hierarchy nodes.

Edit: Editing a virtual meter is like editing the relationship between a hierarchy node and a device.
You can add, edit, or delete virtual meters but you need to ensure that your changes respect time
intervals.

For example, if you are replacing a meter, you need to update the End Date for it and you need to
specify an appropriate Start Date for the new meter. Do not delete the original meter as this
removes the meter historically.

Delete: You can delete a virtual meter but you need to take care when doing so. When you delete a
virtual meter, the relationships between all hierarchy nodes and the virtual meter are removed.

Page 76 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Adding a virtual meter to a hierarchy node

After you create a virtual meter, it appears in device lists with the other devices. You can attach a
virtual meter to a hierarchy node in the same way as the other devices.

See Virtual meter for more information.

Dynamic hierarchy
Another feature of Hierarchy Manager is the ability to assign devices or Node instances for discrete
units of time. Instead of devices existing in either an assigned or unassigned state independent of
time, a device can be assigned to one Node instance for a specific length of time, then assigned to
another instance for another length of time.

With this time dimension, Hierarchy Manager can be used by organizations that require an ever-
changing representation of their system. If one tenant moves out and another moves in, that change
can be reflected in the hierarchy. Energy and power usage can be tracked for each tenant over time,
and billing information can be collected, aggregated, and displayed in a report.

NOTE: If your hierarchy does not change over time you do not need to set the date ranges for the
various devices or Node instances. In Power Monitoring Expert, these static hierarchies exist from
the date when the system was first commissioned (system start), to the farthest date the system
recognizes (end of time).

Replacing or reconfiguring a device can also be captured in a hierarchy. If a device requires

replacement or reconfiguring, it can be unassigned from an instance on a specific date, and the new
or reconfigured device assigned to the same instance. The entry for the unassigned device is
grayed-out and italicized in the hierarchy if the End Date is the current date or earlier.

Dynamic hierarchies are established when you create or edit the properties of a Node instance that
is associated with a device. For example, if Customer A is set to lease a rack from a data center,
you can assign the racks and circuits to that customer on a specific date. When tenant A's lease
expires, you can remove the assignment of the racks and circuits on the expiration date and
reallocate them to tenant B.

See Creating a hierarchy for details on how to use the dynamic hierarchies function.

Meter apportionment
Meter apportionment allows you to assign a percentage of a device that has been assigned to an
area. For example, if a common area is monitored by a single meter but shared by two tenants, for
billing purposes you might want to allocate only a portion of the meter to each tenant. If tenant 1
uses 60% of the common area and tenant 2 uses 40%, you can attach 60% of a meter's reading to
the tenant 1 area node and the other 40% to the tenant 2 area node.

See Creating an apportioned meter for more information.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 77
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Virtual meter
A virtual meter allows you to aggregate measurements from any combination of devices,
apportioned meters, or other virtual meters available in Hierarchy Manager. The newly created
virtual meter can be assigned to a node in Hierarchy Manager just like any other device, and
appears in dialogs that have a Views selection. You can even create an apportioned meter from a
virtual meter.
Examples:

l Assume that there are several feeder meters connected to the main power bus and you want to
calculate the total power usage. You can create a virtual meter that includes each of the feeder
meters. Then you can choose one of the reports supporting virtual meters to generate a report
showing the total power usage for the virtual meter.

l Assume that there is a large area monitored by a single meter (M1). Within that area is a single
room that is monitored by a separate meter (M2). Tenant 1 is using the small room and Tenant 2
is using the remaining area. To calculate Tenant 2's power usage, the readings from M2 must
be subtracted from the readings of M1. This can be accomplished by assigning M1 and an
apportioned meter of M2 with an allocation of -100%, removing M2's readings from Tenant 2's
power usage calculation.

The alternative is to create a virtual meter. For example, create a new virtual meter Tenant_2_
Net_Meter, and assign the two devices, M1 and M2 (-100%), to the virtual meter. The virtual
meter is assigned to Tenant 2's node. If at some time in the future a new meter is added, you
can edit the virtual meter to include the new meter.

See Creating a virtual meter for more information.

Using hierarchies in other applications

You can use hierarchies in the following Power Monitoring Expert (PME) applications:

l Dashboards

l Reports

l Trends

In the Dashboards application, you can use hierarchies in the gadget data series selector to select
data from a source based on its location in the hierarchy. Selecting a hierarchy View allows you to
group device data at different aggregation points in the hierarchy. For example, it is possible to
create a dashboard that depicts the energy usage of a single floor in a building as a single data
series even though there are multiple meters monitoring different circuits.

You can also use hierarchies in several of the reports available in the Reports application. You can
use the source selector for these reports to select items from the hierarchy to include in the report.
As in the Dashboards application, a hierarchy View groups device data at different aggregation
points, which are then displayed in a report. In addition to the default reports, hierarchies can also be
used in custom reports that have been created for use in different solutions.

You can use hierarchies in the Trends application to select data from a source based on its location
in the hierarchy.

Page 78 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

7EN02-0409-00 Page 79
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Rate Editor
The Rate Editor is a Web-based application that lets you change cost values for items included in a
billing report.

Open the Rate Editor application from the Configuration Tools section on the Settings page in the
Web Applications banner. You can also open Rate Editor from the Tools menu in the Management
Console.

The Rate File list on the left lists all of the rate files contained in the ratelibrary folder in the Power
Monitoring Expert install location under applications\config\reports\billing report.
When you add rate files to the folder, they are included in the Rate File list.

Rate Editor User Interface

The Line Item Label and Unit Cost areas on the right list a description of line items and the
associated cost values defined in each rate file. Click a rate file to view its line items and cost
values.
To modify the unit cost value for billing report purposes:

1. Click the unit cost value that you want to change to enable editing.

2. Type the new value and press Enter to complete the update.

3. To return to the previous value, click Undo.

The rate files included in the product are examples of various billing scenarios. The files are
intended to be copied and modified to meet your specific requirements. For further information about
creating or modifying rate files, see the documentation, tutorials, and examples included in the
Billing Module Toolkit (available in the Power Monitoring Expert Exchange).

Page 80 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Reports configuration
TIP: You can open Reports from the REPORTS link in the Web Applications banner.

Use the Reports application to generate historical data reports. The reports are saved in the Report
Library. PME comes with a large number of default report templates. Use these default templates to
create new reports, or upload your own custom templates. Set up subscriptions to automatically
generate and distribute reports based on a schedule or an event.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

For information on how to configure the Reports application, refer to the following topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

7EN02-0409-00 Page 81
Configuring Web Applications Guide

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

Page 82 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Setting Reports prerequisites

Before you can use Reports, you need to specify the database to use for reporting, and you need to
configure the delivery options for report subscriptions. These settings are defined in Management
Console.
To set the prerequisites:

1. Open Management Console and select Tools > Reports Configuration to open the dialog.

2. Click the Reports tab to configure general reporting options:

From the dropdown list in the Reports Database section, select the database on which to
run reports. Only those databases and database archives compatible with Reports are lis-
ted.

(Optional) Use the slider in the Report Timeout section to set the time (in seconds) after
which Reports stops trying to complete a report generation task.

3. Click the Subscriptions tab to configure the settings for report subscriptions:
SMTP Server: Enter the IP address of your SMTP server, or the fully-qualified network
server name from which the report subscriptions are emailed.

Port: Type the port address used by your SMTP server.

Use SSL: Select this option to encrypt your user credentials.

Username: If required by your SMTP server, enter the Windows user name used to con-
figure the SMTP server settings.

Password: If required by your SMTP server, enter the password associated with the Win-
dows user name.

“From” Display Name: (Optional) Type the name that you want to appear in the “From”
field of an emailed report.

“From” Email Address: Type the email address that you want to appear in the “From”
field of the emailed report.

4. Click OK to save your changes.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

7EN02-0409-00 Page 83
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

Page 84 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Meeting individual report requirements

Different reports have different data requirements. These requirements must be met before you can
generate the report. For details on specific report requirements, see Report descriptions.
Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 85
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Adding a new report

Add new reports to meet your needs for reporting on specific data or for specific report formats. For
example, create reports for power quality, energy consumption, power demand, breaker monitoring,
and many other applications.
To add a new report:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and navigate to the folder where you want to add the
report.

(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

2. In the Report Library, click Add Report at the bottom of the panel, or click Add Report in
the Options menu at the top of the Library. This opens Add Report - Report Template
Selection.

3. In Add Report - Report Template Selection, find and select the report template you want to use
for the new report, and click OK. This opens the report template and the Report Settings for
the new report.

4. In the report template, enter and select the input parameters that you want to use for the new
report.

NOTE: The number and type of input parameters are report template specific.

5. (Optional) Click Generate Report to test the report output and adjust the input parameters if
necessary.

6. In Report Settings, enter a report Name, select a Location and access permissions, and
select which report inputs you want to save with the report.

NOTE: For saved inputs, the report uses the input values specified in step 4. For inputs that
are not saved, you need to enter input values every time the report is generated. You can
only subscribe to reports that have all the inputs saved.

7. Click Save as New in Report Settings to save the report.

The Report Library for the Global User Group in PME includes all available report templates by
default. To add a new report in this case, you can follow the steps described above, or do the
following.
To add a new report to the Report Library in the Global User Group:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and navigate to the report template you want to use for the
new report.

NOTE: You can identify a reports and report templates in the Report Library by their icon.
See Reports Icons for more information.

Page 86 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

2. Click the report template. This opens the report template and the Report Settings for the new
report.

3. In the report template, enter and select the input parameters that you want to use for the new
report.

NOTE: The number and type of input parameters are report template specific.

4. (Optional) Click Generate Report to test the report output and adjust the input parameters if
necessary.

5. In Report Settings, enter a report Name, select a Location and access permissions, and
select which report inputs you want to save with the report.

NOTE: For saved inputs, the report uses the input values specified in step 4. For inputs that
are not saved, you need to enter input values every time the report is generated. You can
only subscribe to reports that have all the inputs saved.

6. Click Save as New in the Report Settings to save the report.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 87
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Copying a report
Copy reports to quickly create new reports that are the same as, or similar to existing reports. For
example, create a copy of a report to experiment with the input parameters without affecting the
original report. You can also use a copy of a report as a starting point for a new report that shares
many of the input settings of the original report.

To copy a report:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and navigate to the report you want to copy.

2. Right-click the report name or click Options for this report, and select Duplicate to create a
copy in the same folder. Select Copy To to create a copy in a different folder.

3. (Optional) In the Report Library, select the new report, right-click the report name or click
Options for this report, and select Edit to open Report Settings. You can also open Report
Settings by double-clicking the report name. Change the report Name, Location and access
permissions, and the saved Report Inputs to customize the report if necessary.

4. Save the report.

NOTE: You cannot copy report templates.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

Page 88 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

7EN02-0409-00 Page 89
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Editing a report
Edit reports to update the report name, Location and access permissions, and the saved report
Inputs.
To edit a report:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and navigate to the report you want to edit.

2. Right-click the report name or click Options for this report, and select Edit to open Report
Settings. You can also open Report Settings by double-clicking the report name.

3. Change the report Name, Location and access permissions, and the saved Report Inputs to
customize the report as necessary.

4. Save the report.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

Page 90 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Moving a report
Move reports to a different location in the Report Library to make them easier to find or easier to
manage.
To move a report:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and navigate to the report you want to move.

2. Right-click the report name or click Options for this report, and select Move To. This opens
the Select Location window.

3. In Select Location, select the location you want to move this report to.

4. Click OK to move the report.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 91
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Deleting a report
Delete reports that are no longer needed.
To delete a report:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and navigate to the report you want to delete.

2. Right-click the report name or click Options for this report, and select Delete

3. In Delete Content, click Yes, to delete the report from the Report Library.

NOTE: You cannot delete report templates.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

Page 92 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Sharing a report
Share reports with other User Groups.

NOTE: For Sharing to be enabled, at least one user group, in addition to the Global group, must be
configured. To share an item with another user group, you must be a member of that group.

To share a report:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and navigate to the report you want to share.

2. Right-click the report name or click Options for this report, and select Share. This opens the
Share Report window.

3. In Share Report, select the User Groups you want to share this report with.
(Optional) Specify a name for the shared report. The groups you are sharing this report with will
see this name. The name of the original report remains unchanged.

4. Click OK to share this report.

NOTE: When you share an item with another User Group, it appears in the Shared folder of this
group. You cannot share a shared item.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 93
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Subscribing to a report
Subscribe to reports to receive scheduled report outputs or automatically generate reports based on
system events. For example, you can configure a subscription so that a report is generated monthly
and sent via email to a group of people.

NOTE: You can only create a subscription for a report that has all of its inputs saved.

To subscribe to an individual report:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and navigate to the report you want to subscribe to.

2. Right-click the report name or click Options for this report, and select Subscribe to open
Add New Subscription.

3. Continue with step 4 in "To subscribe to multiple reports" below.

To subscribe to multiple reports:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and select Manage Subscriptions from the Options
menu at the top of the Library. This opens Manage Subscriptions.

2. In Manage Subscriptions, click Add Subscriptions. This opens the reports list in Add New
Subscription.

3. From the reports list In Add New Subscription, select the reports you want to subscribe to.
Click Next.

NOTE: This creates subscriptions for all the selected reports.

4. In Add New Subscription, enter a name for the subscription in the Subscription Name field.

NOTE: This is the name that is displayed in the list when you open Manage Subscriptions
from the Options menu at the top of the Library.

5. Under Output Format, select one of the formats for the report that will be generated.

6. Under Delivery Mode, select one of the following delivery options:

Email: Click Recipients to open the Distribution List dialog.

The dialog has two tabs: Users/Groups and Manual Entry. You can use both tabs to
select and type email addresses, respectively. They are not mutually exclusive.

Users/Groups tab
The names listed on this tab are the users and groups that have been created in User
Manager. They are listed in alphabetical order. Select Order by Type to order the list
alphabetically by group then by user.
Ensure that email addresses are defined in User Manager for the users.
Select the users or groups that you want as the recipients of the generated report.
Click OK when you complete your selections.

Manual Entry tab

If you click the Manual Entry tab, type the email address of a recipient and click Add to
include the recipient's email address in the Current subscription recipients area.
Repeat this step for each recipient.

Page 94 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

To remove an email address from the Current subscription recipients area, click an
address and then click Remove.
Click OK when the list is complete.

Email Subject field

(Optional) Type the text you want to include as the subject line in the email that is sent to
the recipients.

NOTE: The limit for the number of email recipients in a subscription is 100.

File share: Type the location of the computer and folder where you want the report to be
saved. You must type the absolute pathname to the folder (including the drive letter). The
Windows user account “IONUser” must be configured with valid credentials to read and
write to that fileshare. See your system administrator for assistance. To overwrite an exist-
ing report (if one exists in the folder), select Overwrite existing file. To leave an existing
file in the folder and save the report with a new name, clear Overwrite existing file.

Printer: From the dropdown list, select the printer to which you want to send the report.

NOTE: For printed subscriptions, the printer must be a local printer on the Primary
Server. For information on setting a network printer as a local printer, consult your
server's documentation.

7. In the Subscription Schedule section, select when you want the report to be generated and
delivered. (You can type the date and time in the respective fields without using the calendar
or dropdown lists). The following items include descriptions for using the calendar and drop-
down lists.
On Trigger: Select this option to configure the subscription to run when an event occurs.
Select the event from the Deliver report on trigger list that you want to use to trigger the
subscription. To use this option, you must first configure an Event Watcher. See the
Event Watcher topic in the online help for Management Console Tools for information on
creating an Event Watcher.

Once: Select this option to run the report once at the specified date and time. Click the
Date field or calendar icon to open a calendar and select the date. You can specify the
hours and minutes by typing over the entries or using the dropdown lists. You can also
click Now to set the date and time to the current server time.

Hourly: Select this option to run the report every hour. Select the time from the Deliver
Report dropdown list (for example, on the hour, 15 minutes after the hour, and so on).

Daily: Select this option to run the report once per day at the specified time. Click the
Time of Day field to open the Choose Time dialog, and either type the hours and minutes
in the respective fields or use the dropdown lists to select the hours and minutes. You can
also click Now to set the time to the current server time.

Weekly: Select this option to run the report once per week, on the day of the week and at
the time that you specify. Select the day from the dropdown list for On. Click the Time of
Day field to open the Choose Time dialog, and either type the hours and minutes in the
respective fields or use the dropdown lists to select the hours and minutes. You can also
click Now to set the time to the current server time.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 95
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Monthly — Absolute Monthly: Select Monthly then select Absolute Monthly to run
the report on selected days in the calendar month at a specified time. Type the days in the
On calendar day(s) field. Separate multiple dates with a comma. To select a range of con-
tinguous days, separate the first and last day in the range with a hyphen. For example, to
schedule the report to run on the 1st, 10th to 15th, and 20th days of the month, type 1, 10-
15, 20. After you have entered the days, click the Time of Day field to open the Choose
Time dialog, and either type the hours and minutes in the respective fields or use the drop-
down lists to select the hours and minutes. You can also click Now to set the time to the
current server time.

Monthly — Relative Monthly: Select Monthly then select Relative Monthly to run the
report on a specific day of the week in a selected week of the month at a specified time.
For example, to set the subscription to run on the Monday of the last week of the month,
select Last and Monday from the dropdown lists. Click the Time of Day field to open the
Choose Time dialog, and either type the hours and minutes in the respective fields or use
the dropdown lists to select the hours and minutes. You can also click Now to set the time
to the current server time.

8. (Optional) Click Test Now to test that the report subscription is functioning.

Note that the button is disabled for the Email or Printer delivery options if configuration errors
are detected.

9. Click Save to save the subscription.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

Page 96 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 97
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Changing a report subscription

Change report subscriptions to update the subscription properties such as subscription name,
output format, delivery mode, or subscription schedule.
To change a report subscription:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and select Manage Subscriptions from the Options
menu at the top of the Library. This opens Manage Subscriptions.

2. In Manage Subscriptions, find the subscription you want to change. All existing subscriptions
are displayed in the subscriptions table.

3. To view the options for the subscription, click Edit Subscription to open the Modify Sub-
scription dialog.

4. In Modify Subscription, change the options in the dialog and click Save to update the sub-
scription.

5. Click Close.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

Page 98 7EN02-0409-00
Web Applications Guide Configuring

Deleting a report subscription

Delete report subscriptions that are no longer needed.
To delete a report subscription:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and select Manage Subscriptions from the Options
menu at the top of the Library. This opens Manage Subscriptions.

2. In Manage Subscriptions, find the subscription you want to delete. All existing subscriptions
are displayed in the subscriptions table.

3. Click Delete Subscription to delete the subscription. Click OK in the confirmation dia-
log.

4. Click Close.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 99
Configuring Web Applications Guide

Uploading a Report Template

Upload custom Report Templates to generate Reports that are not available by default in the
software.

NOTE: Information on how to create custom Report Templates is not provided in this document.
Contact your local Schneider Electric representative for information on custom Report Templates.

To upload a Report Template:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and select Upload Report Template from the Options
menu at the top of the Library. This opens Upload Report Template.

2. In Upload Report Template, click Choose File to navigate to the location of the .rdl file.

3. Select the file, click Open, and then click Install.

The uploaded report is located in ...\ Power Monitoring Expert\web\ReportDepot\ION

Reports\ION Single Reports

NOTE: After you uploaded the Report Template, you can access it, together with the default
templates, in the Report Library.

Related topics:
Reports:

l Setting Reports prerequisites

l Meeting individual report requirements

l Adding a new report

l Copying a report

l Editing a report

l Moving a report

l Deleting a report

l Sharing a report

Subscriptions:

l Subscribing to a report

l Changing a report subscription

l Deleting a report subscription

Other

l Changing the Reports theme

l Uploading a Report Template

l Configuring the Energy Modeling report

l Reports UI

For information on how to use Reports, see Reports operation.

Page 100 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

7EN02-0409-00 Page 101

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Configuring the Energy Modeling report

Before you can use the modeling report, you must first create a model for your facility or process
with the Create Model Report. This model is then used in the Use Model Report. You only use the
Create Model report during configuration. After the model has been created, you do not need to run
this report again, unless you want to create a new model.
To create a model and use the Energy Modeling report:

1. Run the Create Model report with an initial set of parameters and analyze the results. Select
No for the Save Model Configuration input parameter.

TIP: Consider choosing a reporting period with normal consumption behavior to create your
model. For example, a good period could be "Last Year".

2. Based on the results, define sub-models and exception periods, if applicable.

3. Re-run the Create Model report using sub-models, exception periods, and modified input para-
meters and analyze the results.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you are satisfied with the accuracy of the model.

5. Run the Create Model report one more time, select Yes for the Save Model Configuration
and enter a meaningful model name. This saves your model to the database.

6. Run the Use Model report with the model you created. Ensure that the sub-models and excep-
tion periods are correctly defined for the reporting period.

7. (Optional) Setup a subscription to run the Use Model report on a regular basis. Select Yes for
the Insert Date input parameter. This saves the model output data to the database. You can
use this data in the Trends and Dashboards applications.

Defining a sub-model
Sub-models are used to improve the accuracy of the overall model by recognizing time intervals or
operating conditions with different consumption characteristics. For example, using a sub-model
that differentiates between weekdays and weekend days can be more accurate for processes that
are influenced by a workweek pattern, than using a single model for all days. Which sub-model
works best depends on the nature of the facility or process.

Sub-models are defined with the Modeling Configuration tool in the Settings > Configuration
Tools area of the Web Applications. Use one of the pre-defined sub-models, or create your own.
To define a sub-model:

1. In Modeling Configuration, select the Sub-Models tab.

2. Click Insert in the top right corner of the window to switch to insert mode.

3. Enter a Sub-Model Name, select a Minimum Aggregation Interval, and enter a Desired
Label, and Condition in the input boxes at the top of the main display grid.

The Condition must be a valid SQL query statement.

Page 102 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

4. Click Insert to the right of the input boxes to insert the new sub-model definition. The defin-
ition is moved to the bottom of the main display grid, below any pre-existing sub-model defin-
itions.

5. Click Search in the top right corner of the window to switch back to search mode.

6. (Optional) To edit an existing definition, click Edit to the right of the definition in the display
grid, or click any of the fields of the definition in the grid. To update the definition, after editing
it, click Update , to cancel click Cancel . To delete a sub-model definition, click Delete
.

Defining exception periods

Exception periods are special time intervals, such as holidays, with unpredictable consumption
behavior that is different from the rest of the time period. Exception periods can be defined down to a
specific time interval for a specific source and measurement.

You can either choose to model these exception periods separately, which means they will become
a sub-model, or you can choose to exclude them from the model completely.

Exception periods override sub-model definitions if they cover the same time period. For example,
you could define a holiday, a day your facility was in shutdown, or a day when you performed
system tests, as an exception period. If that day was a weekend day and you are using a sub-model
to differentiate between weekdays and weekend days, then the exception period overrides the sub-
model, which means that special day will be modeled differently than a regular weekend day.

Exception periods are defined with the Modeling Configuration tool in the Settings >
Configuration Tools area of the Web Applications.
To define exception periods:

1. In Modeling Configuration, select the Exception Periods tab.

2. Click Insert in the top right corner of the window to switch to insert mode.

3. Enter an Exception Period Name, select a Source and Measurement, enter a Desired
Label, and Condition in the input boxes at the top of the main display grid.

The Condition must be a valid SQL query statement.

NOTE: The Desired Label is used to control if the exception period is excluded from the
model, or if it is treated as a sub-model. Enter the text Delete as Desired Label if you want to
exclude that period from the model. Enter any other text, for example a descriptive text such
as Holiday, if you want to sub-model the exception period. An excluded exception period will
be blank in the final model output graphic.

4. Click Insert to the right of the input boxes to insert the new exception period definition. The
definition is moved to the bottom of the main display grid, below any pre-existing exception
period definitions.

5. Click Search in the top right corner of the window to switch back to search mode.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 103

Configuring Web Applications Guide

6. (Optional) To edit an existing definition, click Edit to the right of the definition in the display
grid, or click any of the fields of the definition in the grid. To update the definition, after editing
it, click Update , to cancel click Cancel . To delete an exception definition, click Delete
.

See a Model creation example.

Page 104 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Web Applications Settings

TIP: You can open the Settings page from the SETTINGS link in the Web Applications banner.

Use the Settings page to access configuration tools and Web Application settings.

NOTE: Only users with Supervisor, Operator, and Controller access level can access the
configuration tools. Only users with Supervisor access level can configure the Web Application
settings.

The Settings page consists of a Settings Library and a configuration area. The Settings Library
provides access to the following configuration tools and settings:

Alarm Configuration
Hierarchy Manager
Configuration Tools Modeling Configuration
Rate Editor
User Manager

Alarm Views
Diagnostics and Services
EcoStruxure Web Services
Settings Localization
Registration Information
Report Theme
Theme

NOTE: The availability of the Rate Editor and Modeling Configuration are subject to licensing.
EcoStruxure Web Services (EWS) appears in the Settings pane only if it is enabled in the system.

Settings
Alarm Views
To change the Alarm Viewer or Alarm Annunciator settings, open Alarm Views in the Settings
pane and follow the instructions below:
To change how many Incidents, Alarms, and Events are shown in the Alarm Viewer:

1. Under Display Settings, enter the maximum number you want to be displayed for Incidents,
Alarms, and Events in the boxes.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change the Alarm Viewer update interval:

1. Under Display Settings, select the Update Interval.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 105

Configuring Web Applications Guide

To turn the Alarm Annunciator on or off:

1. Under Annunciator, turn Enable on or off.

When the Annunciator is turned off, it is not visible in the Web Applications banner.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change what type of state counts are shown in the Alarm Annunciator:

1. Under Annunciator, select the state type for Show counts for.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change the Alarm priorities that are shown in the Alarm Annunciator:

1. Under Priority Classification, select or clear the Visible in Annunciator check boxes for
the Alarm priorities you want to include or exclude from the Annunciator.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change for which Alarm priorities an Alarm notification sound is played:

1. Under Priority Classification, select or clear the Audible in Annunciator check boxes for
the Alarm priorities you want a notification sound to be played for or not.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change the sound that is played for Alarm notification:

1. Under Annunciator, click Select Sound File.

2. In Select Audio File, select the sound you want, or if the sound is not in the Media Library,
a. Click Upload Audio File and either choose a sound file available on your system by click-
ing Choose Files, or drag a sound file into the application area.

b. Click Finish to add it to the Media Library.

3. Click OK to complete your sound selection.

4. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change the Alarm Annunciator update interval:

1. Under Annunciator, select the Update Interval.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change the display color and Alarm priority ranges for the Alarm Viewer:

1. Under Priority Classification, set the Color and Start values for the different alarm priorities.
The End values are adjusted automatically.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To change the color settings for Waveform and Burst Data:

1. Open Theme in the Settings pane.

2. Under Waveform and Burst Data, set the color that is used to display the different meas-
urement types.

3. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

Page 106 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Diagnostics and Services

Diagnostics and Usage
Diagnostics and Usage anonymously sends data to a secure server. Schneider Electric uses this
data to help improve our software by understanding how you use it.

The diagnostics and usage service collects and sends data to Schneider Electric weekly on
Monday at 2:00 AM (server time). Each time the service runs, it creates a log file in the
system\bin folder in the Power Monitoring Expert install location. All diagnostics and usage data
is sent to Schneider Electric anonymously. None of the collected information identifies you or your
company.

This operation is enabled by default.

To disable the sending of data, select Disable in the dropdown list and click Save to apply the
change.
The following diagnostic and usage data is collected:

Diagnostic data Usage data

l Power Monitoring Expertversion l Total number of devices

l Operating system version and type (32- or 64-bit) l Device type count

l Number of CPU cores l Number of users

l System memory (RAM)

l .NET Framework version

l SQL Server version

l Distributed or local database

l Location and locales

l Number of monitors in use

l Client screen resolution

l Screen DPI

Connected Services
Connected Services lets you share the operational data that is collected by Power Monitoring
Expert with Schneider Electric. The collected energy and power data can then be used by
connected services – such as EcoStruxure™ Power Advisor and EcoStruxure™ Asset Advisor – to
help identify gaps or issues in your power management system. It can also help identify power
quality issues within your electrical distribution system.

The collected data depends on the specific services that the customer receives from Schneider
Electric.

To disable the collecting of operational data, select Disable in the dropdown list and click Save to
apply the change.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 107

Configuring Web Applications Guide

EcoStruxure Web Services

EcoStruxure Web Services (EWS) requires a unique set of credentials to connect to the data
exchange service.
To configure the credentials:

1. Click Change Credentials, or Set Credentials, if you are configuring this setting for the first
time, to enable the input fields.

2. Add a user name.

3. Type the password for the user in the Password and Confirm Password entry fields.

4. Click Save to apply your changes, or Discard to retain the existing credentials.

Localization
Use the Localization configuration page to select the language, region, and currency symbol. The
setting for Region determines date, time, number, and currency formats.

1. Select the system Language from the drop-down list.

2. Select the Region from the drop-down list.

Instructions indicate that the application must be reloaded before your changes take effect.

3. Select the Currency Symbol you want to use from the drop-down list.

4. When you complete your localization settings, click Save.

Registration Information
Registration Information will be used by Schneider Electric to help provide support and to enhance
the service we provide to you. Schneider Electric will never sell nor share this information.

By registering you acknowledge that your registration information will be shared with Schneider
Electric and you consent to receiving occasional communications about your product. Product
communication includes new features, service pack releases, and recommended cybersecurity
updates.

You can edit the registration information at any time through the System Settings.

Report Theme
Change the Report theme to customize the Reports colors and the Reports logo.
To change the Reports colors:

1. Under Report Colors, choose to Use Theme Colors, or to Override Theme Colors.
The theme colors are defined by the Theme settings for the Web Applications. See Theme for
more information.

2. If you choose Override Theme Colors, then set the colors for the Report Title, Section Header,
Table Header, Summary, Row Shading, and Section Title, using the drop-down selectors.

3. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

Page 108 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

To change the Reports Logo:

1. In SETTINGS, open the Settings Library and click Report Theme.

2. Under Report Logo, click Select to open the Select Report Logo Image dialog.

3. Select an image currently available in the repository, or

a. Click Upload Image to choose an image file available on your system or drag an image
file into the application area.

b. Click Finish to add it to the image repository.

4. Click OK to complete your selection.

5. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

NOTE: You can use GIF, JPG, JPEG, or PNG image formats. The recommended file size is 250 x
100 pixels. Images are automatically re-sized to fit the logo area in Reports.

Theme
Use the Theme configuration page to:

l Change the image and text that is displayed in the top left corner of the Web Applications win-
dow.

l Change the color for the borders and other elements of the user interface.

l Specify if you want to display the vendor logo in the top right corner of the Web applications win-
dow.

l Choose the location of the side panel to be on the right or left side of the user interface.

l Specify if you want to use compact mode navigation.

l Reset the theme to system defaults.

To change the top left logo and text:

1. Under Theme, click User Defined.

2. Under Image, click Select....

3. In Select Image, select the image you want, or if the image is not in the Image Library,
Click Upload Image... and either choose an image file available on your system by click-
ing Choose Files..., or drag an image file into the application area.

Click Finish to add it to the Image Library.

4. Click OK to complete your image selection.

The image file name is shown under Image. The image is updated on the banner when you
save your settings. You can use GIF, JPG, JPEG, or PNG image formats. The maximum file
size is 2MB. Images are automatically resized to fit the logo area on the banner.

5. Use the Text field to change the text beside the logo in the banner. The text is updated when
you save your settings.

6. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 109

Configuring Web Applications Guide

To change the theme color:

1. Under Theme, click User Defined.

2. Under Theme Color, select from several preset color themes or create your own using the
color selector that opens when you click the color theme icon on the right.

When you click a preset color, it is temporarily applied to the interface to show you the effect
of the change.

3. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To specify the display of the vendor logo:

1. Under Theme, click User Defined.

2. Turn on Show Vendor logo to display the logo, or turn off Show Vendor logo to hide the
logo, in the top right corner of the Web Applications window.

3. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To choose the location of the side panel:

1. Under Navigation, select Left or Right.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

To specify the use of compact mode navigation:

1. Under Navigation, turn on Always use compact mode for Navigation.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

Compact navigation replaces the main navigation bar at the top of the Web Applications user
interface with an options button . The options button is displayed at the top left corner of the
banner. When you click the button, the navigation links to the different Web applications are shown.
Compact mode is used for small displays, such as on mobile devices. The Web Applications user
interfaces switches to compact mode automatically when the browser size is reduced below a
certain size. Turning on the Always use compact mode for Navigation setting forces this mode
regardless of browser size.
To reset the theme to the system defaults:

1. Click Default Theme.

2. Click Save to apply the changed settings.

Page 110 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Trends configuration
Use the Trends application to view trends for real-time and historical data. The information in the
Trends application is accessed through trend graphs that are saved in the library. Power Monitoring
Expert (PME) does not provide any pre-configured trends. Configure your own trends to meet your
needs.

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Open the Trends application from the TRENDS link in the Web Applications banner.
For information on how to configure the Trends application, see:

l Adding a new trend

l Editing a trend

l Sharing a trend

l Moving a trend

l Deleting a trend

For reference information see:

l The Trends user interface

For information on how to use Trends, see Trends operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 111

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Adding a new trend

Add new trends to monitor historical and real-time data in graphical format.
To add a completely new trend to the library:

1. In Trends, open the Trend Library and navigate to the folder where you want to create the
trend.

(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

2. In the Trend Library, at the bottom of the panel, click Add Trend . This creates a new trend
and opens the Add Trend dialog.

3. In Add Trend, enter the configuration information on the General, Axes, Chart, and Data tabs.
See Configuring a trend for details on the configuration options.

4. Save the trend.

To add a copy of an existing trend to the library:

1. In Trends, open the Trend Library and navigate to the trend you want to copy.

(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

2. Right-click the trend name or click Options for this trend, and select Duplicate to create a
copy in the same folder. Select Copy To to create a copy in a different folder.

3. (Optional) In the Trend Library, select the new trend, right-click the trend name or click
Options for this trend, and select Edit to open the trend settings. Change the trend name.

4. Save the modified trend settings.

Related topics:

l Adding a new trend

l Editing a trend

l Sharing a trend

l Moving a trend

l Deleting a trend

For reference information see:

l The Trends user interface

For information on how to use Trends, see Trends operation.

Page 112 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Editing a trend
Edit a trend to change the trend name, add a data series, remove a data series or change the trend
settings.
To edit a trend:

1. Open the Trend Setup dialog by:

Clicking Edit on the top right of the trend in the trend display pane.

Right-clicking a trend name in the Trend Library and selecting the Edit menu item.

Clicking Options for this trend in the Trend Library, and selecting the Edit menu item.

2. Change the General, Axes, Chart, and Data settings for the trend in the Trend Setup dialog.
See Configuring a trend for details on the configuration options.

3. Save the modified settings.

Related topics:

l Adding a new trend

l Editing a trend

l Sharing a trend

l Moving a trend

l Deleting a trend

For reference information see:

l The Trends user interface

For information on how to use Trends, see Trends operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 113

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Sharing a trend
Share trends with other user groups.

NOTE: For Sharing to be enabled, at least one user group, in addition to the Global group, must be
configured. To share an item with another user group, you must be a member of that group.

To share a trend:

1. In Trends, open the Trend Library and navigate to the trend you want to share.

2. Right-click the trend name or click Options for this trend, and select Share. This opens the
Share Trend window.

3. In Share Trend, select the user groups you want to share this trend with.

(Optional) Specify a name for the shared trend. The groups you are sharing this trend with will
see this name. The name of the original trend remains unchanged.

4. Click OK to share this trend.

NOTE: When you share an item with another User Group, it appears in the Shared folder of this
group. You cannot share a shared item.

Related topics:

l Adding a new trend

l Editing a trend

l Sharing a trend

l Moving a trend

l Deleting a trend

For reference information see:

l The Trends user interface

For information on how to use Trends, see Trends operation.

Page 114 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Moving a trend
Move trends to a different location in the Library to make them easier to find or easier to manage.
To move a trend:

1. In Trends, open the Trend Library and navigate to the trend you want to move.

(Optional) Add a new folder by clicking Add Folder at the bottom of the Library panel, or
by clicking Add Folder in the Options menu at the top of the Library.

2. Right-click the trend name or click Options for this trend, and select Move To. This opens
the Select Location window.

3. In Select Location, select the location you want to move this trend to.

4. Click OK to move the trend.

Related topics:

l Adding a new trend

l Editing a trend

l Sharing a trend

l Moving a trend

l Deleting a trend

For reference information see:

l The Trends user interface

For information on how to use Trends, see Trends operation.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 115

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Deleting a trend
Delete trends that are no longer needed.
To delete a trend:

1. In Trends, open the Trend Library and navigate to the trend you want to delete.

2. Right-click the trend name or click Options for this trend, and select Delete

3. In Delete Content, click Yes, to delete the trend from the Trend Library.

NOTE: Users with supervisor-level access can delete any trend included in the Trend Library. All
other users can only delete trends that they created.

Related topics:

l Adding a new trend

l Editing a trend

l Sharing a trend

l Moving a trend

l Deleting a trend

For reference information see:

l The Trends user interface

For information on how to use Trends, see Trends operation.

Page 116 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

User Manager
TIP: You can open User Manager from the Configuration Tools folder on the SETTINGS page in
the Web Applications banner. You can also open User Manager from the Tools > Web Tools
menu in the Management Console.

NOTE: You must have supervisor-level access to use User Manager, otherwise the link on the
SETTINGS page is not available.

Use User Manager to configure users and user groups. Power Monitoring Expert (PME) does not
provide any pre-configured user accounts or user groups. One supervisor account is created with a
user defined password during the installation of the software. Create user accounts and groups to
meet your needs. User Manager also gives information about the Web Application user licenses for
the system.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices when configuring user access.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access – such as least privilege and
separation of duties – vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure
that user access adheres to the site-specific cyber security policies.

To configure users and user groups, see:

Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

7EN02-0409-00 Page 117

Configuring Web Applications Guide

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

Page 118 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Users
A user is an account in Power Monitoring Expert (PME) that provides access to the system. A user
has a username, which must be unique, and a password. You use the username and password to
log into PME.

PME supports 3 different types of users - standard users, Windows users, and Windows groups.
The following table shows the characteristics of each user type:

User Type Characteristics

This is a PME native user account. The username, password, and
details are defined in the PME User Manager.
Standard user
Note: The email addresses defined for a user can be used for report
subscriptions.
This is an account from an external Windows system. The
Windows user username, password, and details are defined through the Windows
Active Directory or local Windows operating system.
This is a group of accounts from an external Windows system. The
Windows group username, password, and details are defined through the Windows
Active Directory or local Windows operating system.

Each user has an access level, which is set in User Manager. The access level determines which
actions the user is allowed to take in PME.

There are 5 different access levels. The highest level is Supervisor, the lowest level is Observer.
All Windows users that are a member of a Windows group in PME have the same access level as
the one set for the Windows group. For details on the permissions granted by the different access
levels see User access levels and permissions.

Each user is a member of at least one user group. The user group determines which sources and
applications the user can access. By default, users are assigned to the Global user group which has
access to all sources and applications in the system. See user groups for details on how to
configure groups and assign users to groups.

Rules
The following rule applies to users in PME:

l A Windows user that is a member of multiple Windows groups with different access levels in
PME, gets the highest access level of any of the groups.

Example:

Windows user BillG is a member of Windows group A with observer access level in PME.
Windows user BillG is also a member of Windows group B with operator access level in PME.
As a result, BillG has operator access level in PME.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 119

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Limitations
The following limitations exist for standard PME users:

l Usernames must be unique in PME.

l Usernames cannot contain any of the following characters: whitespace character, < > : " / \ | ? *
,;@ #%' ^&()!=+-~.$

l Passwords cannot contain a whitespace character.

l Usernames and passwords must be between 1-50 characters long.

l Email addresses are not checked for the correct format. Any leading or trailing whitespace char-
acters are removed.

l Multiple email addresses must be separated by a ; (semicolon).

l First name, last name, and organization must be between 0-50 characters long. Any leading or
trailing whitespace characters are removed.

The following limitations exist for all PME users:

l A user cannot change its own access level.

l A user cannot delete its own account.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

Page 120 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 121

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Adding a standard user

Add a standard user to create an account for accessing PME. Set the access level for the user to
control what they are allowed to do.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices when configuring user access.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access – such as least privilege and
separation of duties – vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure
that user access adheres to the site-specific cyber security policies.

To add a standard user:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab, and then click Add Standard User.

2. In Add Standard User, enter a username and password, and assign an access level.

3. (Optional) Enter Details information.

4. Click Add.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

Page 122 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 123

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Adding a Windows user

Add a Windows user to give this user access to PME. Set the access level for the Windows user to
control what they are allowed to do.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices when configuring user access.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access – such as least privilege and
separation of duties – vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure
that user access adheres to the site-specific cyber security policies.

To add a Windows user:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab, and then click Add Windows User

2. In Add Windows User - Selection:

a. Select a domain name.

Use a Windows domain name to add a user from an Active Directory. Use the local
computer name or use localhost to add a user from the local list of Windows users.

b. To find the Windows user you want, (optional) enter a keyword into the Available Win-
dows Users search box, and then click Find.

The search result includes all usernames that match all or part of the keyword string.

c. In the search result table, select the Windows user you want to add, and then click Next.

3. In Add Windows User - Details, assign an access level, and then click Finish.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

Page 124 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 125

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Adding a Windows group

Add a Windows group to give all Windows users in this group access to PME. Set the access level
for the Windows group to control what they are allowed to do.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices when configuring user access.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access – such as least privilege and
separation of duties – vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure
that user access adheres to the site-specific cyber security policies.

To add a Windows group:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab, and then click Add Windows Group

2. In Add Windows Group - Selection:

a. Select a domain name.

Use a Windows domain name to add a group from an Active Directory. Use the local
computer name or use localhost to add a group from the local list of Windows groups.

b. To find the Windows group you want, (optional) enter a keyword into the Available Win-
dows Groups search box, and then click Find.

The search result includes all groups that match all or part of the keyword string.

c. In the search result table, select the Window group you want to add, and then click Next.

3. In Add Windows Group - Details, assign an access level.

(Optional) Click on View Windows Users in this Windows Group to see the Windows
users that are members of the group.

4. Click Finish.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

Page 126 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 127

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Changing a username
Change a username to give the user a better or more meaningful name.

NOTE: You can only change the name of a standard user in User Manager. You cannot change the
name of a Windows user or group.

To change a username:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab.

2. In the users table, select the row of the user for which you want to change the name, and then
click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit Standard User, change the name under Username to the new name, and then click
Save.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

Page 128 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 129

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Changing a user password

Change a user password to update the password as part of a security best practice, or because the
existing password is lost.

NOTE: You can only change the password for a standard user in User Manager. You cannot
change the password for a Windows user.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices for password creation and management.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern passwords vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT
System Administrator to ensure that password management adheres to the site-specific cyber
security policies.

To change a user password:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab.

2. In the users table, select the row of the user for which you want to change the password, and
then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit Standard User, enter the new password under Password and under Confirm Pass-
word, and then click Save.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

Page 130 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 131

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Changing a user access level

Change a user access level to give this user higher or lower access permissions in PME.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices when configuring user access.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Cybersecurity policies that govern user accounts and access – such as least privilege and
separation of duties – vary from site to site. Work with the facility IT System Administrator to ensure
that user access adheres to the site-specific cyber security policies.

To change a user access level:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab.

2. In the users table, select the row of the user for which you want to change the access level,
and then click Edit in this row.

3. In the Edit window, choose the new access level under Access Level, and then click Save.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

Page 132 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 133

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Changing user details

Change user details to add additional information or update outdated information.

NOTE: You can only change the details of a standard user in User Manager. You cannot change
the details of a Windows user or group.

To change user details:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab.

2. In the users table, select the row of the user for which you want to change the details, and then
click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit Standard User, change the details information under Details, and then click Save.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

Page 134 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 135

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Deleting a user
Delete a user if this user is no longer needed, for example if someone no longer needs access to
PME.

NOTE: Windows users or groups are only removed from PME. The group or user is not deleted
from Windows.

To delete a user:

1. In User Manager, select the Users tab.

2. In the users table, select the row of the user you want to delete, and then click Delete in this
row.

3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete for a standard user, or Remove for a Windows
user or group.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

Page 136 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 137

Configuring Web Applications Guide

User Groups
User groups determine which sources and applications users can access in Power Monitoring
Expert (PME). Each user is a member of at least one user group.

PME has two built-in groups, the Global group and the Unassigned group. Members of the Global
group can access all sources and applications in the system. Members of the Unassigned group
can access none of the sources and applications in the system. Members of the Unassigned group
are also not allowed to log into PME Web Applications.

In addition to the built-in groups, you can create any number of custom user groups in PME. Use
User Manager to create a custom group and define which sources and applications its members can
access.

NOTE: User group membership determines which sources and applications are visible to a user.
User groups do not set the user access level for the group members. Access levels are set for
each user individually as part of the user account settings.

The user group feature only applies to the Dashboards, Diagrams, Trends, Alarms, and Reports
applications in PME. For all other applications users have full access to all sources regardless of
their group membership.

Rules
The following rules apply to group membership in PME:

l A user is a member of at least one group.

l A user can be a member of multiple groups.

l When a new user is created, it is automatically added to the Global group.

l If a member of the Global group is added to another group, it is automatically removed from the
Global group.

l If a user is removed from the Global group without being added to a custom group, it is auto-
matically added to the Unassigned group.

l If a user is removed from its last custom group, or this group is deleted, the user is auto-
matically added to the Unassigned group.

l If a member of a custom group is added to the Global group, it is automatically removed from all
custom groups.

l A Supervisor level user can only be a member of the Global group.

l If a Non-Supervisor level user that is a member of a custom group is promoted to Supervisor, it

is automatically removed from all custom groups and added to the Global group.

l If the last custom group is deleted, all of its members are moved to the Global group.

The following rules apply to resource access by groups in PME:

l A user that is a member of multiple groups can access the sources of each group.

l If a member of a custom group is deleted or removed from the group, then this user's public con-
tent, such as dashboards or reports, remains available to the group.

Page 138 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

l If a member of a custom group is deleted or removed from the group, then this user's private con-
tent, such as dashboards or reports, is only available to users with Supervisor access.

l If a member of a custom group is removed from the group, then this user has no longer access
to any of its content, such as dashboards or reports, that was created during its group mem-
bership.

Limitations
The following limitations exist for user groups in PME:

l The Global and Unassigned user groups cannot be renamed or deleted.

l The default settings for which sources and applications can be accessed in the Global and
Unassigned user groups cannot be changed.

l User group names must be between 1-255 characters long. Any leading or trailing whitespace
characters are removed.

l If a user group name contains a ] (left angle bracket), the bracket must be followed by a space
or be at the end of the name.

l If a user group name contains a & (ampersand), the ampersand must not be followed by a #
(hash).

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

7EN02-0409-00 Page 139

Configuring Web Applications Guide

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

Page 140 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Adding a user group

Add a user group to control which sources and applications the group members can access in PME.
To add a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab, and then click Add User Group.

2. In Add User Group - User Group Name, enter a group name, and then click Next.

3. In Add User Group - Users, select the users you want to be in the new group form the list of
available users, and then click Next.

NOTE: Supervisor level users are not included in the available users list. Supervisor level
user can only be a member of the Global group, not a custom group.

4. In Add User Group - Sources, in the Available Sources tree, select the sources you want the
users in this group to be able to access, and then click Next.

5. In Add User Group - Applications, select the applications you want the users in this group to
be able to access.

6. Click Finish.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

7EN02-0409-00 Page 141

Configuring Web Applications Guide

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

Page 142 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Adding a user to a user group

Add a user to a user group to give this user access to the sources and applications assigned to this
group in PME.
To add a user to a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group to which you want to add users, and
then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the Users tab, and then, in the user table, select the user you want
to add.

NOTE: Supervisor level users are not included in the available users list. Supervisor level
user can only be a member of the Global group, not a custom group.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

7EN02-0409-00 Page 143

Configuring Web Applications Guide

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

Page 144 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Adding sources to a user group

Add sources to a user group to give the users in this group access to these sources in PME.
To add sources to a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group to which you want to add sources,
and then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the Sources tab, and then, in the Available Sources tree, select
the sources you want to add.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

7EN02-0409-00 Page 145

Configuring Web Applications Guide

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

Page 146 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Changing a user group name

Change a user group name to give this group a better or more meaningful name.
To change a user group name:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group for which you want to change the
name, and then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the User Group Name tab, and then change the name under
Name to the new group name.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

7EN02-0409-00 Page 147

Configuring Web Applications Guide

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

Page 148 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Removing a user from a user group

Remove a user from a user group to no longer give this user access to the sources and applications
assigned to this group in PME.
To remove a user from a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group from which you want to remove a
user, and then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the Users tab, and then, in the user table, clear the check box for
the user you want to remove.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

7EN02-0409-00 Page 149

Configuring Web Applications Guide

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

Page 150 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Removing sources from a user group

Remove sources from a user group to no longer give the users in this group access to these sources
in PME.
To remove sources from a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group from which you want to remove
sources, and then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the Sources tab.

4. In the Selected Sources list, select the source you want to remove, and then click Remove

for this source.

5. Repeat step 4 for all the sources you want to remove from the user group.

(Optional) Click Remove All to remove all sources from the group.

6. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

7EN02-0409-00 Page 151

Configuring Web Applications Guide

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

Page 152 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Changing application access for a user group

Change application access for a user group to add or remove access to certain applications for the
members of this group in PME.
To change application access for a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group for which you want to change applic-
ation access, and then click Edit in this row.

3. In Edit User Group, select the Applications tab, and then select the check boxes for the
applications you want to add, or clear the check boxes for the applications you want to
remove.

4. Click Save.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

7EN02-0409-00 Page 153

Configuring Web Applications Guide

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

Page 154 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

Moving a user between user groups

Move a user to a different user group to change which sources and applications this user can
access in PME.

To move a user between two user groups, remove the user from the one group and add it to the other
group. The order in which these two tasks are performed is not important.
Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 155

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Deleting a user group

Delete a user group if this group is no longer needed, for example after all users have been removed
from the group.
To delete a user group:

1. In User Manager, select the User Groups tab.

2. In the user groups table, select the row of the user group you want to delete, and then click
Delete in this row.

3. In Delete User Group, click Delete.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

Page 156 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 157

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Viewing Web Applications user license information

View license information to determine the number of available free licenses left in the system. You
can also see which users have licenses issued to them, and when they were issued.

NOTE: The license information shown in the User Manager is read-only. Use the Floating License
Manager to make changes to the Web Application user licenses in the system.

To view license information:

1. In User Manager, select the Licenses tab.

2. View license summary information in the top left area of the page. View detailed license inform-
ation in the user license table of the page.

Related topics:
Users

l Users

l Adding a standard user

l Adding a Windows user

l Adding a Windows group

l Changing a username

l Changing a user password

l Changing a user access level

l Changing user details

l Deleting a user

User groups

l User Groups

l Adding a user group

l Adding a user to a user group

l Adding sources to a user group

l Changing a user group name

l Removing a user from a user group

l Removing sources from a user group

l Changing application access for a user group

l Moving a user between user groups

l Deleting a user group

For information on the Web Application user licenses, see:

l Viewing Web Applications user license information

Page 158 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Configuring

For reference information see:

l User Manager

l User Manager user interface

l User access levels and permissions

7EN02-0409-00 Page 159

Configuring Web Applications Guide

Page160 7EN02-0409-00
Operating
This chapter describes the different Web Applications for accessing power monitoring information in
Power Monitoring Expert (PME). You use these applications on a regular basis to view real-time
data, historical data, and alarm data.
Use the information in the tables below to find the content you are looking for.

Application Function
Alarm Views View Incidents, Alarms, and Events; Acknowledge alarms.
Dashboards View high level, historical and real-time data in dashboards and gadgets.
Diagrams View low level, historical and real-time data in one-line and graphics diagrams.
Reports Run reports on demand, or scheduled.
Trends View trends for real-time and historical data.
Access the Dashboards, Diagrams, Trends, Alarms, and Reports applications
Web Applications Access Settings and configurations tools
View the Alarm Annunciator

References

Operation Links to reference information related to the content of the Operating

references chapter.

7EN02-0409-00 Page161
Operating Web Applications Guide

Alarm View operation

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Overview
The Alarm Viewer is the user interface (UI) for the Alarms application. Use the Alarm Viewer to see
software generated and device based Alarms in Power Monitoring Expert (PME).

The Alarm Viewer UI has two main areas, the View Library and the Alarms Display. To see Alarm
information in the Alarms Display, you select a View in the View Library. The Library has predefined
System Views and you can create additional custom Views. For more information see: Alarm
Viewer UI

TIP: You can open the Alarm Viewer from the ALARMS link in the Web Applications banner.

View Types
There are two types of Views, Status Views and History Views.

Status Views
Use Status Views to see existing Alarm Definitions in the system, their present state, how often
they occurred, their priority, and other relevant information. The following predefined Status Views
are available in PME:

View Name Description

This View shows Alarms that are in the active state. It includes low, medium
Active Alarms and high priority Alarms from all sources and all categories. This View does not
include General Alarms of type General Event and Unassociated Dropout.
This View shows all low, medium and high priority Alarms in the system
All Alarms
regardless of state, category, and source.
This View shows unacknowledged Alarms. It includes low, medium and high
Unacknowledged
priority Alarms from all sources and all categories that are in the active or
Alarms
inactive state.

Page 162 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

History Views
Use History Views to see a record of Incidents, Alarm Instances, and Events that happened in the
past. The following predefined History Views are available in PME:

View Name Description

This View shows Incidents that are categorized as Asset Monitoring and are in
Asset Monitoring
the active or unacknowledged state. It includes low, medium and high priority
Incidents
Incidents from all sources.
This View shows Incidents that are categorized as General Clutter and are in
Clutter the active or unacknowledged state. It includes low, medium and high priority
Incidents from all sources.
This View shows Incidents that are categorized as Power Quality and are in
Power Quality
the active or unacknowledged state. It includes low, medium and high priority
Incidents
Incidents from all sources.
This View shows Alarm Instances that are in the active or unacknowledged
state. It includes low, medium and high priority Alarms from all sources and all
Recent Alarms
categories. This View does not include General Alarms of type Unassociated
Dropout and Diagnostics Alarms of type Clock/Time and Device Settings.
Recent Events This View shows Events of all priorities from all sources.
This View shows Incidents that are in the active or unacknowledged state. It
Recent Incidents includes low, medium and high priority Incidents from all sources and all
categories. This View does not include General Alarms for type Clutter.
This View shows Alarm Instances that are categorized as Diagnostics and are
in the active or unacknowledged state. It includes low, medium and high
System Health
priority Alarms from all sources. This View does not include Diagnostics
Alarms of type Clock/Time and Device Settings.

Incidents, Alarms, and Events

Incidents
Incidents provide a high-level view. They represent real world power events, such as disturbances
or faults. An Incident combines Alarms, Waveforms, and Burst data from many sources in the
system into a single representation of the power event. You can look at an Incident and see how the
different pieces of information are linked together, instead of having to analyze each data point
individually. Incidents include the Timeline Analysis that shows the sequence of events for the
different components in the Incident. Use Incidents as a starting point for an alarm analysis.
For more information see:

Incidents Viewing Incidents Incident History UI

Timeline Analysis Viewing a Timeline Analysis Timeline Analysis UI
Waveforms Viewing Waveforms Waveforms UI

7EN02-0409-00 Page 163

Operating Web Applications Guide

Alarms
Alarms provide information on the state and history of alarm conditions that are defined for specific
sources and measurements in the system. Use Alarms to monitor the state of your power system
and to investigate specific details as part of an Incident analysis.
For more information see:

Alarms Viewing Alarms Alarm Status UI

Alarm History UI

Events
Events are records of activities in the system. Activities are performed by users, the system
software, or the connected devices. Events are logged and displayed as they happen in the system
without any processing or aggregation. PME uses event records to determine alarm types and
states. Use events for low level investigations and detailed root cause analysis.
For more information see:

Events Viewing Events Event History UI

Alarm Acknowledgment
You can acknowledge Alarms in Status Views and History Views. If you acknowledge Alarms
through an Incident History View, all Alarms that are part of this Incident will be acknowledged.
Whenever you acknowledge an Alarm, from any of these locations, you are acknowledging the
Alarm Definition itself, not a particular instance of it. That means acknowledging an alarm marks it
as Acknowledged and resets its Unacknowledged occurrence counter. See Acknowledging Alarms
for more information.

Time display
See Time display in Web Applications for information on how time is displayed in a system where
the monitoring devices, the PME/Web server, and the Web client (browser) are located in different
time zones.

Terminology
See Alarms Terminology for definitions of the terms used in the Alarms application.

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

Page 164 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Incidents
Incidents in PME represent real world power events, such as disturbances or faults. An Incident
combines Alarms, Waveforms, and Burst data from many sources in the system into a single
representation of the power event. Instead of having to analyze each data point individually, you can
look at an Incident and see how the different pieces of information are linked together.

PME uses Alarm types and Alarm start times as criteria to determine which Alarms to group into a
specific Incident. The start of an Alarm marks the beginning of an Incident. Any Alarm of a similar
type, that starts within a certain time interval is considered part this same Incident. The grouping
time interval is always based on the most recent Alarm in the Incident, which means that the
counter is restarted every time a new Alarm is added to the Incident. If there is no more Alarm that
falls inside the interval, the Incident is complete. The maximum duration for an Incident is 24 hours
and the maximum number of Alarms in an Incident is 500. A new Incident is started the next time an
Alarm is recorded. See Alarm to Incident mapping for more information.

The Incident grouping time interval is different for different Alarm types. For example, Over Voltage
Alarms have a time interval of 5 minutes. If a new Over Voltage Alarm occurs within 5 minutes, for
any source, it is grouped into the same Incident. To make it easier to analyze Incidents, PME
categorizes them into types. The Incident types are based on the Alarm types.

The following table shows the Incident types and the grouping time intervals for each type:

Category Type Grouping Time Interval

Interruption
5 minutes *
Over Voltage
5 minutes *
Under Voltage
5 minutes *
Unclassified
20 seconds *
Disturbance
20 seconds *
Sag
Power Quality 20 seconds *
Swell
20 seconds *
Transient
5 minutes
Flicker
5 minutes
Frequency Variation
5 minutes
Harmonics
5 minutes
Unbalance
Backup Power 80 minutes
Current Monitor 5 minutes
Asset Monitoring
Protection 5 minutes
Thermal Monitor 30 minutes
Air 5 minutes
Demand 5 minutes
Electricity 5 minutes
Energy Management Gas 5 minutes
Power Factor 5 minutes
Steam 5 minutes
Water 5 minutes

7EN02-0409-00 Page 165

Operating Web Applications Guide

Category Type Grouping Time Interval

Clutter 1 day
General
General Setpoints 5 minutes
Communication Status 10 minutes
Diagnostics Device Status 5 minutes
System Status 0 seconds (one incident per alarm)

* These grouping intervals time settings are default settings. The defaults are extended
automatically to include power quality alarms that are outside the interval but close enough that they
could be related to the Incident.
Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

Page 166 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Timeline Analysis
Timeline Analysis is a sequence of event analysis for items that are associated with one or more
Incidents or Alarms. The items are shown on a timeline, in chronological order. Items include
Alarms, Waveforms and Burst data recordings. The tools available for the Timeline Analysis allow
you to add or remove items from the timeline, add notes, zoom in or out, and include Alarms
previously not associated with this Incident. You can save a Timeline Analysis as new View in the
View Library for future reference. See Timeline Analysis UI for more information.

NOTE: Alarms and data measurements during an Incident occur in very short time intervals. To
show the correct sequence of events in the Timeline Analysis, the Analysis item timestamps must
be accurate. Consider using monitoring devices with Precision Time Protocol (PTP) or GPS time
synchronization for accurate time stamping.

Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 167

Operating Web Applications Guide

Alarms
An Alarm is a defined condition for a particular source in PME. The software or the device monitors
this condition and records when the condition is met and when not. For example, you can define an
Over Voltage Alarm for a certain monitoring device in the system. When the voltage threshold is
exceeded on this device, the Alarm goes active. When the voltage drops below the threshold, the
Alarm goes inactive. The next time the voltage on this device goes above the threshold again, the
same Alarm goes active again. An Alarm is always associated with a single source and a single
measurement.

Some Alarms are based on instantaneous events such as a voltage transient, others are based on a
condition that lasts a certain period of time such as an over voltage condition. For lasting conditions,
the Alarm goes from an inactive state to an active state while the condition lasts and then back to an
inactive state when the condition is over. Instantaneous Alarms are always shown in an inactive
state.

The following diagram shows an Alarm that is based on a lasting condition. The Alarm goes active
at the time T1 and inactive at T2. The time interval between T1 and T2 can be short or long.

0 = inactive Alarm state; 1 = active Alarm state; T = time

T1 = Alarm goes active

T2 = Alarm goes inactive

The following diagram shows an instantaneous Alarm. For this Alarm, the start time T1 and end time
T2 are identical.

0 = inactive Alarm state, 1 = active Alarm state; T = time

T1/2 = Alarm goes active and immediately inactive again

Page 168 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

After an Alarm has gone active, it can be acknowledged in the Alarm Viewer. When you
acknowledge an Alarm, the date and time of the acknowledgment is recorded together with an
optional note that you can enter in the acknowledge window.

An Alarm stays unacknowledged until you acknowledge it. After you have acknowledged an Alarm,
it stays acknowledged until the next time it goes active. At that point it is reset to unacknowledged
and is waiting for you to acknowledge it again.

PME counts the number of times an Alarm goes through an inactive to active state transition. The
number of these transitions is displayed as Occurrences in the Alarm Viewer in the Alarm Status
View. There are two counters for each Alarm. One counter for the total number of Occurrences, and
one for Occurrences since the Alarm was last acknowledged.

The time period during which an Alarm is active, starting when it goes active, ending when it goes
inactive, is called an Alarm instance.

Alarm conditions are defined either as software Alarms in the Alarm Configuration tool, or as device
based Alarms in the monitoring devices, using the appropriate device configuration tool.

To make it easier to analyze Alarms, PME categorizes them into types and combines Alarms of
similar types into Incidents, based on the Alarm start times.

The following table shows the different Alarm categories and types in PME:

Category Type
Flicker
Frequency Variation
Harmonics
Harmonics (Current)
Harmonics (Power)
Harmonics (Voltage)
Interruption
Over Voltage
Power Quality
Sag (Voltage)
Swell (Voltage)
Transient
Unbalance
Unbalance (Current)
Unbalance (Voltage)
Unclassified Disturbance
Under Voltage
Backup Power
Over Current
Protection
Asset Monitoring Sag (Current)
Swell (Current)
Thermal Monitor
Under Current

7EN02-0409-00 Page 169

Operating Web Applications Guide

Category Type
Air
Demand
Electricity
Energy Management Gas
Power Factor
Steam
Water
General Event
General General Setpoint
Unassociated Dropout
Clock / Time
Communication Status
Diagnostics Device Settings
Device Status
System Status

Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

Page 170 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Events
An Event is a record of an activity or a condition that is logged in PME. Events are generated by
users, the system software, or the connected devices. Examples of Events include resetting a
measurement, logging into PME, making a configuration change in a device, or a setpoint going
active on a device. Some of these Events are logged automatically, for others logging must be
setup manually. Each Event record that is logged has a timestamp and a number of fields that
describe the activity. Each Event record describes one single activity or condition, for example, a
particular setpoint going active in a particular monitoring device.

Events are logged and displayed as they happen in the system without any processing or
aggregation. For example, an Over Voltage setpoint going active and then inactive in a device will
cause 3 Events to be logged, one for the pickup, one for the dropout, and one for the extreme
voltage value measured during the time the setpoint was active.
Here is an example of the Event records for an over voltage setpoint:

Source Timestampe Event Condition Measurement Value Type

8/10/2017 Over Voltage
My.Device ON 145.740 Pick up
1:44:53.000 PM Voltage Phase A
8/10/2017 Over Voltage
My.Device Extreme 145.740 Instantaneous
1:44:53.000 PM Voltage Phase A
8/10/2017 Over Voltage
My.Device OFF 125.230 Drop out
1:45:39.000 PM Voltage Phase A

PME uses Event records to determine Alarm types and states.

Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

7EN02-0409-00 Page 171

Operating Web Applications Guide

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

Page 172 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Waveforms
Waveforms are graphical representations of voltage and current that show their variations over time.
The waveform displays in PME are based on logged, historical measurements that were recorded
by a monitoring device. The measurements recorded by a device for a waveform capture are called
samples and the speed with which these samples are taken is called sampling rate. The higher the
sampling rate, the more accurately the waveform capture represents the actual voltage or current
waveform. Captures taken by different device types can have different sampling rates, depending
on the capabilities and settings of the device.

Use Waveforms to analyze power quality events by viewing the individual wave shapes, the
magnitudes, the phase angles between voltage and current, and the timing of wave shape
variations. Waveform data is also used to show voltage and current phasors and the individual
harmonic components.

See Waveforms UI for more information.

Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 173

Operating Web Applications Guide

Viewing Incidents
View Incidents to investigate system issues, to analyze what happened during a power disturbance
or to identify root causes.
To view Incidents:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Incident View from the View Library or add a new View.

2. View the Incident information displayed in the Alarms Display pane.

(Optional) In the View Library, right-click the View name or click Options , and select Edit to
open View Settings. You can also open View Settings by double-clicking the View name.
Adjust the settings for View Type, Priority, State, Sources, and Categories to customize the
View if necessary. Save the modified View Settings or click Cancel to discard the changes.

Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

Page 174 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Viewing a Timeline Analysis

View a Timeline Analysis to investigate the sequence of events that occurred during a single
Incident, multiple Incidents, or Alarms.
To view a Timeline Analysis for an Incident:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Incident View from the View Library or add a new View.

2. Find the Incident for which you want to view the Analysis, and click Open Timeline Analysis

to open the Timeline window.

(Optional) Edit the View Settings for the Timeline Analysis and save the View for future ref-
erence.

To view a Timeline Analysis for multiple Incident:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Incident View from the View Library or add a new View.

2. Find and select the Incidents for which you want to view the Analysis.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual Alarms, use Shift+click to select a block of
Alarms.

3. From the in the Options menu at the top of the Alarms Display pane, select Open
Timeline Analysis on selection.

To view a Timeline Analysis for an Alarm:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Alarm History View from the View Library or add a new
View.

2. Find the Alarm for which you want to view the Analysis and click Open Details.

3. In the Alarm details window, click Timeline Analysis.

Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

7EN02-0409-00 Page 175

Operating Web Applications Guide

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

Page 176 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Viewing Alarms
View Alarm Status to assess the state of the monitored power system and to respond to important
events and issues. View Alarm History for root cause analysis and to understand the sequence of
events.
To view Alarm Status or Alarm History:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Alarm Status or Alarm History View from the View
Library or add a new View.

2. View the Alarm information displayed in the Alarms Display pane.

(Optional) In the View Library, right-click the View name or click Options , and select Edit to
open View Settings. You can also open View Settings by double-clicking the View name.
Adjust the settings for View Type, Priority, State, Sources, and Categories to customize the
View if necessary. Save the modified View Settings or click Cancel to discard the changes.

Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 177

Operating Web Applications Guide

Viewing Events
View Events to investigate system activities in PME or to troubleshoot unexpected system
behavior.
To view Events:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Event View from the View Library or add a new View.

2. View the Event Information displayed in the Alarms Display pane.

(Optional) In the View Library, right-click the View name or click Options for this View, and
select Edit to open the View Settings. You can also open View Settings by double-clicking the
View name. Adjust the settings for View Type, Priority and Sources to customize the View if
necessary. Save the modified View Settings or click Cancel to discard the changes.

TIP: Double-clicking an Event in the Events display table opens the associated Alarm.

Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

Page 178 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Viewing Waveforms
View Waveforms to investigate power quality events and identify root causes of disturbances.
To view Waveforms:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Incident History View or Alarm History View from the
View Library or add a new View.

2. Find the Incident or Alarm for which you want to view Waveforms, and click Details .
You can also open Details by double-clicking the Incident or Alarm Instance.

3. In Details, click Waveforms.

TIP: Click Open Representative Waveform to see the representative waveform for this
Incident or Alarm Instance.

4. View the waveforms associated with the Incident or Alarm Instance.

(Optional) Click Inspect a waveform to see more details and to analyze the waveform.

Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 179

Operating Web Applications Guide

Acknowledging Alarms
Acknowledge Alarms to show that these Alarms are managed. Record relevant information related
to the Alarms, as part of the acknowledgment, for future reference.

NOTE: You can acknowledge Alarms in Status Views and History Views. If you acknowledge
Alarms through an Incident History View, all Alarms that are part of this Incident will be
acknowledged. Whenever you acknowledge an Alarm from any of these locations, you are
acknowledging the Alarm Definition itself, not a particular instance of it. That means
acknowledging an alarm marks it as Acknowledged and resets its Unacknowledged occurrence
counter.

Acknowledging through an Alarm Status View

To acknowledge a single Alarm:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Alarm Status View from the View Library or add a new
View.

2. In the Alarms Display pane, find the Alarm Definition you want to acknowledge.
(Optional) In the View Library, right-click the View name or click Options , and select Edit to
open View Settings. You can also open View Settings by double-clicking the View name.
Adjust the settings for View Type, Priority, State, Sources, and Categories to customize the
View if necessary. Save the modified View Settings or click Cancel to discard the changes.

3. In the Acknowledgment column for this Alarm Definition, click Acknowledge. This opens
the Acknowledge Alarms window. You can also open Details for this Alarm Definition and
click Acknowledge in the Details window to open Acknowledge Alarms.

4. In Acknowledge Alarms, click Acknowledge.

(Optional) In the Comment box, enter notes related to the Alarm Definition.

TIP: To later view the acknowledgment notes, open the Alarm Details and click History on
the top right. The acknowledgment with the note is shown in the Alarm Instance history
display.

To acknowledge multiple Alarms:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Alarm Status View from the View Library or add a new
View.

2. In the Alarms Display pane, find and select the Alarm Definitions you want to acknowledge in
the Alarms table.

TIP: Use Ctrl+Click to select individual Alarms, use Shift+click to select a block of
Alarms.

(Optional) In the View Library, right-click the View name or click Options , and select Edit to
open View Settings. You can also open View Settings by double-clicking the View name.
Adjust the settings for View Type, Priority, State, Sources, and Categories to customize the

Page 180 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

View if necessary. Save the modified View Settings or click Cancel to discard the changes.

3. Click Options in the top right corner of the Alarms pane, and then click Acknowledge
Selected in the options menu. This opens the Acknowledge Alarms window.

4. In Acknowledge Alarms, click Acknowledge.

(Optional) In the Comment box, enter notes related to the Alarm Definitions.

TIP: To later view the acknowledgment notes, open the Alarm Details, for any of the Alarms,
and click History on the top right. The acknowledgment with the note is shown in the Alarm
Instance history display.

To acknowledge all Alarms in a View:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Alarm Status View from the View Library or add a new
View.

2. Click Options in the top right corner of the Alarms pane, and then click Acknowledge All
in the options menu. This opens the Acknowledge Alarms window.

3. In Acknowledge Alarms, click Acknowledge.

(Optional) In the Comment box, enter notes related to the Alarm Definitions.

TIP: To later view the acknowledgment notes, open the Alarm Details, for any of the Alarms,
and click History on the top right. The acknowledgment with the note is shown in the Alarm
Instance history display.

Acknowledging through an Alarm History View

To acknowledge an Alarm:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Alarm History View from the View Library or add a new
View.

2. In the Alarms Display pane, find the Alarm you want to acknowledge.
(Optional) In the View Library, right-click the View name or click Options , and select Edit to
open View Settings. You can also open View Settings by double-clicking the View name.
Adjust the settings for View Type, Priority, State, Sources, and Categories to customize the
View if necessary. Save the modified View Settings or click Cancel to discard the changes.

3. Open the Details for this Alarm by clicking on Open Details or double-clicking the Alarm.

4. In Alarm Details, click Acknowledge. This opens the Acknowledge Alarms window.

5. In Acknowledge Alarms, click Acknowledge.

(Optional) In the Comment box, enter notes related to the Alarm.

TIP: To later view the acknowledgment notes, open the Alarm Details and click History on
the top right. The acknowledgment with the note is shown in the Alarm Instance history
display.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 181

Operating Web Applications Guide

Acknowledging through an Incident History View

To acknowledge all Alarms in an Incident:

1. In the Alarm Viewer, open an existing Incident History View from the View Library or add a
new View.

2. In the Alarms Display pane, find the Incident you want to acknowledge.
(Optional) In the View Library, right-click the View name or click Options , and select Edit to
open View Settings. You can also open View Settings by double-clicking the View name.
Adjust the settings for View Type, Priority, State, Sources, and Categories to customize the
View if necessary. Save the modified View Settings or click Cancel to discard the changes.

3. Open the Details for this Incident by clicking on Open Details or double-clicking the Incident.

4. In Incident Details, click Acknowledge. This opens the Acknowledge Alarms window.

5. In Acknowledge Alarms, click Acknowledge.

(Optional) In the Comment box, enter notes related to the Alarms.

TIP: To later view the acknowledgment notes, open the Alarm Details, for any of the Alarms,
and click History on the top right. The acknowledgment with the note is shown in the Alarm
Instance history display.

Related topics:

l Viewing Incidents

l Viewing a Timeline Analysis

l Viewing Alarms

l Viewing Events

l Viewing Waveforms

l Acknowledging Alarms

For reference information see:

l Alarm View operation

l Incidents

l Timeline Analysis

l Alarms

l Events

l Waveforms

l Alarms Terminology

l Alarms UI

l Timeline Analysis UI

l Waveforms UI

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Alarm View configuration.

Page 182 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

7EN02-0409-00 Page 183

Operating Web Applications Guide

Dashboards operation

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Use the Dashboards application to view high level historical and real-time data, for example Key
Performance Indicators (KPIs). The information in the Dashboards application is accessed through
dashboards with gadgets. Dashboards are saved in the Dashboard Library. In addition to viewing
individual dashboards, you can create slideshows to automatically display a sequence of
dashboards.

TIP: You can open the Dashboards application from the Dashboards link in the Web Applications
banner.

Time display
See Time display in Web Applications for information on how time is displayed in a system where
the monitoring devices, the PME/Web server, and the Web client (browser) are located in different
time zones.
For information on how use the Dashboards application, see:

l Viewing Dashboards

l Dashboard Slideshows

l Playing a Slideshow

l Gadgets

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to configure Dashboards, see Dashboards configuration.

Page 184 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Viewing Dashboards
View Dashboards to monitor key performance indicators, historical trends, and other high-level
information for the monitored power system. Dashboards are one of the main applications for
viewing power system information.
To view a Dashboard:

1. In Dashboards, open an existing Dashboard from the Dashboard Library or add a new Dash-
board.

2. View the Dashboard Gadgets displayed in the Dashboards display pane.

Related topics:

l Viewing Dashboards

l Dashboard Slideshows

l Playing a Slideshow

l Gadgets

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to configure Dashboards, see Dashboards configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 185

Operating Web Applications Guide

Dashboard Slideshows
Use slideshows to create collections of dashboards that are displayed in sequence without user
interaction. A slideshow displays each of its dashboards for a short period of time and then displays
the next dashboard. When it reaches the end, it starts over again with the first dashboard. It
continuously cycles through all its dashboards in this way. Slideshows are a good option for
unattended, kiosk type displays. See Configuring a slideshow for more details.
Related topics:

l Viewing Dashboards

l Dashboard Slideshows

l Playing a Slideshow

l Gadgets

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to configure Dashboards, see Dashboards configuration.

Page 186 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Playing a Slideshow
Slideshows are a good option for unattended, kiosk type displays.
To play a Slideshow:

1. In Dashboards, open the Dashboards Library, and click Slideshow Manager in the Options
menu at the top of the Dashboard Library. This opens the Slideshow Manager window.

2. In Slideshow Manager, select the slideshow you want to view, and click Play. This opens a
new browser window, playing the slideshow.

3. Return to the original browser window and click Close in the Slideshow Manager to close it.
The slideshow continues to play in the new browser window until you close that window.

Related topics:

l Viewing Dashboards

l Dashboard Slideshows

l Playing a Slideshow

l Gadgets

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to configure Dashboards, see Dashboards configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 187

Operating Web Applications Guide

Gadgets
Gadgets are graphical display objects used in the dashboard display pane for charting trends over
time, or in comparison with correlated measurements or similar functionality. The gadgets available
for a dashboard are listed in the Gadget Setup dialog, which opens when you click Add Gadget in
the Dashboard Controls area.

TIP: When the gadget is displayed in the dashboard, you can click an item in the gadget legend to
toggle the graphical display of data for that item on and off. When you place the pointer on an item
in the gadget, a tooltip provides information related to that item. You can also click the maximize
gadget icon to fill the browser page with the gadget. Click the Restore icon to return the
gadget to its original size on the dashboard.

Use the following links to jump to the descriptions of the different gadget types:

Bar Chart Power Quality

Energy Equivalency Sankey
Table Pareto Chart
Period over Period Aggregated Pareto Chart
Pie Chart Heat Map
Trend Chart Consumption Ranking
Web Viewer Aggregated Consumption Ranking

Related topics:

l Viewing Dashboards

l Dashboard Slideshows

l Playing a Slideshow

l Gadgets

For reference information see:

l Dashboards user interface (UI)

For information on how to configure Dashboards, see Dashboards configuration.

Page 188 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Bar Chart gadget

This gadget shows a comparison of several data series, over a selected time period. The
information is shown as horizontal bars.
Example:

TIP: Place your pointer on a bar in the chart to open a tooltip showing the measurement value.
Click a series in the legend to hide or show this series in the chart.

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 189

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Equivalency gadget

This gadget shows a single value that is equivalent to the aggregated consumption input data, over
a selected time period. The value can be scaled to represent a consumption equivalent
measurement, such as CO2 emissions or primary energy units. The information is shown as a
numeric value with unit, a custom text, and a custom graphic.
Example:

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 190 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Table gadget
This gadget shows real-time data from devices in the system. The information is shown in table
format.
Example:

TIP: The measurements can be arranged in rows or in columns.

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 191

Operating Web Applications Guide

Period Over Period gadget

This gadget shows consumption data for the same measurement for two different viewing periods
side-by-side. The information is shown in a column chart.
Example:

TIP: Place your pointer on a column in the chart to open a tooltip showing the measurement value.
Click a series in the legend to hide or show this series in the chart.

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 192 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Pie Chart gadget

This gadget shows a comparison of several data series in a single chart, over a selected time
period. The information is shown in a pie chart, as a percentage distribution of the different data
series.
Example:

TIP: Place your pointer on a section in the chart to open a tooltip showing the measurement value.
Click a section in the pie to separate it from the pie. Click a series in the legend to hide or show this
series in the chart.

For information about configuring Power Quality gadgets, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 193

Operating Web Applications Guide

Trend Chart gadget

This gadget shows consumption data, over a selected time period. The information is shown in a
combined column and line chart. You can include one or more data series in a single chart. You can
select how to display the data for both the primary and secondary axes.
Example:

TIP: Place your pointer on a column in the chart to open a tooltip showing the measurement value.
Click a series in the legend to hide or show this series in the chart.

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 194 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Web Viewer gadget

This gadget shows a web page inside the gadget frame in the dashboard.

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices to help prevent unauthorized access to the software.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

NOTE: When you configure the Web Viewer gadget to access a website, you should be careful
that the website does not include hidden malware, viruses, or content that could compromise your
web client computers. It is recommended that the target site specified in the gadget be secured
with the SSL or TLS protocol (accessed via HTTPS).

Example:

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 195

Operating Web Applications Guide

Page 196 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Quality gadgets

NOTE: These gadgets are part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

See Power Quality Performance events and disturbances, in the Reference section of this
document, for a definition of power quality events.
Use the following links to jump to the descriptions of the different Power Quality gadget types:

Power Factor Impact Power Quality Impact

Power Factor Impact Trend Power Quality Impact Trend
Power Quality Incident Breakdown Power Quality Rating
Power Quality Incident Impact Power Quality Rating Trend
Power Quality Incident Location

7EN02-0409-00 Page 197

Operating Web Applications Guide

Power Factor Impact gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows the power factor and the estimated power factor surcharge, based on the billing
rate, over a selected time period. The information is shown as a graphic display of the power factor
and the estimated surcharge.
Example:

For information about configuring Power Quality gadgets, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 198 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Factor Impact Trend gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows the estimated power factor surcharge, based on the billing rate, over a selected
time period. The information is shown in a column chart, grouped by aggregation period.
Example:

TIP: Place your pointer on a column in the chart to open a tooltip showing the estimated surcharge.

For information about configuring Power Quality gadgets, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 199

Operating Web Applications Guide

Power Quality Incident Breakdown gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows a breakdown of the power quality events, by type, over a selected time period.
The information is shown in a pie chart, as a percentage distribution of the events.
Example:

NOTE: The colors in the chart are shown dimmed if the events had no expected impact. The
colors in the chart are shown solid if one ore more events had an expected impact.

TIP: Place your pointer on a section in the chart to open a tooltip showing the number of events in
each category. Click a section to separate it from the pie.

For information about configuring Power Quality gadgets, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 200 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Quality Incident Impact gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows the number of power quality events, over a period of time, that might have had a
process impact, compared to those that most likely did not have an impact. It is a simplified
representation of the CBEMA/ITIC curve in a pie chart format. Events that are inside the curve are
shown as “no impact events” and those outside the curve are shown as “likely impact events”.
Example:

NOTE: The colors in the chart are shown dimmed if the events had no expected impact. The
colors in the chart are shown solid if one ore more events had an expected impact.

TIP: Place your pointer on a section in the chart to open a tooltip showing the number of events in
each category. Click a section to separate it from the pie.

For information about configuring Power Quality gadgets, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 201

Operating Web Applications Guide

Power Quality Incident Location gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows the number of power quality events, over a selected time period, grouped by
location of origin (external, internal, undetermined). In addition, it indicates whether the events had a
likely process impact or not. The information is shown in a column chart, grouped by impact
assessment.
Example:

TIP: Place your pointer on a column in the chart to open a tooltip showing the number of events
and their likely process impact.

For information about configuring Power Quality gadgets, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 202 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Quality Impact gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows the cost of power quality events with a process impact, over a selected time
period. The information is shown in a column chart, grouped by location of power quality event origin
(external, internal, undetermined).
Example:

TIP: Place your pointer on a column in the chart to open a tooltip showing the event duration.

For information about configuring Power Quality gadgets, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 203

Operating Web Applications Guide

Power Quality Impact Trend gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows the aggregated cost of power quality events with a process impact, over a
selected time period. The information is shown in a stacked column chart, grouped by aggregation
period. The location of power quality event origin (external, internal, undetermined) is shown by the
color of the columns.
Example:

TIP: Place your pointer on a column in the chart to open a tooltip showing the event origin, cost,
and duration. Click a series in the legend to hide or show this series in the chart.

For information about configuring Power Quality gadgets, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 204 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Quality Rating gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows a power quality rating in the form of a letter grade (A to F). The rating is a
summary of multiple types of power quality disturbances. The information is shown as a graphic
display of the letter grade, with a % power quality rating and a list of the main contributing
disturbances.

The following formula is used to calculate the power quality rating:

Where:

l PQ.Indicators.Value is a number indicating each power quality indicator status (green = 2, yel-
low= 1, red = 0).

l PQ.Indicators.MaxValue = 2 for each individual indicator.

l Weight Factor is an adjustable value (default=1) for assigning different weight to each individual
indicator as per user’s needs.

The power quality rating is mapped to the letter grades in the following way:

l PQ.Rating >= 95% à "A"

l PQ.Rating >= 85% à "B"

l PQ.Rating >= 75% à "C"

l PQ.Rating >= 65% à "D"

l PQ.Rating >= 55% à "E"

l PQ.Rating >= 0% à "F"

With 0% = worst power quality and 100% = optimal power quality.

NOTE: The ratings are based on established thresholds and limits defined in IEEE519, IEC 61000-
4-30, EN50160, and IEEE1159 standards.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 205

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

For information about configuring Power Quality gadgets, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 206 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Quality Rating Trend gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows the power quality rating, over a selected time period. The information is shown in
a column chart, grouped by aggregation period.
Example:

TIP: Place your pointer on a column in the chart to open a tooltip showing the date and the power
quality rating.

For information about configuring Power Quality gadgets, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 207

Operating Web Applications Guide

Sankey gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Energy Usage Gadget Pack. This Gadget Pack requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows a flow diagram, in which the width of the arrows is proportional to the data
values. The diagram starts as a combined flow for all the selected consumers, and then breaks out
into individual flows for each consumer.

Use this gadget to show WAGES consumption broken down by load type, or to visualize
consumption costs by consumer. You can also use it to show power losses.

NOTE: The Sankey gadget must be used with hierarchy data. The Sankey gadget automatically
removes nodes with missing data from the display. A message is displayed in the chart if a node is
removed.

Example:

TIP: Drag individual nodes horizontally or vertically in the chart for a better view.

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 208 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Pareto Chart gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Energy Usage Gadget Pack. This Gadget Pack requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows consumption data, by consumer, for multiple consumers, over a selected time
period. The information is shown in a combined column and line chart, grouped by aggregation
period.

The columns are arranged from highest consumption to lowest consumption. The chart includes a
cumulative curve based on the aggregation period consumption values. The chart also contains a
configurable marker line which is used as a target or threshold indicator.

Use this gadget to perform an 80/20 analysis, identifying those consumers that together make up
the largest portion, or 80% of the overall consumption.

The gadget supports exporting its complete data set in CSV format or Microsoft Excel format
(XLSX) directly from the Web browser. To export the data, hover the mouse pointer over the

download icon in the gadget and select the desired format from the pop-up menu or select
Export to CSV from top right Options menu.
Example:

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 209

Operating Web Applications Guide

Aggregated Pareto Chart gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Energy Usage Gadget Pack. This Gadget Pack requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows consumption data for multiple consumers, over a selected time period. The
information is shown in a combined column and line chart, grouped by aggregation period.

The columns are arranged from highest consumption to lowest consumption. The chart includes a
cumulative curve based on the aggregation period consumption values. The chart also contains a
configurable marker line which is used as a target or threshold indicator.

Use this gadget to perform an 80/20 analysis, identifying those aggregation intervals and
consumers that together make up the largest portion, or 80% of the overall consumption.

The gadget supports exporting its complete data set in CSV format or Microsoft Excel format
(XLSX) directly from the Web browser. To export the data, hover the mouse pointer over the

download icon in the gadget and select the desired format from the pop-up menu or select
Export to CSV from top right Options menu.
Example:

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 210 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Heat Map gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Energy Usage Gadget Pack. This Gadget Pack requires a
separate license.

This gadget creates a graphical representation of your data where the individual values are
represented as colors in a matrix format. The graphical display makes it easy to identify patterns in
complex data sets. Use this gadget with consumption data to identify usage patterns and
anomalies.

The gadget supports exporting its complete data set in CSV format or Microsoft Excel format
(XLSX) directly from the Web browser. To export the data, hover the mouse pointer over the

download icon in the gadget and select the desired format from the pop-up menu.
Example:

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 211

Operating Web Applications Guide

Consumption Ranking gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Energy Usage Gadget Pack. This Gadget Pack requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows consumption data, by consumer, for multiple consumers, over a selected time
period. The information is shown side-by-side in a column or bar chart and a doughnut chart.

The columns or bars are arranged in order of consumption. The chart includes the aggregated total
consumption.

Use this gadget to compare the consumption of different consumers over a period of time.

The gadget supports exporting its complete data set in CSV format or Microsoft Excel format
(XLSX) directly from the Web browser. To export the data, hover the mouse pointer over the

download icon in the gadget and select the desired format from the pop-up menu or select
Export to CSV from top right Options menu.

Example:

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

Page 212 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Aggregated Consumption Ranking gadget

NOTE: This gadget is part of the Energy Usage Gadget Pack. This Gadget Pack requires a
separate license.

This gadget shows consumption data for multiple consumers, by aggregation period, over a
selected time period. The information is shown side-by-side in a column or bar chart and a doughnut
chart.

The columns or bars are arranged in order of the aggregated consumption. The chart includes the
aggregated total consumption.

Use this gadget to compare the consumption of consumers during specific time intervals, for
example by hour, by day of week, or by day.

The gadget supports exporting its complete data set in csv format or Microsoft Excel format (XLSX)
directly from the Web browser. To export the data, hover the mouse pointer over the download icon

in the gadget and select the desired format from the pop-up menu or select Export to CSV from
top right Options menu.

Example:

For information about configuring the gadget, see Configuring Gadgets.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 213

Operating Web Applications Guide

Diagrams operation

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Use the Diagrams application to view Vista diagrams in the Web Applications interface. You can
view the network diagram and any custom diagrams created in Vista. Objects that can be displayed
in the browser include real-time numeric data, full or partial gauges, background graphics or
diagrams, and basic views of event, data and waveform logs.
Although identical in many ways to Vista, the Diagrams application has certain differences and
limitations:

l The diagrams are read-only, which means control objects such as On/Off and Trigger switches
are disabled.

l The time displayed is the local time at the Web server, not at the client computer.

l Regional formatting for date, time, and numbers can be changed through the Diagrams Con-
figuration dialog. Open the dialog from the Management Console Tools menu. The user needs
Windows administrative privileges to restart Windows services to apply the change.

The Diagrams application also provides a Devices diagrams view with device type specific
diagrams for each device that is configured in the system.

TIP: You can open the Diagrams application from the DIAGRAMS link in the Web Applications
banner.

Time display
See Time display in Web Applications for information on how time is displayed in a system where
the monitoring devices, the PME/Web server, and the Web client (browser) are located in different
time zones.
For information on how use the Diagrams application, see:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

Page 214 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 215

Operating Web Applications Guide

The Diagrams user interface

The Diagrams user interface consists of a diagram display pane and a Diagram Library pane.

Diagrams display pane

The diagram display pane shows the diagram selected in the Diagram Library.The system
administrator can set a system default diagram that users see when they first log in.

Diagram Library
The Diagram Library contains all the diagrams that are configured in the system. Diagrams can be
listed individually or they can be organized within folders. The Devices diagram folder is a system
folder that is automatically generated. It can not be edited or deleted. You use the Diagram Library to
select the diagram you want to view.

TIP: To hide the Library, click the Hide Library icon ( or ) in the top right corner of the Library.

To show the Library, click the Show Library icon ( or ) at the top of the Library ribbon, or click
anywhere in the minimized Library ribbon.

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Page 216 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

User authentication
If you access Diagrams through the Web Applications framework, you are automatically
authenticated, using the Web Applications login.

If you access Diagrams from outside the Web Applications framework, through a browser using the
URL http://server_name/ion (where server_name is the fully-qualified name of the server
or its IP address), you are prompted to log in using your Power Monitoring Expert user name and
password.
Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 217

Operating Web Applications Guide

Viewing historical (trend) data

The Diagrams application provides a Web-based graphing utility for viewing historical data in the
diagrams. This utility allows you to select the date range and the data that you want to view.

1. Click the meter icon to open its diagram, then click the link or tab that contains the button for
the trending information you want to view.

2. Click the Data Log Viewer button that corresponds to the data log you want to view.

The data log table displays today's data by default.

When the data log table opens, 30 rows of data are displayed initially. As you scroll or page
down, 30 additional rows of data at a time are added to the table.

3. Click Change Date Range to change the timeframe for the data and select one of the
available options for the data that you want to view. To specify a custom date range, select
Between these dates then click the calendar icons to set start and end dates.

The new date range is applied when you view the graph. Click Show Table to return to the
data log table. (When you return to the data log table, your previous table header selections are
cleared.)

If you select a custom date range, a maximum of 6000 rows of data are displayed initially. If
the custom date range includes more than 6000 rows of data, you can display the additional
records in increments of 30 rows at a time by scrolling down or pressing End.

4. Select the check boxes for the items in the table header for the parameters that you want to
graph.

5. Click Show Graph.

6. Manipulate and control the displayed graph by doing the following:

a. To zoom in on the graph, left click and drag the mouse pointer around the portion you want
to zoom in on.

b. To restore the graph to its original display size, double-click anywhere in the graph.

7. Click:
a. Device Diagram to return to that page.

b. Change Date Range to select a different date range for the data log table. The new date
range is applied when you view the graph.

c. Show Table to return to the data log table. (When you return to the data log table, your pre-
vious table header selections are cleared.)

RMS waveform plotting

The Diagrams application plots the calculated root mean square (RMS) values for waveforms.
Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

Page 218 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 219

Operating Web Applications Guide

Viewing meter events

You can view meter events in the diagrams, in a table format, using the Diagrams application.

NOTE: You cannot acknowledge alarms on the screens generated by the Diagrams application
since control functions are not supported. To acknowledge alarms, click the ALARMS icon in the
Web Applications component to open the Alarm Viewer.

Viewing the meter events

1. Click the meter icon to open its diagram, then click the link or tab that contains the Meter
events button.

2. Click the Meter events button to open the a table showing the meter events.

The meter events table displays today's data by default.

When the meter events table opens, 30 rows of data are displayed initially. As you scroll or
page down, 30 additional rows of data at a time are added to the table.

3. Click Change Date Range to change the timeframe for the data and select one of the
available options for the data that you want to view. To specify a custom date range, select
Between these dates then click the calendar icons to set a start and end date.

If you select a custom date range, a maximum of 6000 rows of data are displayed. If the
custom date range includes more than 6000 rows of data, you can display the additional
records in increments of 30 rows at a time by scrolling down or pressing End.

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Page 220 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Stale data and error indicators

The Diagrams application uses the Vista stale data settings for its diagrams. Stale data and errors
are displayed in the browser as follows:

l A yellow border surrounding an object indicates stale data.

l An orange border surrounding an object indicates an error in communications, security access,

configuration, or other system error.

NOTE: See the "Identifying Stale Data" topic in the Vista section of the online Power Monitoring
Expert Help for information on stale data. Although you can change the stale data and error flag
colors in Vista , the color indicators for these flags do not change in the Diagrams application.

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 221

Operating Web Applications Guide

Power Quality Performance diagrams

NOTE: These diagrams are part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license. The module must be configured before the diagrams can be used.

Power Quality Performance diagrams provide an overview of the power quality of your system. Two
sets of Vista diagrams are available; indicator diagrams and equipment diagrams:

l Indicator diagrams present an aggregated and simplified view of historical power quality data.

l Equipment diagrams provide a real-time summary of the operational status of the corrective
equipment installed in support of your system.

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTE: See Power Quality Performance events and disturbances, in the Reference section of this
document, for a definition of power quality events.

For details on the diagrams, see:

l Power Quality Performance Indicator diagrams

l Power Quality Performance Equipment diagrams

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Page 222 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Quality Performance Indicator diagrams

Overview
The Power Quality Indicator diagrams show a number of power quality indicators. Each indicator
represents a different type of power quality event or disturbance. The indicators are color coded and
provide more detailed information when clicked.

Diagrams
Power Quality Performance Indicator diagram is organized into 3 levels and a setup page:

1. Landing page

2. Details pages

3. Information pages

4. Setup page

1. Landing page

This page shows a high-level power quality summary. The landing page first opens to the LAST 7
DAYS viewing period. The other time periods are LAST 24 HOURS, LAST 30 DAYS, and LAST 12
MONTHS.

The indicators on the page are color-coded based on the state of the specific power quality item.
The color classifications are defined by configurable limits, set for each item. The color coding
indicates how well your system performed, with regards to power quality, over a certain period of
time:

l Green means there are no power quality issues.

l Yellow means there are a few power quality issues, which might be investigated.

l Red means there are frequent power quality issues, which should be investigated.

To open the landing page:

In diagrams, click the grouping object that links to the page , or click the Power Quality Performance
tab in the Web Applications banner. Which of these two options have been implemented depends
on how your system has been configured.

Example landing page:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 223

Operating Web Applications Guide

2. Details page

This page shows a breakdown of the specific event or disturbance, by time period. It provides the
following details:

l Counts for events with No Impact and Likely Impact.

l Counts for events with Internal, External, and Undetermined origin.

l A log with event details.

The details page also includes a description of the event or disturbance type and potential impacts.
There is a Learn More link to access additional, related information.

To open a details page:

On the landing page, click an event or disturbance to open the details page for that item.

Example details page:

Page 224 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

3. Information page

This page shows the color classification limits used to determine whether the event or disturbance
is flagged with a green, yellow, or red color.

To open an information page:

On a details page, click the information icon . Click X to return to the details page.

Example information page:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 225

Operating Web Applications Guide

4. Setup page

This page has controls to trigger an update of the power quality indicators and the indicator limits.

Use the Initialize/Update Indicators control to manually update all indicators in the Power Quality
Performance diagrams. This triggers an immediate update instead of waiting for automatic updates
(15 minutes to 1 hour).

Use the Import Indicator Limit Information control to update the Power Quality Performance
indicator limits after the limit table in the database has been updated.

The OTHER (OPTIONAL) area is intended for custom controls. This area is empty by default.

To open the setup page:

On the landing page, click the Setup icon . Click the Back icon to return to the landing
page.

Example setup page:

For details on the diagrams, see:

l Power Quality Performance Indicator diagrams

l Power Quality Performance Equipment diagrams

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

Page 226 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Power Quality Performance Equipment diagrams

Overview
The Power Quality Equipment diagrams show status and operational details about the power quality
equipment in your facility. The status indicators are color coded and provide more detailed
information when clicked.

Diagrams
Power Quality Equipment diagram is organized into 3 levels:

1. Landing page

2. Group page

3. Details pages

1. Landing page

This page shows the status for each equipment type and a count for the number of devices of that
type.

(Optional) Click Corrective in the top navigation area of the page to view only the corrective
equipment types, click All Types to see all equipment.

To open the landing page:

On the Power Quality Performance Indicator diagrams landing page, click Equipment in the left
navigation pane.

You can also click one of the buttons under CORRECTIVE EQUIPMENT STATUS on that page,
to open the equipment group page for the devices grouped under the equipment type. The default
types are Capacitor Banks, Active Harmonic Filters, and UPS.

Example landing page:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 227

Operating Web Applications Guide

2. Group page

This page shows operational summary information for the equipment, such as load current and
harmonics. Each piece of equipment is shown with its own display area.

To open a group page:

On the landing page, click one of the equipment types. Click the Back icon to return to the
landing page.

Example group page:

Page 228 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

3. Details page

This page shows detailed operational information for the equipment, including device status, and
maintenance indicators.

To open a details page:

On a group page, click inside a specific equipment area to open the details page for that item.

To view additional measurements for the device, click the folder icon in the OVERVIEW area on the
details page to open a device diagram for this equipment.

Click the Back icon to return to the landing page.

Example details page:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 229

Operating Web Applications Guide

For details on the diagrams, see:

l Power Quality Performance Indicator diagrams

l Power Quality Performance Equipment diagrams

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Page 230 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Operating Room diagrams

NOTE: These diagrams are part of the Insulation Monitoring Module. This Module requires a
separate license. The module must be configured before the diagrams can be used.

Nurses, facility managers and electricians benefit from the information provided by the Isolated
Power Interface. In the following scenarios, and more, the solution helps hospital staff understand
and resolve issues in critical rooms:

l Non-electrical personnel can view the test and hazard conditions in standard, easy-to-view dia-
grams and contact the necessary personnel to evaluate the room.

l Even during an operation, facility managers and electricians can review the circuits that are in
hazard condition and start troubleshooting.

Different diagrams are provided for ANSI and IEC regulated applications:

l Hospital room diagrams for ANSI

l Hospital room diagrams for IEC

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Hospital room diagrams for ANSI

When your hospital is configured using Power Monitoring Expert's Operating Room Configuration
Tool, several diagrams are produced that visually indicate the electrical status of the rooms and
circuits being monitored.

This section describes each type of diagram and explains how to work with the diagrams in case a
monitored room needs intervention.
See the following topics:

l Opening the hospital diagrams

l Using the diagrams

7EN02-0409-00 Page 231

Operating Web Applications Guide

l Data logs

Different diagrams are provided for ANSI and IEC regulated applications:

l Hospital room diagrams for ANSI

l Hospital room diagrams for IEC

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Opening the hospital diagrams

Diagrams for the rooms that are monitored by the solution can be viewed in the Diagrams Web
application of Power Monitoring Expert or the Vista client.

Power Monitoring Expert

To view the rooms in Power Monitoring Expert:

1. Log in to your Power Monitoring Expert web site. See the Power Monitoring Expert System
Guide for more details, if necessary.

2. In the toolbar, click Diagrams. The installed diagram groups appear.

For example:

Page 232 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

3. In the left pane, click Operating Room. The top-level diagram appears.

For example:

The top-level diagram shows the hospitals, facilities, or buildings that contain the rooms that are
monitored for hazard current. You can navigate to all the room and circuit details from this drawing.
See the next section for information about each diagram.

Vista Client

To view the hospital summary diagram in Vista:

1. Open the Power Monitoring Expert folder on your Windows desktop

2. Double-click the Vista shortcut and then enter your Vista login credentials.

3. Click File > Open.

4. Browse to C:\Program Files (x86)\Schneider Electric\Power Monitoring Exper-

t\config\diagrams\ud\HealthCare\OperatingRooms

5. Select Hospital.dgm and click Open. The top-level diagram for your site appears, for

7EN02-0409-00 Page 233

Operating Web Applications Guide

example:

The top-level diagram shows the hospitals, facilities, or buildings that contain the rooms that are
monitored for hazard current. You can navigate to all the room and circuit details from this drawing.
See the next section for information about each diagram.

See the following topics:

l Opening the hospital diagrams

l Using the diagrams

l Data logs

Different diagrams are provided for ANSI and IEC regulated applications:

l Hospital room diagrams for ANSI

l Hospital room diagrams for IEC

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

Page 234 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Using the diagrams

The Power Monitoring Expert diagrams display overview or detail information as well as status.

Hospital Summary diagram

The Hospital Summary diagram shows each hospital or facility that contains a group of rooms.

The Hospitals Summary diagram lists all the hospitals, facilities, or groups of rooms that were
configured for the hospital. Each box in the main area represents a group of rooms. This diagram
provides a status overview and links to rooms in the hospital, as shown next:

A Hospital Icon – Click this icon to see the diagram of rooms in the hospital.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 235

Operating Web Applications Guide

Status Indicator – This indicator is green or red to show the general status of the
hospital:

l Green – The hazard current monitor devices in all rooms do not detect any unsafe
conditions. This applies to all of the monitoring devices included in the group of
rooms.

l Red – One or more rooms have a circuit with an insulation fault or a LIM-IG6 is in
safety test mode. A LIM-IG6 test lasts 5 to 30 seconds. When the test is complete,
B
the color changes back to green. If an insulation fault has occurred, the indicator
remains red until the fault is corrected. In the hazard or test situation, the hospital
box appears like this:

Rooms. Total number of monitored rooms in this hospital. These are the rooms with
C
LIM-IG6 monitors.

What to do if the status indicator is red

1. Click the Hospital Icon to open the Summary of Rooms diagram. One or more room boxes will
also have a red alarm indicator.

2. Click the specific room icon to open the Room Details diagram. One or more panel boxes will
also have a red indicator. If the optional circuit fault locator devices are installed, the panel box
also indicates each circuit that has a resistance fault.

NOTE: Some types of electrical faults can occur and not be indicated by the individual circuit
fault locators. Only the room status indicator turns red. See Indicators for capacitive faults
for details.

3. Notify the responsible person that can address the condition for the room and specific circuits.

See the next sections for information about the other diagrams.

Summary of Rooms diagram

The Summary of Rooms diagram provides an overview of each room in the hospital, each box
represents a single room. For example:

Page 236 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Each box represents a single room and contains the following room information:

A Room Icon – Click the icon to see LIM-IG6 and circuit details for the room.
Room Status Indicator – Indicates the general conditions in the room. This indicator is
B either green "Safe" or red "Hazard." If the indicator is red, one or more IG6 monitors are in
test mode or an insulation fault is detected.
IG6 Status Indicators – Displays the status and real-time total hazard current (THC, in
mA) for each LIM-IG6 in the room. Up to six LIM-IG6 monitors can be installed in a room.
The indicator changes to red if the LIM-IG6 is in safety test mode or if a circuit has a hazard
C current condition. When in test mode, the THC measurement changes to 10.0 mA and the
red "Testing" label appears next to the LIM-IG6 name. The test lasts 5 to 30 seconds.
When the test is complete, the color changes to green. If a LIM-IG6 detects an insulation
fault, the THC measurement shows the real-time THC measurement.

LIM-IG6 in test mode:

LIM-IG6 in hazard condition:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 237

Operating Web Applications Guide

Room Details diagram

The Room Details diagram shows the details for each LIM-IG6 and connected devices in a room.
The Room Details diagram can show up to 3 LIM-IG6 monitors. If more than 3 monitors are in the
diagram, click the arrow in the upper right corner to see other monitors.

NOTE: For 208/240V systems, one LIM-IG6 can be shared between 2 rooms. In this case, the
monitor appears on both room diagrams.

For example, the following image shows a diagram of the room and LIM-IG6 details:

Page 238 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Each LIM-IG6 area contains these sections to provide specific information about the circuit
conditions:

LIM-IG6 Status – Displays the name and status of the monitor, real-time
THC measurement, and test status. The THC measurement is taken directly from the
LIM-IG6.

This indicator is either green "Safe" or red "Hazard." If the indicator is red, one or more
A panels are in test mode or circuits in the room are in a hazard condition. The red "Test In
Progress" label appears when someone starts a LIM-IG6 test. A test is started by
pressing the test button on the LIM-IG6 or by pressing the test button on the remote test
device. This label remains visible during the test.

See Indicators for Test Mode and Hazard condition for details.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 239

Operating Web Applications Guide

Measurements – Displays the real-time measurements for the components connected to

the LIM-IG6.

l Load – Optional. Displays the transformer load if the circuit transformer is connected
to the LIM-IG6. The status indicator turns red if the overload percentage exceeds the
threshold defined for the transformer.

l Volts L1 - L2 – Voltage between L1 and L2, in V.

l Volts L1 - Ground – Voltage between L1 and Ground, in V.

l Volts L2 - Ground – Voltage between L2 and Ground, in V.

B
l Impedance – Impedance Zf in kΩ.

l Resistance – Resistance Rf in kΩ.

l Leakage – Leakage capacitance in nF.

l Temperature – Optional. The status of the transformer temperature, according to the

over-temperature sensor. This appears only if the temperature sensor is installed with
the transformer. The value changes to red "High" if the temperature exceeds the
threshold.

Circuit Status – Appears only if the optional circuit fault locator is connected to the LIM-
IG6. This area shows the status for each circuit being monitored. If the LIM-IG6 detects a
resistance fault, the circuit monitor identifies the specific circuit and the circuit indicator
turns red. When any indicator turns red, the hazard status propagates up to the top-level
C
Hospitals Summary diagram. If the LIM-IG6 is in test mode, all circuit indicators turn red.

See examples below for indicators in test or hazard condition.

Event Log and Data Log – Contains links to the historical data log and event log for the
D
panel measurements. See Data logs for more information.

Indicators for Test Mode and Hazard condition

LIM-IG6 in test mode, with circuit fault locators (left) and without circuit fault locators (right):

Page 240 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

LIM-IG6 in hazard condition, with circuit fault locators (left) and without circuit fault locators (right):

Indicators for capacitive faults

DANGER
EQUIPMENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
• Do not ignore the main device hazard indicator when all circuit fault locator icons show green
status.
• Determine and correct the cause of the fault if the main device hazard indicator shows a
hazard.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

In some cases, such as when too many equipment items are connected to circuits, the LIM-IG6
detects a capacitance fault that exceeds the total hazard current (THC). For this situation, the room

7EN02-0409-00 Page 241

Operating Web Applications Guide

Status area shows the hazard, as shown next. However, if the optional circuit fault locators are
installed, the circuit indicators do not indicate the capacitive fault, because they show only
resistance faults, as shown next:

If all the circuit fault indicators are green, as above, and the room Status area shows a hazard,
appropriate personnel must take action to determine and correct the cause of the fault.

See the following topics:

l Opening the hospital diagrams

l Using the diagrams

l Data logs

Different diagrams are provided for ANSI and IEC regulated applications:

l Hospital room diagrams for ANSI

l Hospital room diagrams for IEC

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

Page 242 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Data logs
When you need details about circuit measurements and details, the Room Details diagram provides
links to the historical data log and the event log. These logs provide measurement data for the 5-
minute polling interval of the LIM-IG6. You can filter the data in the logs by date range.

When using the event log, you can also generate a graph that shows THC measurements plotted
across time. If any THC measurement exceeds the hazard threshold, the graph includes a callout at
the specific event point.

Historical data log and graph

The following figure shows the historical log table.

The buttons located at the top of the table are:

l Device Diagram – Click this to return to the diagram.

l Change Date Range – Click this to view data for different dates. See "Select Date Range"
below for more information.

l Show Graph – Select one or more column headers in the table and click this to see a graph of
the data. The graph shows the data at 5-minute intervals. For example, you can check the Total
Hazard Current option in the table and see the values. Click a point on the data line to see
details for that value, as shown next.

The following figure shows the historical log table from the Vista client view:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 243

Operating Web Applications Guide

Event Log

The following figure shows the event log table:

The buttons located at the top of the table are:

l Device Diagram – Click this to return to the diagram.

l Change Date Range – Click this to view data for different dates. See "Select Date Range"
below for more information.

Select date range:

Page 244 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

For either type of log table, you can select the date range for data you want to see. The default date
range is "Today".

1. Click Select Date Range.

2. Select an available range or click Between these dates and select specific dates in the cal-
endar.

3. Click Show Table to see the data.

If you select a date range of more than one week, a message appears to inform you that the table
will be very long.

The new table appears.

See the following topics:

l Opening the hospital diagrams

l Using the diagrams

l Data logs

Different diagrams are provided for ANSI and IEC regulated applications:

l Hospital room diagrams for ANSI

l Hospital room diagrams for IEC

7EN02-0409-00 Page 245

Operating Web Applications Guide

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Hospital room diagrams for IEC

When your hospital is configured using Power Monitoring Expert's Operating Room Configuration
Tool, several diagrams are produced that visually indicate the electrical status of the rooms and
circuits being monitored.

This section describes each type of diagram and explains how to work with the diagrams in case a
monitored room needs intervention.
See the following topics:

l Opening the hospital diagrams

l Using the diagrams

l Data logs

Different diagrams are provided for ANSI and IEC regulated applications:

l Hospital room diagrams for ANSI

l Hospital room diagrams for IEC

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

Page 246 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Opening the hospital diagrams

Diagrams for the rooms that are monitored by the solution can be viewed in the Diagrams Web
application of Power Monitoring Expert or the Vista client.

Power Monitoring Expert

To view the rooms in Power Monitoring Expert:

1. Log in to your Power Monitoring Expert web site. See the Power Monitoring Expert System
Guide for more details, if necessary.

2. In the toolbar, click Diagrams. The installed diagram groups appear.

For example:

Your initial view will be different based on your facility.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 247

Operating Web Applications Guide

3. In the left pane, click Operating Room. The top-level diagram appears.

The top-level diagram shows the hospitals, facilities, or buildings that contain the rooms that are
monitored for hazard current. You can navigate to all the room and circuit details from this drawing.
See the next section for information about each diagram.

Vista Client

To view the hospital summary diagram in Vista:

1. Open the Power Monitoring Expert folder on your Windows desktop

2. Double-click the Vista shortcut and then enter your Vista login credentials.

3. Click File > Open.

4. Browse to C:\Program Files (x86)\Schneider Electric\Power Monitoring Exper-

t\config\diagrams\ud\HealthCare\OperatingRooms

5. Select Hospital.dgm and click Open. The top-level diagram for your site appears, for

Page 248 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

example:

The top-level diagram shows the hospitals, facilities, or buildings that contain the rooms that are
monitored for hazard current. You can navigate to all the room and circuit details from this drawing.
See the next section for information about each diagram.

See the following topics:

l Opening the hospital diagrams

l Using the diagrams

l Data logs

Different diagrams are provided for ANSI and IEC regulated applications:

l Hospital room diagrams for ANSI

l Hospital room diagrams for IEC

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

7EN02-0409-00 Page 249

Operating Web Applications Guide

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Using the diagrams

The Power Monitoring Expert diagrams display overview or detail information as well as status.

Hospital Summary diagram

The Hospital Summary diagram shows each hospital or facility that contains a group of rooms.

The Hospitals Summary diagram lists all the hospitals, facilities, or groups of rooms that were
configured for the hospital. Each box in the main area represents a group of rooms. This diagram
provides a status overview and links to rooms in the hospital, as shown next:

A Hospital Icon – Click this icon to see the diagram of rooms in the hospital.

Page 250 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Status Indicator – This indicator is green or red to show the general status of the
hospital:

l Green – The hazard current monitor devices in all theatres do not detect any unsafe
conditions. This applies to all of the monitoring devices included in the group of
theatres.

l Red – One or more rooms have a circuit with an insulation fault. If an insulation fault
B
has occurred, the indicator remains red until the fault is corrected. In the hazard
situation, the hospital box appears like this:

Rooms – Total number of monitored rooms in this hospital. These are the rooms with
C
IM20-H monitoring devices.

What to do if the status indicator is red

1. Click the Hospital Icon to open the Summary of Rooms diagram. One or more room boxes will
also have a red alarm indicator.

2. Click the specific room icon to open the Room Details diagram. One or more panel boxes will
also have a red indicator.

3. Notify the responsible person that can address the condition for the room and specific circuits.

See the next sections for information about the other diagrams.

Summary of Building Rooms diagram

The Summary of Building Rooms diagram provides an overview of each room in the building. For
example:

Each box represents a single room and contains the following room information:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 251

Operating Web Applications Guide

Room Icon – Click this icon to see the details for the IM20-H device measurements in the
A room.

Room Status Indicator – Indicates the general conditions in the room. This indicator is
B either green "Safe" or red "Hazard." If the indicator is red, one or more IM20-H devices
detects a fault.

Page 252 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Room Information and Status Indicators – Displays the room name, the IM20-H device
in the room and the status indicators. If a fault occurs in the room, these indicators show
the specific type of fault.

l Insulation Status – Normal condition is green. If the impedance is lower than the
threshold, the indicator turns orange. The impedance threshold is set on the IM20-H
device.

l Electrical Status – Normal condition is green. If the current transformer load or

temperature exceed the threshold set on the IM20-H device, this indicator turns red.

l Wiring Status – Normal condition is green. This indicator turns red if the
device cannot monitor the isolation transformer.

Room Details diagram

Use the Rooms tab to create rooms in the hospital environment and associate 1 Vigilohm IM20-H
device per room.

NOTE: With IEC, you can have only 1 Vigilohm device per room.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 253

Operating Web Applications Guide

Up to 2 IM20-H device areas can be shown per screen of the diagram. For example:

Each IM20-H area contains these sections to provide specific information about the circuit
conditions:

Page 254 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Device Name – The group and name of the device in the room.

IM20-H Status – The name and status of the IM20-H. This indicator is either green "Safe"
or red "Hazard."
Impedance – The real-time measurement of the impedance to ground, in kiloohms. If the
impedance is lower than the threshold, the indicator turns orange. The impedance limit is
set on the IM20-H device.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 255

Operating Web Applications Guide

Transformer Indicators – The load and temperature status for the current transfer

l Load – If the current transformer load exceeds the threshold, this indicator turns red
and displays the real-time load percentage value.

B
l Temperature – If the current transformer temperature rises above the safe threshold,
this indicator turns red and the status changes to "High."

Event Log and Data Log – Contains links to the historical data log and event log for the
C
panel measurements. See Data logs for more information.

See the following topics:

l Opening the hospital diagrams

l Using the diagrams

l Data logs

Different diagrams are provided for ANSI and IEC regulated applications:

l Hospital room diagrams for ANSI

l Hospital room diagrams for IEC

Page 256 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Data logs
When you need details about circuit measurements and details, the Room Details diagram provides
links to the historical data log and the event log. These logs provide measurement data for the 15-
minute polling interval of the Vigilohm IM20-H. You can filter the data in the logs by date range.

Historical data log

The following image shows the historical log table from the Power Monitoring Expert view:

The buttons located at the top of the table are:

l Device Diagram – Click this to return to the diagram.

l Change Date Range – Click this to view data for different dates. See "Select Date Range"
below for more information.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 257

Operating Web Applications Guide

l Show Graph – Select one or more column headers in the table and then click Show Graph to
see a graph of the data. The graph shows the data at 5-minute intervals.

The following figure shows the historical log table from the Vista client view:

Event Log

The following figure shows the event log table from the Power Monitoring Expert view:

The buttons located at the top of the table are:

Page 258 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

l Device Diagram – Click this to return to the diagram.

l Change Date Range – Click this to view data for different dates. See "Select Date Range"
below for more information.

Select date range:

For either type of log table, you can select the date range for data you want to see. The default date
range is "Today".

1. Click Select Date Range.

2. Select an available range or click Between these dates and select specific dates in the cal-
endar.

3. Click Show Table to see the data.

If you select a date range of more than one week, a message appears to inform you that the table
will be very long.

The new table appears.

See the following topics:

l Opening the hospital diagrams

l Using the diagrams

l Data logs

7EN02-0409-00 Page 259

Operating Web Applications Guide

Different diagrams are provided for ANSI and IEC regulated applications:

l Hospital room diagrams for ANSI

l Hospital room diagrams for IEC

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Page 260 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

UPS Auto Test diagrams

NOTE: These diagrams are part of the Backup Power Management Module. This Module requires
a separate license. The module must be configured before the diagrams can be used.

Overview
The diagrams show status and operational details for the UPS devices.

Diagrams
UPS Auto Test diagrams are organized into 3 levels:

1. Groups summary page

2. Group details pages

3. Device details pages

1. Groups summary page

This page shows a summary of the status for each UPS group.

Example groups summary page:

2. Group details page

This page shows details for each UPS device in the group.

TIP: Click the group icon for a group in the groups summary page to open the respective group
details page.

Example group details page:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 261

Operating Web Applications Guide

(The colored outline boxes around the measurements indicate that the diagram in this example is
not linked to an actual UPS device.)

3. Device details page

This page shows details for a specific UPS device.

TIP: Click a battery icon for a UPS in the group details page to open the respective device details
page.

Example device details page:

(The colored outline boxes around the measurements indicate that the diagram in this example is
not linked to an actual UPS device.)

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

Page 262 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 263

Operating Web Applications Guide

EPSS diagrams
NOTE: These diagrams are part of the Backup Power Management Module. This Module requires
a separate license. The module must be configured before the diagrams can be used.

Overview
The diagrams show status and operational details for the generators and transfer switches that are
part of the EPSS system.

Diagrams
EPSS diagrams are organized into 3 levels:

1. Groups summary page

2. Group details pages

3. Device details pages

In addition there are summary pages for all the generators and all the transfer switches in the
system.

1. Groups summary page

This page shows a summary for each EPSS group.

Example groups summary page:

2. Group details page

This page shows details for each generator and transfer switch device in the group.

TIP: Click the group icon for a group in the groups summary page to open the respective group
details page.

Example group details page:

Page 264 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

(No data is shown in this example because the diagram is not linked to actual devices.)

3. Device details page

This page shows details for a specific generator or transfer switch device.

TIP: Click a device icon for a generator or transfer switch in the group details page to open the
respective device details page.

Example device details page:

(No data is shown in this example because the diagram is not linked to actual devices.)

Summary pages
These pages show details for all the generators and all the transfer switches that are defined in the
system.

Example generator summary page:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 265

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example transfer switch summary page:

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

Page 266 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 267

Operating Web Applications Guide

Breaker Aging diagrams

NOTE: These diagrams are part of the Breaker Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license. The module must be configured before the diagrams can be used.

Overview
The diagrams show aging and wear related details for the breaker devices.

Diagrams
Breaker aging diagrams are organized into 3 levels:

1. Groups summary page

2. Group details pages

3. Device details pages

1. Groups summary page

This page shows a summary of the status for each breaker group.

Example groups summary page:

(No data is shown in this example because the diagram is not linked to actual devices.)

2. Group details page

This page shows details for each switchboard in the group.

TIP: Click the group icon for a group in the groups summary page to open the respective group
details page.

Example group details page:

Page 268 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

(No data is shown in this example because the diagram is not linked to actual devices.)

3. Device details page

This page shows details for a specific breaker device.

TIP: Click the switchboard icon for a switchboard in the group details page to open the device
details page.

Example device details page:

(The colored outline boxes around the measurements indicate that the diagram in this example is
not linked to an actual UPS device.)

Related topics:

l The Diagrams user interface

l User authentication

l Viewing historical (trend) data

l Viewing meter events

7EN02-0409-00 Page 269

Operating Web Applications Guide

l Stale data and error indicators

l Power Quality Performance diagrams

l Operating Room diagrams

l UPS Auto Test diagrams

l EPSS diagrams

l Breaker Aging diagrams

For information on how to configure Diagrams, see Diagrams configuration.

Page 270 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Reports operation

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Overview
Use the Reports application to generate historical data reports. You can view the reports in PME, or
download them in different formats for sharing or storing externally. To generate a report, you can
either run it manually, setup an automatic schedule, or define trigger events such as a system
disturbance.

Reports are based on historical data that is stored in the PME database. A report can simply display
the historical data or it can process data to show patterns and relationships. The Tabular Report is
an example of a simple report that shows data in a table. The Energy Modeling report is an example
of a report that processes different types of input data to produce predictions and comparisons
displayed in chart and diagram formats.

Reports are generated based on report templates. PME provides a wide range of default templates.
You can change the colors and logo used for these templates. To customize the types of inputs or
outputs of the default templates you need to create custom templates. Creating custom templates
requires engineering work outside of PME.

The Reports user interface (UI) has two main areas: the Report Library and the Reports Display. To
see a report in the Reports Display, you select the report in the Report Library.

TIP: You can open Reports from the REPORTS link in the Web Applications banner.

For more information see:

l Reports UI

l Generating a report

l Downloading a report

Report templates
The report templates that are included with PME by default cover a wide range of applications. The
templates are grouped into folders based on application. Choose the templates that best meet your
reporting needs. The following table shows the default templates and folders.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 271

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: Some report templates are part of add-on software modules for PME and are enabled
through the module licenses.

Folder Template Licensing

- General Activity
- Generator Battery Health
Backup Power - Generator EPSS Test Needs Backup Power Management
Management - Generator Load Summary Module license.
- UPS Auto Test
- UPS Battery Health
- Billing
Billing and Allocation - Billing Summary Needs Billing Module license.
- Multiple Billing
Billing and Allocation \ IT
- Energy by IT Customer Needs Billing Module license.
Billing
- Circuit Breaker Aging Needs Breaker Performance Module
Breaker Performance
- Circuit Breaker Settings license.
- Branch Circuit Power
- Equipment Capacity
- Generator Capacity Needs Capacity Management Module
Capacity Management
- Generator Power license.
- Power Losses
- UPS Power
- Duration Curve
- Energy Regression
Analysis
- Energy Usage per State
- KPI
Needs Energy Analysis Module
Energy Analysis - Multiple Equipment
license.
Operation
- Power Usage Per State
- PUE Summary
- Single Equipment
Operation
Energy Analysis \ Energy - Create Model Needs Energy Analysis Module
Modeling - Use Model license.

Page 272 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Folder Template Licensing

- Calendar Trend Month
- Calendar Trend Week
- Consumption Ranking
- Energy Comparison
- Energy Cost
Energy Management - Energy Period over Period Included in BASE license.
- Energy Usage
- Energy Usage by Shift
- Energy Usage by Time of
Use (TOU)
- Load Profile
- 100 ms
- Dashboard
- Data Export
General Included in BASE license.
- Event History
- System Configuration
- Tabular
- Isolated Power (ANSI) Needs Insulation Monitoring Module
Insulation Monitoring
- Isolated Power (IEC) license.
- EN50160:2000
- EN50160:2000 Mains
Signaling
- EN50160:2010
- EN50160:2010 Mains
Power Quality Signaling Included in BASE license.
- Harmonic Compliance
- Harmonic Compliance
2014
- IEC61000-4-30
- Power Quality
Power Quality - Power Quality Analysis Needs Power Quality Performance
Performance - Power Quality Impact Module license.
- Hourly Usage
- Multi Device Usage
Usage Trending - Multiple Trend Included in BASE license.
- Single Device Usage
- Trend

Use the following links to find the descriptions of the different report templates:

Backup Power Management Reports General Reports

Billing and Allocation Reports Insulation Monitoring Reports
Breaker Performance Reports IT Billing Reports
Capacity Management Reports Power Quality Reports
Energy Analysis Reports Power Quality Performance Reports

7EN02-0409-00 Page 273

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Management Reports Usage Trending Reports

Energy Modeling Reports

Subscriptions
Subscribe to a report to have it generated automatically based on a schedule or on a trigger event.
For example, you can subscribe to a report and have it generated daily at a certain time, or monthly
on a certain day and time. A trigger event can be any event in the system, for example a device
setpoint going active, or a breaker tripping.

Ownership and Sharing

Reports can be made Private or Public. A Private report can only be seen by the person who created
it and by users with Supervisor access permissions. A Public report is visible to all users,
regardless of their access levels. By default, a report is only visible in the user group where it was
created. To make a report visible to other user groups, you have to Share the report with this user
group.

Time display
See Time display in Web Applications for information on how time is displayed in a system where
the monitoring devices, the PME/Web server, and the Web client (browser) are located in different
time zones.

Terminology
See Reports Terminology for definitions of the terms used in the Reports application.

For information on how to configure Alarms, see Reports configuration.

Page 274 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Generating a report
Generate a report to view power monitoring system information.
To generate a report:

1. In Reports, open the Report Library and navigate to the report or the report template you want
to generate.

2. Click the report name to display the report in the Reports Display pane.

3. Set the input parameters for the report and click Generate Report.

NOTE: If you chose a report, then the saved input parameters are set to their saved values.
If you chose a report template, then all input parameters are unselected or have generic
default values.

4. The report output is displayed in the Reports Display pane.

Related topics:

l Generating a report

l Downloading a report

l Report descriptions

l Reports operation

l Reports UI

l Reports Terminology

For information on how to configure Reports, see Reports configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 275

Operating Web Applications Guide

Downloading a report
Download a report in one of the supported formats (PDF, Excel, Tiff Image) to share the report
output with others, or to save it externally
To download a report:

1. In Reports, generate a report.

2. In the Reports Display pane, view the generated report and click Download report as on the
toolbar immediately above the report output. Choose the format you want to download the
report in.

3. The report is downloaded in the selected format.

Related topics:

l Generating a report

l Downloading a report

l Report descriptions

l Reports operation

l Reports UI

l Reports Terminology

For information on how to configure Reports, see Reports configuration.

Page 276 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Report descriptions
Use the following links to find the descriptions of the different report types:

Backup Power Management Reports General Reports

Billing and Allocation Reports Insulation Monitoring Reports
Breaker Performance Reports IT Billing Reports **
Capacity Management Reports Power Quality Reports
Energy Analysis Reports Power Quality Performance Reports
Energy Management Reports Usage Trending Reports
Energy Modeling Reports *

* Energy Modeling is part of Energy Analysis

** IT Billing is part of Billing and Allocation
Related topics:

l Generating a report

l Downloading a report

l Report descriptions

l Reports operation

l Reports UI

l Reports Terminology

For information on how to configure Reports, see Reports configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 277

Operating Web Applications Guide

Backup Power Management Reports

NOTE: These reports are part of the Backup Power Management Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Backup Power Management folder in the Report Library includes the following report
templates:

Generator Activity Report Generator Load Summary Report

Generator Battery Health Report UPS Auto Test Report
Generator Battery Health Export UPS Battery Health Report
Generator Test EPSS Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Page 278 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Generator Activity Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Backup Power Management Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Generator Activity Report shows the test run hours and other test run data for each generator in
the selected group. In particular, the report shows:

l The number of non-emergency running hours as an annual total.

l Running hours broken out into categories for Test, Power Outage, Load Shedding.

l Bar graphs for generators with the number of hours of non-emergency run time.

l A table with non-emergency and emergency run hours for each generator.

Prerequisites

l The Backup Power Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l EPSS Group

l Reporting Period

l Threshold

l Include Activity Details

l Include Data Warnings

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 279

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 280 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Generator Battery Health Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Backup Power Management Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Generator Battery Health Report shows the captured waveform image of the generator voltage
when the generator starts.

The report includes a reference signature that shows the battery voltage for a previous Battery
Health Report run for this generator. Use this reference signature to monitor battery performance
over time and plan preventative maintenance actions when necessary.

Prerequisites

l The Backup Power Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Select EPSS Group

l Exclude Sources

l Select Generator Starts

l Include Data Warnings

l Cumulative Degradation Threshold

7EN02-0409-00 Page 281

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 282 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Generator Battery Health Export

NOTE: This report is part of the Backup Power Management Module. This module requires a
separate license.

Generator Battery Health Export is based on the same data as the Generator Battery Health Report
report. The export version provides the raw data in CSV file format. The export file can be imported
by other systems, such as Energy Operation.

Prerequisites

l The Backup Power Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Select EPSS Group

l Exclude Sources

l Select Generator Starts

l Cumulative Degradation Threshold

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 283

Operating Web Applications Guide

Generator Test EPSS Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Backup Power Management Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Generator Test EPSS Report shows the details for a generator test run. The report can also be
configured to conform to the requirements for an Emergency Power Supply System (EPSS) test,
including Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS). For example, the report shows the transfer time of
the lead ATS and indicates whether the transfer time passes or does not pass the test
requirements.

NOTE: Emergency Power Supply System (EPSS) is a North American term used in the
healthcare segment. It describes an arrangement of generators and automatic transfer switches,
designed to provide backup power in case of an utility power interruption.

Prerequisites

l The Backup Power Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Company Name

l Technician Name

l Report Group

l Exclude Sources

l Use Run History

l Select Date Range

l ATS Summary

l Events Summary

l Generator Summary

l Comments

l Show Data Warnings

Page 284 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 285

Operating Web Applications Guide

Page 286 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 287

Operating Web Applications Guide

Generator Load Summary Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Backup Power Management Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Generator Load Summary Report provides a summary graph of electrical data during a
generator run. The report includes a load curve, minimum-maximum-average load summary, and
other electrical details.

NOTE: This report is only included with the system if the EPSS Test Module is NOT installed.

Prerequisites

l The Backup Power Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Select EPSS Group

l Exclude Sources

l Use Run History

l Select Date range

l Reporting Period

l Include Electrical Details

l Include Data Warnings

Page 288 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 289

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 290 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

UPS Auto Test Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Backup Power Management Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The UPS Auto Test Report provides information regarding the battery health of your Galaxy VM,
Galaxy VX, and MGE 5500 UPS devices.

Prerequisites

l The Backup Power Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l UPS Group

l Reporting Period

l Include Event History

l Include Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 291

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 292 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

UPS Battery Health Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Backup Power Management Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) Battery Health Report displays information related to the
health of the battery for a UPS device. The UPS devices intended for use with this report are UPS
devices that do not have an auto-test capability.

For information on the terms and calculations used in this report, see UPS Battery Health Report
calculations.

Prerequisites

l The Backup Power Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Select Waveforms

l Waveform Drop Percentage

l Waveform Drop Sample Size

l Recovery Value Multiplier

l Voltage Threshold

l Include Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 293

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 294 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Billing and Allocation Reports

NOTE: These reports are part of the Billing and Allocation Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Billing and Allocation folder in the Report Library includes the following report templates:

l Billing Report

l Billing Summary Report

l Multiple Billing Export Report

l Multiple Billing Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

For information about changing the unit cost values in a rate file used for billing reports, see the Rate
Editor tool.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 295

Operating Web Applications Guide

Billing Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Billing Module. This module requires a separate license.

Use the Billing Report to create an itemized energy charge back report for a particular source (for
example, a tenant) over a specified date range. The Billing Report template uses measurements
specified in a rate file. The rate file is configurable and supports many different rate structures.
Use the Billing Report to:

l Produce accurate tenant energy bills

l Allocate costs to departments or processes

l Verify utility bills.

Prerequisites

l The Billing Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Tenant

l Reporting Period

l Rate

Page 296 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 297

Operating Web Applications Guide

Billing Summary Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Billing Module. This module requires a separate license.

The Billing Summary report summarizes multiple bills in one report and allows run-time
customization of exactly what is calculated and displayed in the report. You can use the Billing
Summary report to generate a bill for multiple tenants (sources) with a common rate file. The report
also allows you to filter the tenants and the line items so you can show only the information you
want in the report.

Prerequisites

l The Billing Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Tenant (multiple selection)

l Reporting Period

l Rate

l Tenant Filter

l Line Item Filter

l Save Billing Totals

l Keep True Totals

Page 298 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 299

Operating Web Applications Guide

Multiple Billing Export Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Billing Module. This Module requires a separate license.

The Multiple Billing Export report exports tenant billing data in a customized XML format for
integration with third-party billing systems. The report generates a bill for the tenants for the
specified date range using the selected billing rate.

Prerequisites

A tenant hierarchy, with views defined in the hierarchy template (such as a physical layout or virtual
meters) needs to be configured in Hierarchy Manager. You select hierarchy views in the source
selection for the Tenant input field. See Hierarchy Manager Help for information about creating
hierarchies and views.

Related

l The Billing Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Tenant (multiple selection)

l Reporting Period

l Rate

l XML Transform File

l XML Export File

l Overwrite XML Export

l Stylesheet (optional)

l Save Billing Totals

l Email XML Export

l Email Recipients (comma separated)

Page 300 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Multiple Billing Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Billing Module. This Module requires a separate license.

The Multiple Billing report extends the existing Billing report to allow the selection of multiple tenants
(sources). By allowing multiple tenant selection you can create, save, and schedule one report for
all tenants on a common rate. The report also allows you to filter the tenants and the line items so
you can show only the information that you want to include in the report. To do so, select your
tenants and then configure the rest of the report parameters as usual.

The output of this report is a single file, so if you choose to save or subscribe to a PDF file, then
each bill appears on its own page for review and printing purposes.

Prerequisites

l The Billing Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Related

Multiple Billing Export Report - provides tenant billing data in a customized XML format for
integration with third-party billing systems.

Report inputs

l Title

l Tenant (multiple selection)

l Reporting Period

l Rate

l Save Billing Totals

l Notes

7EN02-0409-00 Page 301

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example (2 tenants):

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 302 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Breaker Performance Reports

NOTE: These reports are part of the Breaker Performance Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Breaker Performance folder in the Report Library includes the following report templates:

l Circuit Breaker Aging Report

l Circuit Breaker Settings Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 303

Operating Web Applications Guide

Circuit Breaker Aging Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Breaker Performance Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

The Circuit Breaker Aging Report shows the status of circuit breaker aging and wear in your
electrical system.

Prerequisites

l The Breaker Performance Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Select Group

l Grouped By

l Include Breakers with Minor Aging and Wear

l Include Data Warnings

Page 304 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 305

Operating Web Applications Guide

Circuit Breaker Settings Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Breaker Performance Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

Use the Circuit Breaker Settings Report to monitor and report on the configuration settings of the
circuit breakers in your electrical system.

Prerequisites

l The Breaker Performance Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Select Group

l Include Unassociated Breakers

l Baseline Date

l Circuit Breaker Inventory

l Trip Settings

l Protection Modes

l Maintenance Status

l Change Summary

l Include Data Warnings

Page 306 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 307

Operating Web Applications Guide

Page 308 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 309

Operating Web Applications Guide

Capacity Management Reports

NOTE: These reports are part of the Capacity Management Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Capacity Management folder in the Report Library includes the following report templates:

l Branch Circuit Power Report

l Equipment Capacity Report

l Generator Capacity Report

l Generator Power Report

l Power Losses Report

l UPS Power Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Page 310 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Branch Circuit Power Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Capacity Management Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

The Branch Circuit Power Report describes the average and maximum loading for branch circuits
within the data center facility, as well as the percentage load compared to the breaker size.

Use the Branch Circuit Power Report for:

l Proactive capacity management

l Incident management

l Customer expansion planning

l Service Level Agreement (SLA) management.

Prerequisites

l The Capacity Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

If any of these prerequisites tasks are not performed correctly, your reports will provide inaccurate
information.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Facility Name

l Facility Location

l Customers

l Reporting Period

l Primary Sort

l Include Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 311

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 312 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Equipment Capacity Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Capacity Management Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

The Equipment Capacity Report shows the peak load provided by an Automatic Transfer Switch
(ATS) or other equipment during a time period and compares the peak load to the rated capacity.
The report can show a summary of all entities in a group or daily information for each ATS or
equipment. The report includes visual graphs of the load and capacity. If the equipment exceeds the
capacity threshold the summary bar is displayed red, not green.

Prerequisites

l The Capacity Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l EPSS Group

l Exclude Sources

l Reporting Period

l Threshold

l Show Daily Rollups

l Include Data Table

l Include Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 313

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

Page 314 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

7EN02-0409-00 Page 315

Operating Web Applications Guide

Page 316 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 317

Operating Web Applications Guide

Generator Capacity Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Capacity Management Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

The Generator Capacity Report helps verify that the generators can adequately support the loads
required during an emergency. The report compares the loads the generators and equipment must
carry with the available generator capacity. In particular, the report shows:

l Power consumption grouped by load type (Equipment, Life Safety, Critical)

l The generator capacity used/available.

l The redundancy levels (N-1, N-2, …).

Prerequisites

l The Capacity Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l EPSS Group

l Exclude Sources

l Reporting Period

l Aggregation Period

l Include Data Table

l Include Data Warnings

Page 318 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 319

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 320 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Generator Power Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Capacity Management Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

The Generator Power Report provides information regarding the generator backup power system
and its ability to handle a utility power outage while still complying with the intended redundancy
design.

Prerequisites

l The Capacity Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Facility Name

l Facility Location

l Report Data

l Reporting Period

l Aggregation Data

l Include Data Tables

l Show Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 321

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

Page 322 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 323

Operating Web Applications Guide

Power Losses Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Capacity Management Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

The Power Losses Report provides a breakdown of the cost of various losses throughout a power
system. Use this report to analyze and quantify the cost of system inefficiencies due to
transformers (MV and LV) and UPS modules.

Prerequisites

l The Capacity Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Facility Name

l Facility Location

l Reporting Period

l Energy Cost (per kWh)

l Aggregation Data

l Include Data Tables

l Show Data Warnings

Page 324 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 325

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 326 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

UPS Power Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Capacity Management Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

The UPS Power Report provides information regarding the UPS backup power system and its
ability to handle a utility power outage while still complying with the intended redundancy design.

Prerequisites

l The Capacity Management Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Facility Name

l Facility Location

l Report Data

l Reporting Period

l Aggregation Data

l Include Data Tables

l Show Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 327

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

Page 328 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 329

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Analysis Reports

NOTE: These reports are part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

The Energy Analysis folder in the Report Library includes the following report templates:

l Duration Curve Report

l Energy Regression Analysis Report

l Energy Usage Per State Report

l KPI Report

l Multi Equipment Operation Report

l Power Usage Per State Report

l PUE Summary Report

l Single Equipment Operation Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Page 330 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Duration Curve Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate license.

Use the Duration Curve report template to determine how to reduce peak demand and to lower base
load, to validate performance characteristics and to perform capacity modeling tasks.

Prerequisites

l The Energy Analysis Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Single Source – see Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurement – see Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l n % Crossing

l Exclude Values Over

l Exclude Values Under

l Reporting Period

l Target Line

l Source Label

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Include Data Table

l Show Occurrences Chart

l Show Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 331

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

Page 332 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 333

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Regression Analysis Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate license.

This report shows modeled energy analysis data with respect to a particular data driver, such as
weather.

See Interpreting the Energy Regression Analysis Report results for more information on this topic.

Prerequisites

l The Energy Analysis Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Driver Data Source

l Driver Data Quantity

l Model Data Source

l Model Data Quantity

l Reporting Period

l Regression Type

l X Axis Calculation Method

l Degree Days Pivot Point

l Y Axis Calculation Method

l Aggregation Interval

l Exclude Incomplete Weeks

l Exclude Incomplete Days

l Exclude Days with Rollover

l Deviation Type

l Max Authorized Deviation

l Include Data Warnings

l Include Report Parameters Summary

Page 334 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 335

Operating Web Applications Guide

Page 336 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 337

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Usage Per State Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate license.

Use the Energy Usage Per State report template to create a report that displays equipment energy
usage data grouped by equipment state.

Prerequisites

l The Energy Analysis Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Energy Measurements

l Energy Measurement Label

l State Measurement

l State Labels

l Rollup

l Aggregation Interval

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Include Data Table

l Show Data Warnings

Example:

Page 338 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

7EN02-0409-00 Page 339

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 340 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

KPI Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate license.

This report calculates a Key Performance Indicator (KPI) based on one or more input parameters.
These input parameters can represent electrical and non-electrical consumption data, weather data,
and business-related data. An example for a manufacturing industry relevant KPI is energy
consumption per manufactured item.

To calculate the KPI, you must specify the input parameters, the formula that is used to calculate
the KPI from the input parameters, the measurement that is used to represent the KPI output value,
and a number for processing instructions. See the report inputs list below for details.

The KPI data calculated by the report can be stored in the Power Monitoring Expert database to be
used in applications such as Dashboards, Reports, VIP, ... .

Prerequisites

l The Energy Analysis Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Rollup

l Input Source Measurements

l KPI Source

l KPI Measurement

l KPI Measurement Override

l KPI Formula

l Save Calculated Values

l Reporting Period

l Show Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 341

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 342 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Multi Equipment Operation Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate license.

Use the Multi Equipment Operation report template to create a report that displays the time multiple
pieces of equipment spend in each state, the number of activations, and the average activation
duration.

Prerequisites

l The Energy Analysis Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs (update)

l Title

l State Measurements

l State Labels

l Reporting Period

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Include Data Table

l Show Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 343

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

Page 344 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 345

Operating Web Applications Guide

Power Usage Per State Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate license.

Use the Power Usage Per State report template to create a report that displays equipment power
data grouped by equipment state.

Prerequisites

l The Energy Analysis Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs (update)

l Title

l Logged Measurement

l State Measurement

l State Labels

l Reporting Period

l Rollup

l Aggregation Type

l Show Min/Max Timestamps

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Include Data Table

l Show Data Warnings

Page 346 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 347

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 348 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

PUE Summary Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate license.

The Power Usage Effectiveness (PUE) Summary Report is a single-page report that displays PUE
and average power consumed for a data center facility, along with average power consumed for the
IT equipment running in the facility. Additionally, two graphical trends are displayed in a dashboard
that corresponds to the facility PUE values and to the energy consumption of the facility.

Prerequisites

l The Energy Analysis Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Data Center Source

l Data Center Power Measurement

l Data Center Energy Measurement

l IT Equipment Source

l IT Equipment Power Measurement

l IT Equipment Energy Measurement

l PUE Category

l Report End Date

l Show Data Warnings

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 349

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 350 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Single Equipment Operation Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate license.

Use the Single Equipment Operation report template to create a report that displays the time a
single piece of equipment spends in each state, the number of activations, and the average
activation duration.

Prerequisites

l The Energy Analysis Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs (update)

l Title

l State Measurement

l State Labels

l Reporting Period

l Rollup

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Include Data Table

l Show Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 351

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

Page 352 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 353

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Management Reports

The Energy Management folder in the Report Library includes the following report templates:

l Calendar Trend Month Report

l Calendar Trend Week Report

l Consumption Ranking Report

l Energy Comparison Report

l Energy Cost Report

l Energy Period over Period Report

l Energy Usage Report

l Energy Usage by Shift Report

l Energy Usage by TOU Report

l Load Profile Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Page 354 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Calendar Trend Month Report

Use the Calendar Trend Month report template to provide a monthly interpretation of out-of-hours
usage, benchmark performance targets, and to identify peak and off-peak usage patterns.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Single Source – see Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurement – see Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Start Hour

l End Hour

l Highlight Start

l Highlight End

l Reporting Period

l Target Line

l Source Label

l Display Zero Days

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Show Data Warnings.

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 355

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 356 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Calendar Trend Week Report

Use the Calendar Trend Week report template to provide a weekly interpretation of out-of-hours
usage, benchmark performance targets, and to identify peak and off-peak usage patterns.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Single Source – see Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurement – see Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Start Hour

l End Hour

l Highlight Start

l Highlight End

l Reporting Period

l Target Line

l Source Label

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Show Data Warnings.

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 357

Operating Web Applications Guide

Consumption Ranking Report

Use the Consumption Ranking report template to visualize the relative ranking of energy
consumption for one or more source/measurement pairs. You can normalize the consumption data
to facilitate your comparison. This report is intended to assist you in building energy awareness
through relative visualization.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Select Sources – see Sources (Devices and Views)

l Select Measurement – see Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Multiplier

l Scale Source

l Scale Measurement

l Reporting Period

l Gauge Scale Override

l Select

l Select Number

l Custom Units Label

l Source Label

l Include Chart

l Include Gauges

l Include Tables

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Show Data Warnings.

Page 358 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 359

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Comparison Report

The Energy Comparison report allows the comparison of different load types on a particular source.
The comparison is instrumental when you perform building benchmarking. This report converts
energy to a common energy unit and can normalize energy by criteria, such as area. Results are
shown with either bar or pie charts.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Energy Measurements

l Energy Measurement Label

l Rollup

l Reporting Period

l Show Start & End Periods Only

l Chart Type

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Include Data Table

l Show Data Warnings

Example:

Page 360 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 361

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Cost Report

Use the Energy Cost report template to create a report on energy consumption and peak demand
levels over a period of time, categorized by time of use. The Energy Cost report template uses
energy and demand measurements.

With an Energy Cost Report, you can:

l Use a time of use (TOU) schedule that you define using the Time of Use Editor (see the "Time
of Use Editor" topic in the Management Console Tools section of the online Power Monitoring
Expert Help).

or

l Set a flat rate on the Energy and Demand tab of the Energy Rates dialog. See Rates report
input description for more information.

NOTE: This report is intended to be used for positive power flow applications only (where kW and
kVAR are both positive). Use with bi-directional flow gives incorrect results.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources

l Rates

l Reporting Period

l Show Data Warnings

l Source Label

Page 362 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 363

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Period over Period Report

Use the Energy Period over Period report template to create a report that compares a measurement
from multiple devices over specified time periods (for example, this week vs. the same week from
the previous month).

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources

l Measurement

l Report Period (with additional options)

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Include Aggregation Chart

l Include Stacked Aggregation Chart

l Include Interval Line Trend

l Include Interval Column Trend

l Source Label

l Include Data Table

l Show Data Warnings.

Example:

Page 364 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 365

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Usage Report

Use the Energy Usage report template to create a report highlighting discrepancies and providing a
visual interpretation of the data using the available display options.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Reporting Period

l Rollup

l Start Hour

l End Hour

l Lower Target Line

l Upper Target Line

l Source Label

l Include Column Chart

l Include Stacked Column Chart

l Include Line Chart

l Include Pie Chart

l Include 100% Area Chart

l Include Area Chart

l Include Gauges

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Show Data Warnings.

Page 366 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 367

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 368 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Energy Usage by Shift Report

Use the Energy Usage by Shift report template to create a report that compares a measurement
from multiple devices for specified time periods (or shifts). This allows you to compare energy
usage between shifts (for example, 6:00-1:00 vs. 1:00 to 8:00).

NOTE: If you generate a report before the end of a shift that spans midnight, a portion of the usage
data for that shift is included under the equivalent shift for the current day.

For example, assume:

1. You specify three 8-hour shifts:

Shift 1: 7:00 AM to 3:00 PM

Shift 2: 3:00 PM to 11:00 PM

Shift 3: 11:00 PM to 7:00 AM

Note that Shift 3 spans midnight (12:00 a.m.).

2. Your Reporting Period is Last 7 Days.

3. You generate the report on day 8 before 7:00 a.m., that is, before the end of Shift
3 for day 7.

The generated report will include usage data under Shift 3 for day 8. However, this
shift 3 usage data is that portion of shift 3 from the previous day (day 7) that occurred
after midnight.

In addition, this allocation of usage data to the next day for shift 3 from midnight to
7:00 a.m. occurs for all of the days throughout the reporting period.

To avoid this situation, select specific days (Fixed Date) for the Reporting Period.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources

l Measurement

l Reporting Period

l Rollup

l Shifts

l Show Data Warnings

l Source Label

7EN02-0409-00 Page 369

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

Page 370 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 371

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Usage by TOU Report

Use the Energy Usage by TOU report template to generate a report showing energy usage
associated with time of use schedule periods.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Reporting Period

l Rollup

l Select Time of Use

l Lower Target Line

l Upper Target Line

l Source Target Line

l Measurement Target Line

l Chart Type

l Source Label

l Include Data Tables

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Show Data Warnings.

Example:

Page 372 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 373

Operating Web Applications Guide

Load Profile Report

Use the Load Profile report template to create a graphical representation of demand or load levels
over a period of time. The profile shows peak loads as points on the graph where peak electricity
demand is high. A load trend report can be used to analyze the electrical loads at the time of
maximum demand. This information can show opportunities for developing strategies to improve
energy management.

The Load Profile report template uses similar measurements as the Energy Cost report template but
does not use a TOU schedule.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources

l Measurements

l Reporting Period

l Include Data Table

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Target Line (kW)

l Target Line (kVAr)

l Target Line (kVA)

l Source Label

l Show Data Warnings

Page 374 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 375

Operating Web Applications Guide

Energy Modeling Reports

NOTE: These reports are part of the Energy Analysis Module. This module requires a separate
license.

The Energy Analysis/Energy Modeling folder in the Report Library includes the following report
templates:

l Create Model Report

l Use Model Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Page 376 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Create Model Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate license.

This report is used to create a model of your facility or process. The model is then used in the Use
Model Report to compare expected consumption to actual consumption.

You only use the Create Model Report during configuration. After the model has been created, you
do not need to run this report again, unless you want to create a new model.

See Configuring the Energy Modeling report, in the Configuring chapter of this guide, for more
details.

Prerequisites

To use this report, the data for the independent variables and for the dependent variable must be
available in the Power Monitoring Expert database for the reporting period. If you want to use sub-
models and exception periods, then these must be defined.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Dependent Variable

l Independent Variable(s)

l Reporting Period

l Interval and Sub Model Configuration

l Use Exception Periods

l Show Detailed Results

l Save Model Configuration

Example:

See Model creation example

To calculate the models, PME uses the Accord Framework Library which can be found at:
http://accord-framework.net/index.html

7EN02-0409-00 Page 377

Operating Web Applications Guide

Use Model Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Energy Analysis Module. This Module requires a separate license.

The Use Model Report shows the expected consumption of your facility or process, based on a
model created with the Create Model Report. The report shows a graphical representation of the
modeled data, the actually measured data, and the delta between the two. It also includes tables
with numeric data.

Use this report to compare expected consumption to actual consumption in order to identify
unexpected changes in your consumption, or to identify actual savings as a result of energy
management measures.

NOTE: The report is not limited to energy consumption modeling. You can use it to model any
quantity that is dependent on drivers, for example you can model Power Factor based on power
demand.

Prerequisites

To use this report, at least one model must have been defined for your facility or process. The data
for the independent variables must be available in the Power Monitoring Expert database for the
reporting period.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Choose a Model and a Reporting Aggregation Interval

l Display Mode

l Reporting Period

l Include Measured Data

l Enter an optional coefficient in % to be applied on the modeled data

l Insert Data

Example:

Page 378 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

TIP: Move your pointer over the chart line to see tooltips with measurement details.

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

To calculate the models, PME uses the Accord Framework Library which can be found at:
http://accord-framework.net/index.html

7EN02-0409-00 Page 379

Operating Web Applications Guide

General Reports
The General folder in the Report Library includes the following report templates:

l 100 ms Report

l Dashboard Report

l Dashboard Report - Portrait

l Data Export - Extended

l Data Export - Standard

l Event History Report

l System Configuration Report

l Tabular Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Page 380 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

100 ms Report
Use the 100 ms report template to create a report of selected 100 ms measurements from
PowerLogic™ Circuit Monitors (for example, CM3000, CM4000, CM4250, and CM4000T).

The report displays timestamped values for each 100 ms measurement selected.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources

l Measurements

l Reporting Period

l Show Data Warnings

l Source Label

7EN02-0409-00 Page 381

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 382 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Dashboard Report
Use the Dashboard report template to create a report of one or more Dashboard slideshows. The
report shows a screen capture of the slideshow pages. You can include the screen capture of an
additional, custom page, by specifying the page URL.

Use this report to share dashboard and Web content in any of the supported report formats (PDF,
Excel, Tiff). This report uses a landscape page layout. For a report with a portrait layout, see
Dashboard Report - Portrait.

TIP: For best results, create separate slideshows for each dashboard page you want to report on.

Prerequisites

l A Dashboard slideshow must be configured.

Report inputs

l Title

l Page Size

l Custom Page Height

l Custom Page Width

l Slideshows

l Custom URL

l Page Wait Time in Seconds

l Show Header & Footer

l Show Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 383

Operating Web Applications Guide

Dashboard Report - Portrait

Use the Dashboard report template to create a report of one or more Dashboard slideshows. The
report shows a screen capture of the slideshow pages. You can include the screen capture of an
additional, custom page by specifying the page URL.

Use this report to share dashboard and Web content in any of the supported report formats (PDF,
Excel, Tiff). This report uses a portrait page layout. For a report with a landscape layout, see
Dashboard Report.

TIP: For best results, create separate slideshows for each dashboard page you want to report on.

Prerequisites

l A Dashboard slideshow must be configured.

Report inputs

l Title

l Page Size

l Custom Page Height

l Custom Page Width

l Slideshows

l Custom URL

l Page Wait Time in Seconds

l Show Header & Footer

l Show Data Warnings

Page 384 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Data Export - Extended

Use the Data Export - Extended report template to create a CSV file containing the data for the
selected sources and measurements. The CSV file is automatically downloaded into your
Downloads folder.

The data is organized in columns labeled Timestamp UTC, Timestamp, Value, Source,
Measurement, and Unit. This organization facilitates the creation of an Excel pivot table for
analyzing the data in the file.

The data is listed for each source and measurement by date and in the specified time segments for
the data.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Reporting Period

l Include Duplicates

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 385

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 386 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Data Export - Standard

Use the Data Export - Standard report template to create a CSV file containing the data for the
selected sources and measurements. The CSV file is automatically downloaded into your
Downloads folder.

The Data Export - Standard report exports more data to the CSV file because of the way it is
organized. For example, where it can export 600 source measurements for 11 months, the Data
Export - Extended report can export 80 source measurements for 10 months.

The data is organized by column, with column A labeled Timestamp. The remaining columns are
labeled with the source name and measurement. The data is listed by date and in the specified time
segments for the data.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Reporting Period

l Include Duplicates

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 387

Operating Web Applications Guide

Event History Report

Use the Event History report template to create a report of events or alarms that have occurred in
the system. It includes the following information for each event: timestamp; source name; event
description; and event priority.

If no event has occurred that matches the inputs entered when generating the report, no data is
returned.

Prerequisites

l None

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources

l Reporting Period

l Show Data Warnings

l Priority

l Source Label

Page 388 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 389

Operating Web Applications Guide

System Configuration Report

Use the System Configuration report template to create a report containing details about devices in
your network, including: device names and types; communications information (such as, IP
address, unit ID, protocol) for devices; sites to which devices belong; status of sites (offline or
online); and descriptions of the devices in the system (if a description was entered in Management
Console).
This report is useful to Network Administrators when checking network performance and for
planning network growth.

Prerequisites

l None

Report inputs

l Title

l Show Data Warnings.

Page 390 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 391

Operating Web Applications Guide

Tabular Report
Use the Tabular report template to create a report of data in a tabular format. You can create a report
with multiple measurements from multiple sources. You can also select the option to include
duplicate data in the report. This data can then be exported for use in another program, such as
Microsoft Excel. If you want to only export your data to an Excel file, use the Data Export -
Extended report or the Data Export - Standard report.

NOTE: The Tabular Report is limited to 30 source-measurement pairs. Multiple reports are
required if the number of source-measurement pairs exceeds 30. Alternatively, consider using the
Data Export - Standard report or the Data Export Extended report to generate a CSV file containing
the data for the selected sources and measurements.

The generated report contains the following information: source; measurement; timestamp; and
values.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Reporting Period

l Source Label

l Include Duplicates

l Show Data Warnings

Page 392 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 393

Operating Web Applications Guide

Insulation Monitoring Reports

NOTE: These reports are part of the Insulation Monitoring Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Insulation Monitoring folder in the Report Library includes the following report templates:

l Isolated Power Report (ANSI)

l Isolated Power Report (IEC)

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Page 394 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Isolated Power Report (ANSI)

NOTE: This report is part of the Insulation Monitoring Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

For each LIM-IG6 in the room, the report shows:

l Total Hazard Current graph - Displays a comparison of THC measurements to the THC limit.
The THC limit is a blue line and actual THC measurements are shown as a green line. The
report can include up to six graphs at a time, one graph per LIM-IG6.

l Events table - Shows each event, cause, timestamp, and other data for events that occurred in
the data range.

l Data log table (optional) - Contains THC measurements and other meter data in the selected
date range. Red values indicate the THC measurement was over the limit.

Prerequisites

l The Insulation Monitoring Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Operating Room

l Reporting Period

l Include Data Table

l Include Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 395

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 396 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 397

Operating Web Applications Guide

Isolated Power Report (IEC)

NOTE: This report is part of the Insulation Monitoring Module. This Module requires a separate
license.

For each IM20-H in the room, the report shows:

l Impedance graph - Displays a comparison of impedance measurements to the impedance

threshold. The impedance threshold is a blue line and actual measurements are shown as a
green line. A red line shows the time when the impedance dropped below the threshold.

l Transformer load graph - Displays a comparison of transformer load measurements to the load
threshold. The threshold is a blue line and actual measurements are shown with a green line. A
red line shows the time when the load rose above the threshold.

l Events table - Shows information for each event that occurred in the date range.

l Data log table (optional) - Contains measurements for impedance, load, and temperature in the
selected date range. Red values indicate measurements over the limit.

Prerequisites

l The Insulation Monitoring Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Operating Room

l Reporting Period

l Include Data Table

l Include Data Warnings

Page 398 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 399

Operating Web Applications Guide

IT Billing Reports

NOTE: These reports are part of the Billing Module. This module requires a separate license.

The Billing and Allocation/IT Billing folder in the Report Library includes the following report
templates:

l Energy by IT Customer Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Page 400 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Energy by IT Customer Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Billing Module. This Module requires a separate license.

The Energy by IT Customer Report provides information regarding energy usage for customers
within the data center facility. The Energy by IT Customer Report report template also allows you to
export billing system information (for CSV export) and troubleshoot the billing system.

Prerequisites

l The Billing Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Facility Name

l Facility Location

l Customers

l Reporting Period

l Report Type

l Timestamp Coincidence

l Display Billing ID

l Show Errors

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 401

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 402 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Quality Reports

The Power Quality folder in the Report Library includes the following report templates:

l EN50160:2000 Report

l EN50160:2000 Mains Signaling Report

l EN50160:2010 Report

l EN50160:2010 Mains Signaling Report

l Harmonic Compliance Report

l Harmonic Compliance 2014 Report

l IEC61000-4-30 Report

l Power Quality Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 403

Operating Web Applications Guide

EN50160:2000 Report
EN50160:2000 is a set of power quality standards used by certain energy suppliers and energy
consumers.

The EN50160:2000 report templates use the following types of data from ION7650 devices: supply
voltage dips; temporary overvoltages; supply voltage unbalance; harmonic voltage; interharmonic
voltage; frequency and magnitude; flicker; and short- and long-term interruptions.

Use the EN50160:2000 report template to create a report containing comprehensive analysis of all
EN50160 2000 compliance data logged by multiple meters. The compliance summary is based on
the EN50160 2000 limits for each observation period: each default EN50160 measurement
indicates a pass or did not pass on the compliance test with a Y (yes) or N (no) respectively.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources

l Evaluation Limits

l Reporting Period

l Include EN50160 Configuration Parameters

l Include Data Warnings

l Source Label

Page 404 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 405

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 406 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

EN50160:2000 Mains Signaling

EN50160:2000 is a set of power quality standards used by certain energy suppliers and energy
consumers.

The EN50160:2000 report templates use the following types of data from ION7650 devices: supply
voltage dips; temporary overvoltages; supply voltage unbalance; harmonic voltage; interharmonic
voltage; frequency and magnitude; flicker; and short- and long-term interruptions.

Use the EN50160:2000 Mains Signaling report template to create a report for signal line frequency
statistics for multiple sources, for each observation period.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Sources

l Signaling Voltage

l Reporting Period

l Show Data Warnings

l Source Label

7EN02-0409-00 Page 407

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 408 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

EN50160:2010 Report
EN50160:2010 is a set of power quality standards, published in 2010, used by certain energy
suppliers and energy consumers.

The EN50160:2010 report templates use the following types of data from ION8650 and PM8000
devices: supply voltage dips; temporary overvoltages; supply voltage unbalance; harmonic voltage;
interharmonic voltage; frequency and magnitude; flicker; and short- and long-term interruptions.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Prerequisites

The following firmware versions are required:

Device Firmware version

8650A_FAC_V4.2.0.0.1
ION8650 8650B_FAC_V4.2.0.0.1
8650C_FAC_V4.2.0.0.1
8000_FAC-PQ_V1.1.0.0.0
PM8000
8000_FAC_V1.1.0.0.0

Use the EN50160:2010 report template to create a report containing comprehensive analysis of all
EN50160 2010 compliance data logged by multiple meters. The compliance summary is based on
the EN50160 2010 limits for each observation period: each default EN50160 measurement
indicates a pass or did not pass on the compliance test with a Y (yes) or N (no) respectively.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources

l Evaluation Limits

l Reporting Period

l Include EN50160 Configuration Parameters

l Include Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 409

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 410 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

EN50160:2010 Mains Signaling

EN50160:2010 is a set of power quality standards, published in 2010, used by certain energy
suppliers and energy consumers.

The EN50160:2010 report templates use the following types of data from ION8650 and PM8000
devices: supply voltage dips; temporary overvoltages; supply voltage unbalance; harmonic voltage;
interharmonic voltage; frequency and magnitude; flicker; and short- and long-term interruptions.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Prerequisites

The following firmware versions are required:

Device Firmware version

8650A_FAC_V4.2.0.0.1
ION8650 8650B_FAC_V4.2.0.0.1
8650C_FAC_V4.2.0.0.1
8000_FAC-PQ_V1.1.0.0.0
PM8000
8000_FAC_V1.1.0.0.0

Use the EN50160:2010 Mains Signaling report template to create a report for signal line frequency
statistics for multiple sources, for each observation period.

Report inputs:

l Title

l Sources

l Signaling Voltage

l Reporting Period

l Show Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 411

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 412 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Harmonic Compliance Report

Use the Harmonic Compliance report template to generate a report showing an analysis of the
harmonic compliance of selected sources based on the IEEE 519-1992 reference limits. Consult
IEEE 519-1992 standards documentation for details about harmonic limits.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources (Devices and Views)

l Reporting Period

l Comments

l Include THD/TDD Charts

l Include Average Harmonic Charts

l Include Harmonic Detail Charts

l Lock Chart Scales at Zero

l Show Data Warnings

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 413

Operating Web Applications Guide

Page 414 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

7EN02-0409-00 Page 415

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 416 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Harmonic Compliance 2014 Report

Use the Harmonic Compliance report template to generate a report showing an analysis of the
harmonic compliance of selected sources based on the IEEE 519-2014 reference limits. Consult
IEEE 519-2014 standards documentation for details about harmonic limits.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources (Devices and Views)

l Reporting Period

l Comments

l Include THD/TDD Charts

l Include Average Harmonic Charts

l Include Harmonic Detail Charts

l Lock Chart Scales at Zero

l Show Data Warnings

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 417

Operating Web Applications Guide

Page 418 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

7EN02-0409-00 Page 419

Operating Web Applications Guide

Page 420 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 421

Operating Web Applications Guide

IEC61000-4-30 Report
Use the IEC61000-4-30 report template to create a report on IEC61000-4-30 compliance information
by observation period (a 3 second, 10 minute, or 2 hour measurement interval) for one or more
sources.
The IEC61000-4-30 report template provides the following types of information: voltage profile; THD
profile; unbalance profile; flicker profile; frequency profile; and summary table.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources

l Measurement Interval

l Voltage Nominal [V]

l Frequency Nominal [Hz]

l Voltage Baseline [%]

l THD Baseline [%]

l Frequency Baseline [%]

l Unbalance Baseline [%]

l Flicker Baseline - High

l Flicker Baseline - Low

l Reporting Period

l Source Label

l Show Data Warnings

Page 422 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 423

Operating Web Applications Guide

Page 424 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

7EN02-0409-00 Page 425

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 426 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Quality Report

Use the Power Quality report templateto create a report that summarizes the number and severity of
voltage sags, swells, and transients over a period of time. The generated report includes a graphical
representation of these disturbances plotted against one or more power quality curves, such as
CBEMA (1996), CBEMA (Updated), ITIC, or SEMI F47 curves.

The Power Quality report aggregates historical power quality data into power quality incidents:

l An incident is a summary, or aggregated event, which represents a number of individual dis-

turbances (sags, swells, or transients) that occurred across an electrical network in a small win-
dow of time.

l A disturbance refers to a sag, swell, or transient event in the Event Log.

This report also displays waveform plots as well as RMS plots associated with a single incident, or
all waveforms associated with their respective incidents.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources

l Incident Interval

l Reporting Period

l Source Label

l CBEMA (1996), CBEMA (Updated), ITIC, SEMI F47 curves

l Y-Axis Max Value (% Nominal)

l Sub-reports

l Show Data Warnings

Additional information about incident details and waveform details.

Incident details:

When you use the Generate Dynamically sub-reports option, you can view details of an incident by
clicking the link in the TimeStamp column in the table.
Detailed information about a single power quality incident is displayed, including:

l A CBEMA (1996), CBEMA (Updated), ITIC, or SEMI F47 curve containing the power quality dis-
turbances for the selected incident. (The curve used in the plot is dependent on the overlay
options you select for the report.)

l The timestamps, types, phases, duration, and magnitude of disturbances in the selected incid-
ent, with the worst event in the selected incident highlighted (worst event = largest magnitude x
duration).

7EN02-0409-00 Page 427

Operating Web Applications Guide

l The power quality settings of the device that registered the disturbance (for example, sag/swell
limits, transient threshold, and so on).

To return to the summary report, use the report section back button on the report toolbar.

Waveform details:

When you use the Generate Dynamically sub-reports option, you can view the waveform details of
an incident by clicking the waveform icon in the incident details table in the Incident sub report.

The waveform details present all of the waveforms that were recorded for a disturbance. It displays
a waveform chart along with an optional table with waveform values.
The following waveform plots and data are displayed, based on the timestamp selected:

l A summary waveform plot, displaying a plot of the V1, V2 and V3 waveforms.

l An individual waveform plot for each of:

V1 and I1

V2 and I2

V3 and I3

l If the source queried has digital input logging enabled over the time interval of the waveforms, a
waveform showing the digital input status.

l The timestamp for the time the waveforms were triggered.

l The sampling frequency of the waveforms.

To return to the summary report, use the report section back button on the report toolbar.

Example:

Page 428 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

7EN02-0409-00 Page 429

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 430 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Quality Performance Reports

NOTE: These reports are part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This module requires a
separate license.

The Power Quality Performance folder in the Report Library includes the following report
templates:

l Power Quality Analysis Report

l Power Quality Impact Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 431

Operating Web Applications Guide

Power Quality Analysis Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This report summarizes power quality events and disturbances occurring in a production
environment. The events include voltage transients, sags, swells, and interruptions, as well as over
voltage and under voltage events. Disturbances are related to harmonics, unbalances, flicker, and
frequency variation. The report also includes a power factor status. An understanding of these
events and disturbances can help you determine actions to take to reduce production downtime and
to increase equipment lifetime and reliability.

Depending on the events and disturbances you select, the generated report provides data
categorized as follows:

l Power Quality Event Summary, consisting of Power Quality Events Breakdown, Power Qual-
ity Events Impact, and Power Quality Events Location.
Power Quality Events Breakdown shows the percent distribution of the events in a pie
chart.

Power Quality Events Impact shows a percent distribution of the events with a likely
impact and no impact in a pie chart.

Power Quality Events Location shows the distribution of the number of events in a bar chart
with likely impact and no impact identified for each of the External, Internal, and
Undetermined locations.

l Power Quality Events — Details, consisting of events impact and events location for each
detected event. and Disturbance Details for each detected disturbance.
Events Impact shows the number of each event type with a likely impact and no impact.

Events Location provides a distribution of the number of each event with a likely impact and
no impact in External, Internal, and Undetermined locations.

l Power Quality Disturbances — Details, consisting of a graphical representation of the dis-

tribution for each disturbance followed by a data table containing measurement and value
details.

l Power Factor — Details, consisting of additional information on power quality disturbances.

The logged data represented in a trend chart is for each Incomer or main meter defined in the
PowerQualityGroups.csv file. The table below the chart shows Active and Reactive energy
data grouped by each power source meter. The red target line in the chart is set to 92 by default
on the report template page.

See Power Quality Performance events and disturbances for additional information.

Prerequisites

l The Power Quality Performance Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Page 432 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Related

l Power Quality Impact Report – provides an estimated impact of production downtime.

l Power Quality Events Breakdown, Power Quality Events Impact, and Power Quality Events
Location gadgets – provide a graphical representation of power quality events.

Report inputs

l Title

l Reporting Period

l Include Events and Disturbances in the Detail Section

l Power Factor Target

l Include Non Impacting Events

l Include Data Tables in the Detail Section

l Include Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 433

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

Page 434 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

7EN02-0409-00 Page 435

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 436 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Power Quality Impact Report

NOTE: This report is part of the Power Quality Performance Module. This Module requires a
separate license.

This report indicates impact from downtime that occurred for a power quality group and provides an
estimated cost associated for a given period of time that is calculated using the rate defined in the
Power Quality Group configuration file. It also provides information about power quality events that
might be the cause of the downtime, and indicates whether they occurred internally, externally, or
are from an undetermined location.

Prerequisites

l The Power Quality Performance Module must be configured.

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Related

l Power Quality Impact gadget – provides a graphical representation of external. internal, and
undetermined power quality events.

l Power Quality Analysis Report– provides summarizes power quality events and disturbances
occurring in a production environment.

Report inputs

l Title

l Group

l Reporting Period

l Event Location

l Include Undetermined Events

l Include Data Warnings

7EN02-0409-00 Page 437

Operating Web Applications Guide

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 438 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Usage Trending Reports

The Usage Trending folder in the Report Library includes the following report templates:

l Hourly Usage Report

l Multi Device Usage Report

l Multiple Trend Report

l Single Device Usage Report

l Trend Report

CAUTION
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 439

Operating Web Applications Guide

Hourly Usage Report

Use the Hourly Usage report template to create a tabular report to display usage of various types of
quantities (such as consumption of Water, Natural Gas, and so on) per hour for a specific day.

A single report might contain consumption figures for different types of measurements from more
than one source.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Reporting Period

l Target Line

l Source Label

l Include Data Table

l Include Chart

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Show Data Warnings.

Page 440 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 441

Operating Web Applications Guide

Multi Device Usage Report

Use the Multi Device Usage report template to view consumption information for multiple devices.
View energy usage for a single period, or compare two periods, for example, this month versus last
month.

NOTE: The measurements that you select for the devices need to provide equivalent data results.
For example:

l Correct:

Real Energy selected for MeterA

Real Energy into the Load selected for MeterB

l Incorrect:

Real Energy selected for MeterA

Reactive Energy selected for MeterA

The report provides a summary of consumption by one or more sources, an interval usage table, and
a pie chart.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Rollup

l Reporting Period

l Show Start & End Periods Only

l Source Label

l Chart Type

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Include Data Table

l Show Data Warnings

Page 442 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 443

Operating Web Applications Guide

Multiple Trend Report

Use the Multiple Trend report template to create a report showing multiple measurements plotted on
separate axes.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Left and Right Axis Sources – see Sources (Devices and Views)

l Left and Right Axis Measurements – see Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Left Axis High Target Line and Right Axis High Target Line

l Left Axis High Target Name and Right Axis High Target Name

l Left Axis Low Target Line and Right Axis Low Target Line

l Left Axis Low Target Name and Right Axis Low Target Name

l Reporting Period

l Chart Type

l Source Label

l Include Data Table

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Show Data Warnings

Example:

Page 444 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 445

Operating Web Applications Guide

Single Device Usage Report

Use the Single Device Usage report template to view energy information for one device. View
energy usage for a single period, or compare two periods, for example, this month versus last
month.

The report provides a summary of the various usage periods, an interval usage table, and a
graphical comparison of the various usage periods.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Single Source – see Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Rollup

l Reporting Period

l Source Label

l Show Start & End Periods Only

l Align Day of Week for Months

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Show Data Warnings

Page 446 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 447

Operating Web Applications Guide

Trend Report
Use the Trend report template to create a report that displays trend information in a line, column,
bar, or pie chart. You select devices and measurements for a selected period of time.

NOTE: The Trend Report is limited to 30 source-measurement pairs. Multiple reports are required
if the number of source-measurement pairs exceeds 30.

NOTE: The Trend Report was upgraded in Power Monitoring Expert 7.2.1 to include two new
parameters: Include Data Table and Include Duplicates. Trend Reports with subscriptions
created prior to version 7.2.1 need to be updated and saved with the new parameters.

l Open each saved Trend Report. The new parameters are visible in the display pane.

l Keep or change the default selections for the parameters.

l Save the updated report to overwrite the existing version.

This ensures that subscriptions for Trend Reports continue to function.

Prerequisites

l The measurement data must be available as historical data logs in the database.

Report inputs

l Title

l Sources (Devices and Views)

l Measurements (with Smart Mode)

l Chart Type

l Reporting Period

l Source Label

l Target Line

l Auto-scale Y-Axis

l Include Data Table

l Include Duplicates

l Show Data Warnings.

Page 448 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Example:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 449

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: This example only shows selected pages from the report, it does not show the entire
report.

Page 450 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

Trends operation

WARNING
INACCURATE DATA RESULTS
• Do not incorrectly configure the software or the devices.
• Do not base your maintenance or service actions solely on messages and information
displayed by the software.
• Do not rely solely on software messages and reports to determine if the system is functioning
correctly or meeting all applicable standards and requirements.
• Consider the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of communications
links.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

Use the Trends application to monitor current system conditions by displaying real-time data in a
graphical format. You can configure trends to view historical data, or you can combine real-time data
and historical data in the same trend. In addition, you can save the trend data as a csv file.

A Title B Upper threshold C Lower threshold

D Target line E Left axis F Scale ( from View setting)
G Right axis H Axis title I Trend options
J Legend K Close/open toggle

TIP: You can open the Trends application from the TRENDS link in the Web Applications banner.

Time display
See Time display in Web Applications for information on how time is displayed in a system where
the monitoring devices, the PME/Web server, and the Web client (browser) are located in different
time zones.

For information on how use the Trends application, see The Trends user interface.

For information on how to configure Trends, see Trends configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 451

Operating Web Applications Guide

Web Applications
The Web Applications component provides access to the following applications through links in the
banner: Dashboards, Diagrams, Trends, Alarms, and Reports. Use the Settings link on the banner
to access other applications and tools.

Open Web Applications from the EcoStruxure Power Monitoring Expert folder on your desktop, the
Schneider Electric folder on the Start Screen, or by entering the PME server URL into your browser
Address bar, e.g. http://srv1.MyCompany.com/Web

When you open Web Applications, you are prompted to log in with your username and password.

NOTE: For cybersecurity reasons, we recommend that you access Web Applications only from
client computers and not from the Power Monitoring Expert (PME) server.

The access level assigned to your username determines which applications and which functions
within those applications are available to you. See User access levels and permissions for details.

Web Applications user interface

The top right of the banner contains:

l Your user name: The user name you used to log in.

l Logout link: Logs you out of Web Applications and returns you to the log in page.

l Help link: Opens the browser-based online help for the Web Applications component and the
integrated applications.

Alarm Annunciator
The Alarm Annunciator shows information on the number of active and unacknowledged Alarms. It
is displayed in the banner area of the Web Applications and is visible from any of the PME Web
apps. The Annunciator alerts you to any new alarms that are occurring in the system. You can
configure it to play a sound when certain alarm conditions are met.

When you click on one of the priority colored areas in the Annunciator, from anywhere in Web
Applications, it opens the Alarm Viewer and automatically filters the view to show all alarms with
that particular priority. You can customize the behavior of the Annunciator, including the alarm
sound, on the Web Applications Settings page.

The Annunciator looks like this:

In this example, the Annunciator shows:

l 1 low priority, active and unacknowledged Alarm (blue)

l 8 medium priority, active and unacknowledged Alarms (yellow)

l 10 high priority, active and unacknowledged Alarms (red)

The presence of the speaker icon indicates that it is configured to play a sound when new active and
unacknowledged alarms occur. Click the speaker icon to mute or unmute the alarm sound.

Page 452 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Operating

NOTE: You must have controller, operator, or supervisor-level access to see the Annunciator. If
you have observer or user-level access, it is not displayed.

Library pane
The library pane contains items and configuration options for the selected application. To show or
hide the library pane, click the bar on the right or left side of the display area.

Display pane
The display pane loads the data visualization selected in the configuration pane.

Specifying which application to open first

When you connect to Web Applications through a client computer, the application whose link is on
the left of the series of application links opens in the browser. To specify a different application to
open first, add one of the following application query parameters into the Web address.

/#Dashboards /#Alarms
/#Diagrams /#Reports
/#Trends

For example, http://srv1.MyCompany.com/Web/#Trends opens the Trends application in

the browser.

Time display in Web Applications

Most of the information displayed in the Web Applications is time based, such as timestamped real-
time data and historical data. In a PME system there are 3 reference points for time zones: the
monitoring devices/sources, the PME/Web server, the Web client (browser).

PME supports configurations where the devices/sources, the server, and the client are located in
different time zones. For example, a user in time zone A accesses the PME/Web server which is
located in time zone B. The monitoring devices that are providing the data are located in time zone
C.

The following table shows how the different Web Applications display time with regards to time
zone:

Web Application Time Zone Used for Display

Dashboards Device/source time zone as configured in Management Console.
Diagrams Device/source time zone as configured in Management Console.
Trends Web client (browser) time zone as configured in the client browser.
Alarms Device/source time zone as configured in Management Console.*
Time zone can be manually selected. Default is Web client (browser)
Reports
time zone.

* Alarms has tooltips that show the time in both the device/source time zone, and the Web client
(browser) time zone.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 453

Operating Web Applications Guide

NOTE: Web Applications uses Management Console time zone settings for the device/source
time zone. The time zone settings in Management Console are set per device and must be
configured correctly, for Web Applications to show the correct time. The time zone settings in
Management Console are independent of time zone settings on the devices themselves. Web
Applications does not use the time zone settings on the devices themselves.

Page 454 7EN02-0409-00

Troubleshooting
This chapter provides information to help you diagnose and repair unexpected behavior in Power
Monitoring Expert (PME) Web Applications. Contact technical support if you cannot fix the problem
or if the issues you are seeing are not described in this chapter.

The chapter is organized by applications.

l Dashboards troubleshooting

l Diagrams troubleshooting

l Reports troubleshooting

7EN02-0409-00 Page455
Troubleshooting Web Applications Guide

Dashboards troubleshooting
This section contains troubleshooting information related to Dashboards.

Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Where is my measurement?

Page 456 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Troubleshooting

Where is my measurement?
If you do not see a measurement that you expect in the data series list, it is probably due to one of
the following:

l The measurement is not logged. By default, only logged measurements are available in the data
series list. To view newly added measurements, clear the checkbox Display only Meas-
urements with historical data.

l The measurement is filtered out of the current list. Select from one of the options in the Show
drop-down list:
All displays all available measurements for the selected type.

Common displays a list of the most commonly used measurements.

l The measurement is not available for the type selected in the Type drop-down list. Select a dif-
ferent type from the Type drop-down list.

l The measurement is a custom measurement for which the metadata is not set up. The
metadata defines the measurement type, as well as how a measurement is presented in the
Type and Show drop-down lists. The standard measurements supplied in the software have
their metadata already defined. However, metadata for an application-specific custom meas-
urement must also be defined in order for the software to know how to use it.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 457

Troubleshooting Web Applications Guide

Diagrams troubleshooting
This section contains troubleshooting information related to Diagrams.
Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Diagrams Services
Page cannot be displayed
Tick labels for gauges are unreadable
No real-time data is displayed
Unable to access the Diagrams application

Page 458 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Troubleshooting

Diagrams Services
Diagrams depends on the ION XML Subscription Service and ION XML Subscription Store Service
to function properly. If you are experiencing difficulties with Diagrams pages (such as getting an
error message when you try to open a device diagram), check to make sure these services are
running.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 459

Troubleshooting Web Applications Guide

Page cannot be displayed

This might be caused by complex or large queries, such that the results do not arrive within the
default Diagrams timeout setting of 60 seconds. If you suspect this is the case, add the custom
DWORD registry key QueryTimeout and set it to a higher timeout value (for example, to 120 for
120 seconds).

Page 460 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Troubleshooting

Tick labels for gauges are unreadable

This may occur if you specify an unsupported font for the Ticks Label Font. To fix this, select only
TrueType or OpenType fonts in Vista.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 461

Troubleshooting Web Applications Guide

No real-time data is displayed

This may be caused by security settings being reset by a Microsoft Windows update on the server.
If this is the case, open Internet Explorer on the server, select Tools > Internet Options, then click
the Security tab. Click the Trusted sites icon, then click Sites. Add the Web Applications site in
the form of http://domain_name/Web to the Trusted sites zone. For example, for server name
srv1 and company name MyCompany, add the Web site as:
http://srv1.Mycompany.com/Web

Page 462 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Troubleshooting

Unable to access the Diagrams application

If you cannot access the Diagrams application, the product may have been installed on the server
with a different virtual root than the default of Web. For example, the default address is
http://domain_name/Web, where domain_name is the Internet address of the server hosting the
Diagrams application. Contact your system administrator for the full address.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 463

Troubleshooting Web Applications Guide

Reports troubleshooting
This section contains troubleshooting information related to Reports.

Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Subscription errors and solutions

Page 464 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Troubleshooting

Subscription errors and solutions

Messages can occur when you create or work with report subscriptions.
The following table summarizes the messages, indicates when they can occur, their cause, and
suggested solutions.

Message Occurs Cause Solution

To add a subscription, a
report must have all of its
parameters defined. No reports have all Save at least one report with
At creation time.
There are no fully defined parameters defined. all of its parameters defined.
reports available for
subscription.
On the Primary Server, click
The SQL Server Start > Settings > Control
At creation time, Agent (ION) service Panel. Select Administrative
SQL Agent service not
on delivery, or is not running. Tools, then select Services.
started
when tested. Subscriptions Right-click the SQL Server
cannot be delivered. Agent (ION) service and
select Start.
On the Primary Server, click
The ION Report
Start > Settings > Control
Subscription
At creation time, Panel. Select Administrative
Report Subscription Service is not
on delivery, or Tools, then select Services.
Service not started running.
when tested. Right-click the ION Report
Subscriptions
Subscription Service and
cannot be delivered.
select Start.
On the Primary Server, open
the Reports Configuration
The email “from”
dialog in Management
At creation time, address is either not
“From” email address Console (Tools > Reports
on delivery, or set or has an
incorrectly configured Configuration). Enter a
when tested. incorrect
valid email address. For
configuration.
example,
[email protected].
All selected users,
or all users within a
On delivery or Provide email addresses for
No email recipients selected group, do
when tested. the selected users.
not have email
addresses defined.
Selected users, or
groups containing
Missing user email On delivery or Provide email addresses for
users, do not have
address when tested. the selected users.
email addresses
defined.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 465

Troubleshooting Web Applications Guide

Message Occurs Cause Solution

Grant write permissions to
Usually due to the IONUser Windows User
Error delivering to file On delivery or permissions or an Account.
share when tested. incorrectly specified
path. Check that the path is
correct.
Email address is
Provide a correctly formatted
Invalid email address At creation time. incorrectly
email address.
formatted.
The file share Enter a valid UNC (Universal
Path syntax invalid At creation time. pathname entered Naming Convention)
is not correct. pathname.

Page 466 7EN02-0409-00

Reference
This chapter contains reference information related to configuring and using Power Monitoring
Expert (PME) Web Applications. This information is referenced in the other chapters of this guide.
Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Configuration references
Operation references

7EN02-0409-00 Page467
Reference Web Applications Guide

Configuration references
This section contains reference information related to the content in the Configuring chapter of this
guide.
Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Topic Reference Links

Alarm Configuration UI
Alarm Configuration Add Alarm Rule UI
Schedules Configuration UI
Styling a dashboard
Dashboards
Configuring Gadgets
Reports UPS Battery Health Report calculations
Trends Configuring a trend
User Manager user interface
User Manager
User access levels and permissions

Page 468 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Alarm Configuration references

This section contains reference information related to Alarm Configuration.
Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Alarm Configuration UI
Add Alarm Rule UI
Schedules Configuration UI

7EN02-0409-00 Page 469

Reference Web Applications Guide

Alarm Configuration UI
Main UI and Alarm Rules tab

Main UI

Selection tabs
1
Select a tab to see information related to Alarm Rules, Schedules, or Source View.
Help
2
Click Help to open the Alarm Configuration online help.
Number of displayed items
7
Shows the number of items visible on this page, and the total number in this View.
Page selector
8 Use the page selector to navigate between pages. Set the number of items that are displayed
on a page.

Alarm Rules tab

Add Alarm Rule

3
Use Add Alarm Rule to create a new Alarm Rule.
Alarm Rules table
4
The Alarm Rules table shows all the Alarm Rules that are configured in the system.
Enable Alarm Rule
Each Alarm Rule can be enabled or disabled separately. The Enable Alarm Rule slider shows
5
the enable state of the Alarm Rules. Click the slider for an Alarm Rule to enable or disable this
Rule.
Alarm Rules options
6
Use Alarm Rules options to duplicate, edit, or delete Alarm Rules.

Page 470 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Schedules UI

Add Schedule
1
Use Add Schedule to create a new Schedule.
Schedules table
2
The Schedules table shows all the Schedules that are configured in the system.
Schedules options
3
Use Schedules options to duplicate, edit, or delete Schedules.

Source View UI

Source View Alarm Rules table

1 The table shows an alternate view of the Alarm Rules. Use this view to see which Alarms are
configured for which sources.
Show Alarm Rule
2 When you click Show Alarm Rule for a row in the Source View table, the Alarm Rules tab
opens with the specific Alarm Rule highlighted.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 471

Reference Web Applications Guide

Add Alarm Rule UI

Alarm Templates

Alarm Template groups

1
The available Alarm Templates are grouped by application.
Alarm Template list
2
A list of Alarm Templates that are available in the selected group.

Page 472 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Measurement Selection UI

Measurement Selection with recommended measurements

Measurement Selection without recommended measurements

7EN02-0409-00 Page 473

Reference Web Applications Guide

Alarm Rule Details UI

Real-time Alarms UI

(The above is one example of a Real-time Alarm. The configuration options may vary for other Real-
time Alarms.)

Alarm Name
1 The Alarm Name is the identifier for the Alarm in the system. It is used by as a reference by
other applications.
Input Evaluation
2 The Input Evaluation setting determines how often the Alarm evaluates the input measurement
value.
Active Condition
3
The Active Condition settings determine when the Alarm goes into an Active state.
Inactive Condition
4
The Inactive Condition settings determine when the Alarm goes into an Inactive state.
Advanced Settings
5 The Advanced Settings determine which priority value is assigned to the Alarm and if the
extreme measurement value that occurs during the Alarm active state is logged.

Page 474 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Logged Data Alarms UI (Fixed Setpoint)

(The above is one example of a fixed setpoint logged data Alarm. The configuration options may
vary for other fixed setpoint logged data Alarms)

Alarm Name
1 The Alarm Name is the identifier for the Alarm in the system. It is used by as a reference by
other applications.
Input Evaluation
The Input Evaluation setting determines how the Alarm evaluates the input measurement
value. The following options are available:

1 minute
5 minutes
In this configuration, the Alarm evaluates the logged
10 minutes
Datalog measurement value as it was logged at the specified
15 minutes
2 time intervals.
30 minutes
1hr
In this configuration, the Alarm evaluates the logged
measurements as rolled up values. The interval is
Hourly either Hourly or Daily. The roll up method is defined
Aggregated
Daily by the measurement type. For example, energy
measurements are accumulated and demand
measurements are averaged.
Active Condition
3
The Active Condition settings determine when the Alarm goes into an Active state.
Inactive Condition
4
The Inactive Condition settings determine when the Alarm goes into an Inactive state.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 475

Reference Web Applications Guide

Advanced Settings
5 The Advanced Settings determine which priority value is assigned to the Alarm and if the
extreme measurement value that occurs during the Alarm active state is logged.

Logged Data Alarms UI (Smart Setpoint)

(The above is one example of a smart setpoint logged data Alarm. The configuration options may
vary for other smart setpoint logged data Alarms)

Alarm Name
1 The Alarm Name is the identifier for the Alarm in the system. It is used by as a reference by
other applications.
Active Condition
2
The Active Condition settings determine when the Alarm goes into an Active state.
Inactive Condition
3
The Inactive Condition settings determine when the Alarm goes into an Inactive state.
Advanced Settings
4 The Advanced Settings determine which priority value is assigned to the Alarm and if the
extreme measurement value that occurs during the Alarm active state is logged.

Page 476 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Smart Setpoint

A Smart Setpoint evaluates the input measurement against statistical and historical behavior of
that same input measurement. The following pre-defined settings are available:

Highest Value in last 30 days Abnormally High Value

Lowest Value in last 30 Days Abnormally Low Value
Highest Value in last Year Abnormally High Value for similar time of day
Daily Value above 50% of Average Abnormally High Value for the day of week

You can also define a custom rule for evaluating the input based on the options provided in the
Smart Setpoint configuration window.

Schedule Selection UI

7EN02-0409-00 Page 477

Reference Web Applications Guide

Schedule Selector
1 Select which Schedule you want to use for this Alarm Rule. Using a Schedule is optional.
Select None if you don't want to use a Schedule.
Schedule Options
2
Use these options to edit a selected Schedule or to Add a new Schedule.

Summary UI

Enable Alarm Rule

1 The Enable Alarm Rule slider shows the enable state of the Alarm Rule. Click the slider to
enable or disable this Rule.
Alarm Status Measurement Mappings
By default, real-time Alarm Status measurements are disabled, which means that information
about the state of the Alarm is only available through the Alarms application. Enable real-time
2 Alarm Status measurements if you want to access Alarm state information in Diagrams,
Trends, or other real-time applications in PME.

NOTE: These status measurements are not currently available in the VIP/Designer.

Page 478 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Schedules Configuration UI

Schedule Name
1
Provide a name for the schedule.
Schedule Preview
2
The graphic shows the time periods for which the schedule will be active and inactive.
Schedule Configuration
Add rows to define the Start Times, End Times, and days of the week when the schedule is
3
active.
Define if the schedule enables or disables the function that is controlled by it.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 479

Reference Web Applications Guide

Dashboards references
This section contains reference information related to configuring Dashboards.
Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Styling a dashboard
Configuring Gadgets

Page 480 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Styling a dashboard
To add an image to a dashboard, change its background color, or modify the opacity setting for
gadgets on the dashboard:

1. Click Styling to open the Dashboard Styling dialog.

2. To use an image for the background of the dashboard:

a. Under Background Image, click Select... to open the Image Library.

b. Select an image in the Image Library and click OK.

You can add your own image to the Image Library by clicking Upload Image... to open
the Upload New Files dialog. Then either drag an image file to the area indicated in the
dialog, or click Choose Files... and navigate to an image on your system. Click Finish to
add the image to the Image Library and then click OK after you select the image for the
background.

c. Choose how you want the image to fit from the drop-down list.

3. To use a background color for the dashboard:

a. Select Background Color to enable the color palette.

b. Click the down arrow to open the palette and select a predefined color or click the color
gradient to select a color.

4. To change the opacity setting for the gadgets on the dashboard:

a. Select one of the opacity percentages in the list under Gadget Style.

An opacity setting of 100% indicates that the gadget is not transparent – the background
color or image is not visible through the gadget. A setting of less than 100% results in the
gadget being partially transparent – the background color or image is partially visible in the
gadget.

5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply the settings.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 481

Reference Web Applications Guide

Configuring Gadgets
The following table shows the different gadget types that are available in Power Monitoring Expert
(PME). Some of the gadgets are included in the base license, others require additional licensing.

Gadget Type Category Data Type Licensing

Bar Chart Comparison Historical Base License
Energy
Comparison Historical Base License
Equivalency
Table Comparison Real-time Base License
Pie Chart Comparison Historical Base License
Period over Period Trend over Time Historical Base License
Trend Chart Trend over Time Historical Base License
Web Viewer Web Historical Base License
Energy Usage
Sankey Usage Analysis Historical Gadget Pack
License
Energy Usage
Pareto Chart Usage Analysis Historical Gadget Pack
License
Energy Usage
Aggregated Pareto
Usage Analysis Historical Gadget Pack
Chart
License
Energy Usage
Heat Map Usage Analysis Historical Gadget Pack
License
Energy Usage
Consumption
Usage Analysis Historical Gadget Pack
Ranking
License
Aggregated Energy Usage
Consumption Usage Analysis Historical Gadget Pack
Ranking License
Blank Space * Layout n/a Base License
Power Quality
PQ Performance
Incident Power Quality Details Historical
Module License
Breakdown
Power Quality PQ Performance
Power Quality Details Historical
Incident Impact Module License
Power Quality PQ Performance
Power Quality Details Historical
Incident Location Module License

Page 482 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Power Factor PQ Performance

Power Quality Overview Historical
Impact Module License
Power Factor PQ Performance
Power Quality Overview Historical
Impact Trend Module License
Power Quality PQ Performance
Power Quality Overview Historical
Impact Module License
Power Quality PQ Performance
Power Quality Overview Historical
Impact Trend Module License
Power Quality PQ Performance
Power Quality Overview Historical
Rating Module License
Power Quality PQ Performance
Power Quality Overview Historical
Rating Trend Module License

* The Blank Space gadget does not display any data and requires no configuration. The Blank
Space gadget is only visible during the dashboard Edit. By sizing and positioning this blank gadget,
you can change the location of the other gadgets to get the layout you want.

Prerequisites
For information on the functionality of the different gadget types, see Gadgets. For information on
licensing, contact your Schneider Electric representative.

There is also a Blank Space gadget in PME. This gadget does not display any data and requires no
configuration. The Blank Space gadget is only visible during the dashboard Edit. By sizing and
positioning this blank gadget, you can change the location of the other gadgets to get the layout you
want.

Prerequisites
The data for the gadgets must be available. Gadgets that depend on historical data need the correct
logged data in the database. Gadgets that depend on real-time data need the devices that provide
the data to be online and communicating.

The power quality gadgets are part of the Power Quality Performance module. Before you can use
these gadgets in a dashboard, you must first configure the Power Quality Performance module.
The following table shows the configuration that is required before you can use a particular power
quality gadget type:

Gadget Type Requirements

A rate must be defined in the Power Factor
Power Factor Impact Impact Rate file.
Power Factor Impact Trend A hierarchy view or a virtual meter must be
configured.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 483

Reference Web Applications Guide

Gadget Type Requirements

Power Quality Incident Breakdown

Power Quality Incident Impact Which devices to include/exclude for each
Power Quality Incident Location type of power quality event must be
Power Quality Rating configured.
Power Quality Rating Trend

An hourly rate for use in your production

Power Quality Impact
environment must be included in the Power
Power Quality Impact Trend
Quality Group configuration file.

Configuring
The Gadget Setup dialog opens each time you select a gadget to add to a dashboard. The dialog
leads you through a series of gadget configuration pages. The pages and the options are specific to
each gadget. For example, some gadgets require a data series consisting of sources and
measurements, while other gadgets have no such requirement. The exception is the Blank Space
gadget, which does not require any configuration. Its purpose is to help you position gadgets on the
dashboard by inserting a resizable transparent blank area.

Note that each page of the Gadget Setup dialog is represented by labeled tabs when you edit the
settings for an existing gadget. (See Editing a gadget for more information.)

The following tables indicates the gadget configuration pages that apply to each gadget, where "Y"
indicates that the page applies to that gadget, and "-" indicates that the page is not applicable.

Gadget Configuration Pages

Gadget
General Data Viewing
Name Content Equivalency Image
Settings Series Period
Bar Chart Y - - - - Y
Energy
Y - Y Y Y Y
Equivalency
Pie Chart Y - Y - - Y
Web Viewer Y Y - - - -

General
Measurements Sources Table Settings
Settings
Table Y Y Y Y

General Data Viewing Target

Axes
Settings Series Period Lines
Period over
Y Y Y Y Y
Period
Trend Chart Y Y Y Y Y

Page 484 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Pareto
General Data Viewing Sankey
Chart
Settings Series Period Chart Setup
Setup
Sankey Y Y Y Y -
Pareto Chart Y Y Y - Y
Aggregated
Y Y Y - Y
Pareto Chart

Heat Consumption
General Data Viewing
Map Ranking
Settings Series Period
Setup Setup
Heat Map Y Y Y Y -
Consumption Ranking Y Y Y - Y
Aggregated
Y Y Y - Y
Consumption Ranking

General Source PQ Viewing

Settings Selection Group Period
Power Factor Impact Y Y - Y
Power Factor Impact
Y Y - Y
Trend
Power Quality Incident
Y - - Y
Breakdown
Power Quality Incident
Y - - Y
Impact
Power Quality Incident
Y - - Y
Location
Power Quality Impact Y - Y Y
Power Quality Impact
Y - Y Y
Trend
Power Quality Rating Y - - Y
Power Quality Rating
Y - - Y
Trend

7EN02-0409-00 Page 485

Reference Web Applications Guide

Configuration options

Axes

Complete the options on this page as follows:

1. Enter a label for the axes in the Title field under Left Axis or Right Axis. (Right Axis is not
applicable to the Period Over Period gadget.)

Axis titles only appear in the gadget if you have configured at least one measurement series
for the gadget.

2. For the Max Value for each axis, select Auto or Fixed for the data in the gadget. Auto is the
default for the maximum value, which is dependent on available data for the selected meas-
urement. If you select Fixed, enter the maximum value for the axis.

3. For Min Value for each axis, select Auto or Fixed for the data in the gadget. Fixed is the
default value of zero (0). You can enter a different minimum value. If you select Auto, the min-
imum value is dependent on available data for the selected measurement and the minimum
value is automatically adjusted.

4. For Chart Type for each axis, select a type from the dropdown list. The default is Column for
the left axis, and Line with Markers for the right axis.

Consumption Ranking Setup

Complete the option on this page as follows:

1. Select Horizontal Bars to display a horizontal bar chart. Clear the check mark for Horizontal
Bars to display a vertical column chart.

2. Select Sort Ascending to show the ranked columns in an ascending order from left to right.
The bars are displayed in an ascending order from top to bottom. Clear the check mark for
Sort Ascending to show the data in descending order.

3. Select Show Total to display the aggregated total consumption value of all sources above the
chart. Clear the check mark for Show Total to hide the display of the total value.

4. (Only for Consumption Ranking) (Optional) Enter a Legend Name. The legend name is dis-
played below the chart.

Content

Complete the options on this page as follows:

1. Use the Source field to enter the URL for the website that you want to display.

The URL should start with http or https.

Page 486 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

WARNING
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
Use cybersecurity best practices to help prevent unauthorized access to the software.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, equipment
damage, or permanent loss of data.

NOTE: When you configure the Web Viewer gadget to access a website, you should be
careful that the website does not include hidden malware, viruses, or content that could
compromise your web client computers. It is recommended that the target site specified in
the gadget be secured with the SSL or TLS protocol (accessed via HTTPS).

2. Use the Refresh Interval to indicate how often to refresh the content. The default of None
indicates that the web site is shown in real time.

3. The Width value indicates the display area within the gadget. The default width is 1,000 pixels
(px).

4. Display provides 2 display options for the gadget:

a. Select Scroll the content to enable scrolling for content that exceeds the width or height
of the the display area in the gadget.

b. Select Crop/Zoom the content to display a cropped region of the website. Adjust the
Offset X, Width, Offset Y, and Height for the crop values.

The default position is set to the top left corner of the gadget, as indicated by 0 for both the
Offset X and Offset Y positions. The default width is 1,000 pixels and the default height is
848 pixels.

It is recommended that the total of the pixel values for Offset X and Width do not exceed
the display width (1000 pixels).

5. Click Preview to view how the image will appear in the gadget.

Data Series

Complete the options on this page as follows:

1. Click Add to open the sources and measurements dialog.

2. Click a source name in the Sources area to select it.

By default, the sources are listed in alphabetical order. You can use the Search field to find
sources by name.

NOTE: For large systems with many sources, it takes longer to choose a source from the
source selector if you change the Grouping setting from its default value.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 487

Reference Web Applications Guide

NOTE: For a Sankey Gadget select a hierarchy source. The gadget does not display data if
you select a source from the Devices list.

3. For a selected source, expand a measurement category, for example Energy, and click the
specific measurement you want to include, for example Real Energy Into the Load (kWh).

The measurements are listed in alphabetical order by measurement category. You can use the
Search Measurements field to find a specific measurement category or measurement.

Click Show Advanced to open options for filtering the measurements.

Select Display only Measurements with historical data to narrow the measurement
choices for the selected source.

4. Select Display Name to enter a name of your choice for gadget data purposes. (This is
recommended.) By default, the name is a combination of the source and the measurement.
For example, for a device main_7650, group BldgA, and measurement Real Energy
Into the Load the display name appears as BldgA.main_7650 Real Energy Into
the Load.

5. Similarly, you can select Display Units and enter a unit of your choice.

6. You can modify the following settings for each source measurement:
Series Style: select the color, line thickness, and how data is represented from the avail-
able choices in the dropdown menus.

Axis: select Right Axis or Left Axis to chart the data series against the scale for the
selected measurement.

Multiplier: change the multiplier value to convert the data from its original unit to the spe-
cified display unit. For example, convert the measurement unit from kWh to MWh by
using a multiplier of 0.001.

7. Click OK to close the dialog.

Equivalency

Complete the options on this page as follows:

1. Click Select Predefined Equivalency to open the Predefined Equivalencies dialog.

2. Select an item from the list of predefined equivalencies.

Default values are automatically entered in the fields on the Equivalency page.

3. You can change the default values as follows:

a. Enter the Multiplier from Wh value to convert from the watt-hour values into the equi-
valent measurement.

b. Select the Decimal Places to display for the equivalent value.

c. Enter the Unit for the equivalency. For example, "miles", "kilometers", "lbs", "kg", and so
on.

d. Select Display After Value or Display Before Value to specify the position of the

Page 488 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Unitlabel.

e. Enter the Energy Equivalency Description to be displayed in the gadget.

General Settings

Complete the options on this page as follows:

1. Type a title for the gadget.

2. For Opacity, you can:

a. Leave the default option Use Dashboard Opacity selected.

The default opacity setting is controlled in the Dashboard Styling dialog and applies to all
gadgets included on the dashboard. This is the recommended setting.

b. Clear the check box for Use Dashboard Opacity to enable the settings for the gadget
and select one of the available percentages.

An opacity setting of 100% indicates that the gadget is not transparent – the background color
or image is not visible through the gadget. A setting of less than 100% results in the gadget
being partially transparent – the background color or image is partially visible in the gadget.
The effect of the setting varies depending on the gadget and the background image.

Heat Map Setup

Complete the option on this page as follows:

1. Select Auto Color to let the gadget assign colors for the heat map automatically. If you clear
the Auto Color check box, you can manually define the color gradients by entering values
into the boxes. Enter values based on the maximum expected consumption value per interval.

2. Select Clear last log after a data gap to exclude large interval values, that are the result of
data gaps, from the displayed data set.

3. Select Remove Outliers to exclude data values that exceed the Max Threshold or fall below
the Min Threshold. Define the threshold values by entering limit values into the boxes.

4. Select Show Total to include a Total value at the top of the Heat Map chart

Image

Complete the options on this page as follows:

1. Select an image to display on the gadget from the available images in the Image Library.

2. (Optional) Add an image to the Image Library by clicking Upload Image to open the Upload
New Files dialog. Then either drag an image file to the area indicated in the dialog, or click
Choose Files and navigate to an image on your system. Click Finish to add the image to the
Image Library and then select it.

Measurements

Select specific measurements from the Measurement List, or select a template of pre-defined
measurements.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 489

Reference Web Applications Guide

Select specific measurements

1. Select one or more measurements in the Available Measurements area. The measurements
are added to the Selected Measurements list.

(Optional) Click Show Advanced to filter the measurements list by Type or popularity
(Show).

Select predefined measurements

1. Click Select From Template to open the Predefined Measurements Templates dialog.

The dialog lists various templates that include specific measurements. The number of
measurements is identified in parentheses for each template name.

2. Select a template and click OK to add the measurements associated with the template to the
Selected Measurements area.

Pareto Chart Setup

Complete the option on this page as follows:

1. Set the level of the marker line on a scale of 0-100% by entering the Marker Position. For
example, for a marker line at 80%, enter a value of 80.

2. Select Show Total to include a Total value at the top of the Pareto chart.

3. Specify a Legend Name. This name will be shown as an axis label for the left y-axis in the
chart.

PQ Group

Depending on the scope of the data that you want to display in the gadget, select All Groups (if
there is more than one group in the list), or a specific group in the list. The group names that are
listed in the dialog are defined in the Power Quality Group configuration file, which is configured
during Power Quality Performance commissioning.

Sankey Chart Setup

Complete the option on this page as follows:

1. Set the depth of the Sankey diagram by entering the Max Level.

The depth is defined from the selected top node. Each bar in the diagram represents a level
and by reducing this number you can create diagrams focussing on the higher levels. There is
no limit to how many levels can be displayed.

2. (Optional) Select to View Only Last Log.

Selecting this option overrides the Viewing Period selection. Instead of displaying data for the
selected viewing period, only the last available data log value for each node in the hierarchy
structure is used. This is useful for viewing the current state of the system, e.g. Power,
Voltage, Current.

Page 490 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Sources

Select the sources that you want to include in the table:

1. Select one or more sources in the Available Sources area. The sources are added to the
Selected Sources list.

(Optional) Use the Search Sources... field to find sources, click Show Advanced to filter the
source list by Type, or click Add All to select all sources.

2. Click a source in the Selected Sources area to remove it as selected.

(Optional) Click Remove All to remove all sources from the Selected Sources area.

Source Selection

Complete the option on this page as follows:

1. Click Select Source to open the Source Selection dialog.

The sources listed are dependent on the views and virtual meters you create in Hierarchy
Manager.

2. Enter a source name in the Search Sources field, or expand the tree to locate the source that
you want to use.

3. Click the source name and then click OK to add your selection as the source for the gadget.

Table Settings

1. Choose Sources or Measurements for the column headings in the table.

2. Set the Minimum Column Width for the columns in the table.

3. Set the Update Interval for the data refresh in the table.

4. (Optional) Enable Simple Rendering to improve the display of large tables.

Target Lines

Complete the options on this page as follows:

1. Click Add Target Line to add target line input fields to the page.

Add additional target line input fields by clicking Add Target Line again.

2. Select Fixed Target or Per Day Target for Type to specify how the target line is applied.
a. Fixed Number is a value that applies in all date ranges.

b. Per Day Target is a value that is prorated for the time range that you specify. For
example, a per day target of 100 displays the target line at 100 if viewing By Day, at 3000
if viewing By Month, and at 700 if viewing By Week.

3. Enter a label to display in the chart for the target line and select the axis for the target line in the
respective fields.

4. Use the Color Selector to choose the color of the target line.

5. Click the Remove Target Line icon to delete it.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 491

Reference Web Applications Guide

Viewing Period

Complete the options on this page as follows:

1. Select the time range for the data that is to be displayed in the gadget.

2. If aggregation options are available, select one of the available options.

The time range and aggregation settings are specific to the gadget that you select.

NOTE: For all Power Quality gadgets, except the Trend gadgets, the recommended viewing period
is This Month (for monitoring current data) or Last Month (for monitoring historical data). For the
Trend gadgets, the recommended viewing period is Last 12 Months with a By Month aggregation
period.

Page 492 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Reports references
This section contains reference information related to configuring Reports.
Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

UPS Battery Health Report calculations

7EN02-0409-00 Page 493

Reference Web Applications Guide

UPS Battery Health Report calculations

The following terms and explanations of various calculations are used in the UPS Battery Health
Report:

First Drop Analysis – Minimum Drop Voltage (V), Maximum Drop Voltage (V) and
Difference (%): The voltage drop minimum, maximum and percentage difference values are shown
in the Drop Analysis table section. To calculate these values, a valid waveform voltage drop must
be found first by sampling the waveform data.

A valid voltage drop is defined as the first waveform section of size n, where the relative minimum
and maximum voltage values have a percentage difference d. In addition, the next sample n+1 must
be greater in value than the minimum voltage, to ensure that the lowest value has been found in the
voltage drop.

The sampling section size n and the percentage difference d are determined by the user-defined
report parameters Waveform Drop Sample Size and Waveform Drop Percentage, respectively.

After the voltage drop has been found, the Minimum Voltage and Maximum Voltage are simply the
min and max values in that drop samples, and the Difference is the percentage of the maximum
voltage over the minimum voltage. For example:
Minimum Drop Voltage = Min(ws1 <= WaveformValues < = wsN)
Maximum Drop Voltage= Max(ws1 <= WaveformValues <= wsN)
ws1 is the first point in the sample and wsN is the last point in the sample
Difference (%) = [(Maximum Drop Voltage – Minimum Drop Voltage) / Maximum Drop Voltage]

Recovery Analysis – Target Recovery Voltage (V), Actual Recovery Voltage (V) and
Recovery Time (ms):

Target Recovery Voltage (V): This value is calculated for the reference waveform only. This is
calculated as follows:
Target Recovery Voltage (V) = [Recovery Voltage * Recovery Value Multiplier]
Where Recovery Voltage = Average(w1 <= WaveformValues < wN)
w1 is the very first point in the waveform and wN is the lowest point in the waveform voltage drop
and Recovery Value Multiplier is a user-defined value in the report pre-requisite page

Actual Recovery Voltage (V): The first point in the reference and comparison waveforms that
occurs after the voltage drop, that is equal or greater than the Target Recovery Voltage value.

Recovery Time (ms): This is the time elapsed from the Minimum Voltage Drop time and the Actual
Recovery Voltage time, expressed in milliseconds.

Additional calculations

Voltage Threshold: This is the red horizontal area that is highlighted in the waveform drop chart. It
represents a nominal voltage value, therefore there are no calculations for the Voltage Threshold.

For example, if the user sets the Voltage Threshold to 50V, then a red line will be drawn at 50v
(based on the Y-axis) and the area below the red line appears shaded in red.

Page 494 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Trends references
This section contains reference information related to configuring Trends.
Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Configuring a trend

7EN02-0409-00 Page 495

Reference Web Applications Guide

Configuring a trend
Configuring General settings
To configure general settings:

1. In the Trend Setup dialog, on the General tab, enter a title for the trend.

2. To add a new data series, click Add under Data Series. This opens the Add Data Series dia-
log.

3. To edit an existing series, select it, and then click Edit. This opens the Edit Data Series dia-
log.

4. In Add (or Edit) Data Series, click a source in the Sources area to select it.

You can select sources organized by Devices or Hierarchy Views. You can use the Search
Sources field to find entries by source, group name, or a combination of group and source
names.

(Optional) Click Show Advanced to have the option of showing only Devices, only Hierarchy
Views, or both.

5. For the selected source, expand a measurement type, for example Voltage, and click the spe-
cific measurement you want to include in your trend, for example Voltage A-B.

The measurements are listed in alphabetical order by measurement category. You can use the
Search Measurements field to find a specific measurement category or measurement.

(Optional) Click Show Advanced to open options for filtering the measurements.

Select Display only Measurements with historical data to narrow the measurement
choices for the selected source.

6. (Optional) Select Display Name if you want to enter a series name of your choice for trend
data purposes. By default, a series name is a combination of source and measurement inform-
ation formatted as group.source measurement, for example BldgA.meterA Voltage
A-B.

7. (Optional) Select Display Units and enter a unit description of your choice.

8. You can modify the following settings for each source measurement:
Style: select the color and line thickness from the available choices in the dropdown
menus.

Decimals: select the number of decimal places for the data displayed in the legend.

Plot on: select Right or Left Axis for the location of the measurement values for the
selected measurement.

Overlay: select the values that you want to overlay on the trend. By default, no items are
selected. The selections are Min, Max, and Mean.

Data Source: select where to access the data for the trend. The options are to gather
series data from the source in real-time, gather series data from the database as it is being
logged, or gather real-time series data from the source and historical data from the data-
base to fill the trend, if possible.

Page 496 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

9. Click OK to save your changes and close the Add (or Edit) Data Series dialog and to return to
the Trend Setup dialog.

10. Click Add to specify additional sources and measurements for the trend.

11. Select Private Trend to keep this trend private, or clear the check box to make it public.

NOTE: Only you and users with supervisor access permission can view, edit, and delete a
private trends.

Configuring Axes settings

To configure axes settings:

1. In the Trend Setup dialog, on the Axes tab, enter a label for the axes in the Title field under
Right Axis (Primary) or Left Axis (Secondary).

Axis titles only appear if you have configured at least one measurement series and it appears
on the trend.

2. For Right Axis (Primary), Max Value and Min Value are set to Auto by default.
a. (Optional) Select Fixed and enter the maximum or minimum values in the respective input
fields.

i. When you select Upper Threshold:

Select a color from the color selector for area shading on the trend between the
maximum value and the upper threshold value.

Enter a value for the upper threshold in the input field.

Each time the latest data point of a measurement series occurs in an upper or
lower threshold, the color defined for the threshold also colors the background of
the measurement series in the legend.

ii. When you select Lower Threshold:

Select a color from the color selector for area shading on the trend between the
minimum value and the lower threshold value.

Enter a value for the lower threshold in the input field.

If the latest data point of a measurement series occurs in an upper or lower

threshold, the color defined for the threshold also colors the background of the
measurement series in the legend.

b. (Optional) Select Target Line, then select a color from the color selector and enter a value
for the target line in the input field.

You can select the Target Line independently from the Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold settings.

3. For Left Axis (Secondary), Max Value and Min Value are set to Auto by default.

For Fixed maximum or minimum, enter the values in the respective input fields.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 497

Reference Web Applications Guide

Configuring Chart settings

To configure chart settings:

1. In the Trend Setup dialog, on the Chart tab, select the text size from the list.

The text size property is applied to trend axis labels, the size of the legend, the legend text
size, and trend data point tooltips.

The default setting is Medium, and the choices are Small, Medium, or Large.

2. Select the position of the legend included in the trend display area from the list.

The default setting is Right, which places the legend on the right side of the trend. The
available choices are Off, Left, or Right.

3. Select the content that you want to include in the legend from the available settings.

The default selections are Name and Value. The additional selections are Difference and
Difference (%).

Name is either the default measurement name in the form of group.device

measurement, or the custom name that you specified on the Add or Edit Data Series
dialogs.

Value is latest data value and the unit of measurement. For example, for voltage
measurements, the default value is numeric_value V such as 415.2 V.

Difference is the change in the measurement from one update to the next. For example, if the
voltage is 415.8 and it changes to 416.1 at the next trend update, the difference appears as
+0.3 in the legend.

Difference (%) is the percentage change in the measurement from one update to the next. For
example, if the voltage changes from 415.8 to 416.1 at the next trend update, the difference
expressed as a percentage appears as +0.072% in the legend.

Configuring Data display settings

To configure data display settings:

1. In the Trend Setup dialog, on the Data tab, specify the Data Update Intervals in the From
device and From database dropdown lists.

The default setting is 5 seconds for data updates for trends using the data directly from a
device, and 5 minutes for data updates for trends with data from a database.

2. Specify the Data Points for the x-axis of the trend in the Max per series input field.

The default setting is 40000.

The value must be between 100 and 500,000. Increasing the value adds more data points per
series but this can result in a degradation of trend performance.
Examples:

A data interval of 1 second equates to 3600 data points per hour (60 points per minute X 60
minutes per hour). At a setting of 40000 points, approximately 11.1 hours of data is
retained for viewing (40, 000 points / 3600 points per hour = approximately 11.1 hours).

A data interval of 5 seconds equates to 720 data points per hour (12 points per minute X 60

Page 498 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

minutes per hour). At a setting of 40000 points, approximately 55.5 hours of data is
retained for viewing (40, 000 points / 720 points per hour = approximately 55.5 hours).

A data interval of 10 seconds equates to 360 data points per hour (6 points per minute X 60
minutes per hour). At a setting of 40000 points, approximately 111.1 hours of data is
retained for viewing (40, 000 points / 360 points per hour = approximately 111.1 hours).

7EN02-0409-00 Page 499

Reference Web Applications Guide

User Manager references

This section contains reference information related to User Manager.
Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

User Manager user interface

User access levels and permissions

Page 500 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

User Manager user interface

Users user interface (UI)

User Manager Help.

1
Click Help to open the online help.
Users, User Groups, and Licenses tabs.
2
Click a tab to open the associated screen.
Add Standard User, Add Windows User, and Add Windows Group function buttons.
3
Click a button to activate its function.
Search Users box.
4
Enter a search string to find users in the users table.
Users table.
5
Shows the existing users in the system.
Edit and Delete icons.
6
Click Edit to make changes to this user. Click Delete to delete this user.
Number of displayed users.
7
Shows the number of items visible on this page, and the total number of items in the system.
Page selector.
8
Navigate between pages. Set the number of items that are displayed on a page.

User Groups UI

7EN02-0409-00 Page 501

Reference Web Applications Guide

Add User Group button.

1
Click the button to add a new user group.
User Group table.
2
This table shows the existing user groups in the system.

Licenses UI

1 Web Applications User Licenses Summary.

2 Licenses table.

Page 502 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

User access levels and permissions

The access level that is assigned to a user in Power Monitoring Expert determines the permissions
this user has in the system. The following tables, Table 1 and Table 2, show the permissions
granted by the different access levels. Both tables show the same information, presented in
different formats. Table 1 is organized by access level, Table 2 is organized by application.

NOTE: Web Application access is controlled through user group settings. If a user group does not
have access to a Web Application, then the group members cannot access this application
regardless of their user access permissions.

Table 1: Permissions by access level

Supervisor Operator Controller User Observer Permissions Application

- Dashboards
- Diagrams
(Not
- Trends
Alarm View public content
- Alarms
Views)
(Viewer)
- Reports
View diagrams Vista
View diagrams Designer
- Logical
Device Type
Editor
- DB
Manager
- Diagnostics
Viewer
- Device
Type Editor
- Remote
Run the application Modem
Setup
- VIP Setup
- Update
EWS
- PQDIF
Exporter
- TOU Editor
- Configure
Managed
Circuits
Alarms
View alarms
(Viewer)

7EN02-0409-00 Page 503

Reference Web Applications Guide

- Dashboards
(Not - Diagrams
Diagrams Create private - Trends
or Alarm content - Alarms
Views) (Viewer)
- Reports
Acknowledge Alarms
alarms (Viewer)
View all private - Dashboards
content in own user - Diagrams
groups - Trends
Edit/delete public - Alarms
content in own user (Viewer)
groups - Reports
- Hierarchy
Manager
Run the application - Rate Editor
- Alarm
Configuration
Connect/disconnect Management
sites and devices Console
Modify device
network
Management
configuration
Console
Add devices to the
system
Run the application Update OPC
- Dashboards
- Diagrams
View/edit/delete - Trends
any content - Alarms
(Viewer)
- Reports
Create/edit users
User
Create/edit user
Manager
groups
Create/edit diagram
Diagrams
links
- Web Apps
Settings
Run the application
- User
Manager

Page 504 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Create/edit
Vista
diagrams
Create/edit
Designer
diagrams
- Event
Watcher
- Reports
Configuration
- Diagrams
Run the application Configuration
- Deactivate
Alarms
- Configure
Managed
Circuits

Table 2: Permissions by application

Application Permissions Supervisor Operator Controller User Observer

(Not
View public content Alarm
Views)
(Not
Create private Diagrams
- Dashboards
content or Alarm
- Diagrams
Views)
- Trends
View all private
- Alarms
content in own user
(Viewer)
groups
- Reports
Edit/delete public
content in own user
groups
View/edit/delete any
content

Alarms Acknowledge alarms

(Viewer) View alarms
Create/edit users
User Create/edit user
Manager groups
Run the application
Create/edit diagram
Diagrams
links

7EN02-0409-00 Page 505

Reference Web Applications Guide

Web Apps
Run the application
Settings
- Hierarchy
Manager
- Rate Editor Run the application
- Alarm
Configuration
View diagrams
Vista
Create/edit diagrams
View diagrams
Designer
Create/edit diagrams
Connect/disconnect
sites and devices
Modify device
Management
network
Console
configuration
Add devices to the
system
Update OPC Run the application
- Event
Watcher
- Reports
Configuration
- Diagrams
Configuration Run the application
- Deactivate
Alarms
- Configure
Managed
Circuits

Page 506 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

- Logical
Device Type
Editor
- DB Manager
- Diagnostics
Viewer
- Device Type
Editor
- Remote
Modem Setup Run the application
- VIP Setup
- Update
EWS
- PQDIF
Exporter
- TOU Editor
- Configure
Managed
Circuits

7EN02-0409-00 Page 507

Reference Web Applications Guide

Operation references
This section contains reference information related to the content in the Operating chapter of this
guide.

Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Topic Reference Links

Alarms UI
Timeline Analysis UI
Alarms Waveforms UI
Alarm to Incident mapping
Alarms Terminology
Dashboards Dashboards user interface (UI)
Power Quality Performance Power Quality Performance events and disturbances
Report input parameters
Model creation example
Reports Interpreting the Energy Regression Analysis Report results
Reports UI
Reports Terminology
Trends Trend options

Page 508 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Alarms references
This section contains reference information related to using Alarms.

Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Alarms UI
Timeline Analysis UI
Waveforms UI
Alarm to Incident mapping
Alarms Terminology

7EN02-0409-00 Page 509

Reference Web Applications Guide

Alarms UI
1 Main UI

View Library
The View Library contains all the Alarm Views that are configured in the system. Alarm Views
can be listed individually or they can be organized within folders.

1
TIP: To hide the Library, click the Hide Library icon ( or ) in the top right corner of the

Library. To show the Library, click the Show Library icon ( or ) at the top of the Library
ribbon, or click anywhere in the minimized Library ribbon.

Alarms Display
2
The Alarms Display pane shows the Alarm View selected in the View Library.

Page 510 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

2 Alarms Display UI

Update timer
1
The Update timer shows the time until the next display refresh.
Update mode
Use the update mode to switch between Date Filter mode and Auto-Update mode.

Date Filter mode: View Alarms within a certain date

2 range.

Auto-Update mode: View the latest Alarms.

NOTE: This element is only available for History Views, not for Status Views.

Search filter
3 Enter text into the search filter to search and filter the items displayed in the Alarms Display
pane.
Options menu
4 The Options menu contains options relevant to the content displayed in the Alarms Display
pane.
Number of displayed items
5
Shows the number of items visible on this page, and the total number in this View.
Page selector
6 Use the page selector to navigate between pages. Set the number of items that are displayed
on a page.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 511

Reference Web Applications Guide

3 Alarm Status UI

Alarm Status table columns

Click on any of the column headers to sort by that column. Use the Show/Hide Columns
option in the Alarms Display pane Options menu to customize which columns are visible. The
following columns are available:

ID Unique numeric alarm identifier.

Priority Alarm priority number from 0 - 255.
Status Graphic display of active or inactive status.
Active Active or Inactive status.
1 Name Alarm name.
Type Alarm type, for example Over Voltage.
Source Origin of the Alarm.
Unacknowledged Number of unacknowledged Alarm activations.
Acknowledged Acknowledge Alarm activation.
Last Occurrence Datetime of last Alarm activation, in browser local time.
Last Occurrence UTC Datetime of last Alarm activation, in UTC time.
First Occurrence Datetime of first Alarm activation, in browser local time.
Occurrences Total number of Alarm activations.

Details button
2
Click Details to see more information related to an Alarm. (See below for more information.)
Alarm Status table rows
3 Each row in the table shows an Alarm Definition that exists in the system. The filter settings in
the View Library control which Alarm Definitions are included in a View.

Page 512 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

3-1 Alarm Definition Details

TIP: Click Details for an Alarm Definition or double-click an Alarm Definition row in the table to
open the Alarm Details.

Display selector
1 Select Details to see information about the Alarm Definition.
Select History to see past instances of this Alarm.
Alarm Definition Details information
2
See detailed information about this Alarm Definition.
Actions
Click Acknowledge to open the Acknowledge Alarms window.
3
Click Open Device Diagram to open the Device Diagram for the source this Alarm is
associated with.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 513

Reference Web Applications Guide

4 Alarm History UI

Alarm History table rows

1 Each row in the table shows an Alarm Instance that occurred. The filter settings in the View
Library control which Instances are included in a View.
Details button
2 Click Details to see more information related to the Alarm Instance. (See below for more
information.)

4-1 Alarm Instance Details

TIP: Click Details for an Alarm Instance or double-click an Alarm Instance row in the table to open
the Alarm Details.

Page 514 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Display selector
Select Details to see information about this Alarm Instance.
1
Select Events to see the Events that are associated with this Alarm Instance.
Select Waveforms to see all the waveform that are associated with this Alarm Instance.
Alarm Instance Details information
2
See detailed information about this Alarm Instance.
Actions
Click Acknowledge to open the Acknowledge Alarms window.
Click Open Representative Waveform to see the waveform of the worst disturbance that is
associated with this Alarm Instance.
3 Click Open Incident to see information on the Incident that is associated with this Alarm
Instance.
Click Open Alarm Definition to see information on the Alarm Definition for this Alarm.
Click Open Device Diagram to see the Device Diagram for the source that is associated with
this Alarm.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 515

Reference Web Applications Guide

5 Incident History UI

Incident History table rows

1 Each row in the table shows an Incident that occurred. The filter settings in the View Library
control which Incidents are included in a View.
Analysis button

Click Open Timeline Analysis to open the timeline analysis window for the Incident.

TIP: To analyze multiple Incidents together, select the Incidents in the table and then choose
2 Open Timeline Analysis on selection from the Options menu in the top right corner of the
Alarms Display pane.

TIP: For multi-selection, use Ctrl+Click to select individual Incidents, use Shift+click
to select a block of Incidents.

Details button
3 Click Details to see more information related to the Incident. (See below for more
information.)

5-1 Incident Details

TIP: Click Details for an Incident or double-click an Incident row in the table to open the Incident
Details.

Page 516 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Display selector
Select Details to see information about this Incident.
1 Select Alarms to see the Alarm Instances that are associated with this Incident.
Select Events to see the Events that are associated with this Incident.
Select Waveforms to see all the waveform that are associated with this Incident.
Incident Details information
2
See detailed information about this Incident.
Actions
Click Incident Analysis to see the timeline analysis of the Incident.
3 Click Acknowledge to open the Acknowledge Alarms window.
Click Open Representative Waveform to see the waveform of the worst disturbance that is
associated with this Incident.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 517

Reference Web Applications Guide

6 Event History UI

Event History table columns

Use the Show/Hide Columns option in the Alarms Display pane Options menu to customize
which columns are visible. The following columns are available:

ID Unique numeric Event identifier.

Source Origin of the Event.
Timestamp Datetime when the Event was recorded, in browser local time.
1 Timestamp UTC Datetime when the Event was recorded, in UTC time.
Event Event string, for example RSP10 Status.
Condition Threshold value of the Event trigger at the time the Event was recorded.
Measurement Measurement that triggered the Event.
Value Measured value at the time the Event was triggered.
Type Event trigger type, Pick up, Drop out, or Instantaneous.
Priority Event priority number from 0 - 255.

Event History table rows

2 Each row in the table shows an Event that occurred. The filter settings in the View Library
control which Events are included in a View.

TIP: Double-click an Event row in the table to open the Alarm Instance Details for the Alarm that is
associated with this Event.

Page 518 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

7 View Settings

Alarm Status Alarm and Incident History Event History

Options menu and Hide Library icon .

The Options menu contains options relevant to the View Library. The following options are
1 available:
Add View
Add Folder
Search filter
2
Enter text into the search filter to search and filter the Views displayed in the Library.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 519

Reference Web Applications Guide

Back button
3
Use the Back button to exit the View Settings and go back to the Library.
View Name
4
Set the name of the View in the Library.
Location
5
Determine where the View is stored in the Library.
View Access Permissions selector
Select Public to make this View public. Select Private to make this View private.
6
NOTE: Everyone in your User Group can see a public View. No one except you can see a
private View.

View Type selector

7 Select Alarm Status to create an Alarm Status View. Select Alarm History to create an Alarm
History View.
Priority filter
8 Click the priority buttons to include or exclude Alarms with that priority. The priorities are, from
left to right: No, Low, Medium, High.
State selector
Select which Alarm states to include. The following options are available:
Active or Unacknowledged
9 Active and Unacknowledged
Unacknowledged
Active
All
Sources selector
10
Include all sources, or select specific sources.
Category selector
Include or exclude certain categories of Alarms and choose specific types within each
category. The following categories are available:
Power Quality
11 Asset Monitoring
Energy Management
General
Diagnostics
See Alarms for a list of available types in each category.
Level of Detail selector
Select to see Incidents, Alarms, or Events.
12
NOTE: This setting is only available for History Views, not for Alarm Status Views.

Page 520 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Priority filter
Select which priority Events to include or exclude. This filter allows more precise priority
filtering than the other priority filter.
13
NOTE: This selector is only available for Event History Views, not for Alarm Status or
Incident and Alarm History Views.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 521

Reference Web Applications Guide

Waveforms UI
Incident and Alarm instance Waveforms UI

Page selector.
1
Navigate between pages.
Waveforms timeline.
The timeline shows at what point in time the Waveforms that are associated with this Incident
2
or Alarm Instance were captured. Each waveform capture is represented by a dot. The
Representative Waveforms for this Incident or Alarm Instance are shown with black dots.
Inspect button
3
Click the button to open the waveform inspection window for this Waveform.
Representative Waveform
The black marking identifies the Representative Waveform for this Incident or Alarm Instance.
4
The Representative Waveform is the Waveform for the worst disturbance in the Incident or
Alarm Instance.

Page 522 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Waveform inspection UI

Display Mode
1 Select one of the following display modes for the waveform chart: Waveform, Waveform and
RMS, RMS.
Channels
2
Select which channels (V1, V2, V3, I1, I2, I3) to include or exclude from the waveform chart.
Advanced Options

Select which charts are shown in the Analysis pane. The options include
Analysis Area, Phasors, Harmonics (V), Harmonics (I). You can also switch
View
between a Compact View and an Extended View. The Compact View groups
the charts together, the Extended View shows them below each other.
Harmonics Set the number of Harmonics to display in the Harmonics column chart.
Select the sampling rate at which the waveform was captured. The sampling
3 Source
rate is detected automatically. Use this control to make adjustments if the
Sampling
sampling rate setting is incorrect. The sampling rate is set correctly when the
Rate
Analysis Region covers one cycle of waveform capture.
Source Select the source frequency. The frequency is detected automatically. Use this
Frequency control to make adjustments if the frequency setting is incorrect.

TIP: The Advanced Options are hidden by default. Click the Advanced Options label to show
or hide these settings.

Analysis Area selector

4
Use the slider to select an Analysis Area in the waveform chart.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 523

Reference Web Applications Guide

Zoom
Use the left and right sliders to zoom in and out of the waveform chart. You can also click and
5 drag the pointer on the plot to zoom. To pan while zoomed in, click and drag the area between
the sliders. Click to the right of the sliders to zoom out to the original size.

Analysis Area chart

This chart shows the waveform signature of the section of the waveform that has been
6
selected by the Analysis Area selector (see 4). The Phasor and Harmonics calculations are
based on the waveform data from the Analysis Area.
Phasor chart
This chart shows the phasor analysis of the section of the waveform that has been selected
7
by the Analysis Area selector (see 4). Phasor details are shown in a polar diagram and a data
table.
Voltage Harmonics chart
8 This chart shows the voltage harmonic analysis of the section of the waveform that has been
selected by the Analysis Area selector (see 4). Harmonic details are shown in a column chart.
Current Harmonics chart
9 This chart shows the current harmonic analysis of the section of the waveform that has been
selected by the Analysis Area selector (see 4). Harmonic details are shown in a column chart.
Compare Waveforms
Use this option to open this waveform in a new, Compare Waveforms tab in the browser. You
10
can then select other waveforms to open in the same window. If a Compare Waveforms tab is
already open, then the present waveform is added to that window.
Download Waveform
11 Use this option to download the waveform data of the present waveform in .csv file format.
The file is downloaded to your local Windows Downloads folder.

Page 524 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Timeline Analysis UI
Analysis UI

NOTE: Alarms and data measurements during an Incident occur in very short time intervals. To
show the correct sequence of events in the Timeline Analysis, the Analysis item timestamps must
be accurate. Consider using monitoring devices with Precision Time Protocol (PTP) or GPS time
synchronization for accurate time stamping.

Options menu
1
Contains options relevant to the content displayed in the Analysis UI.
Notes area
2
(Optional) Enter notes related to the Analysis.
Grouping control
3
Choose to group the items in the Analysis by time or by source.
Zoom and Heatmap
Use the sliders or the time controls to zoom in or out of the Analysis time window. Use the
4
button on the right of the slider to zoom out to the original size. The colored areas act as a
heatmap, showing you where the Analysis items are located on the time window timeline.
Analysis items
These are the Alarms, Waveforms, and Bursts that are associated with this Timeline. The color
bars to the left of the items indicate the item priority. Arrows, pointing up or down, to the left of
5 some of the items indicate Disturbance Direction Detection measurements. Hover the pointer
over the arrows to get specific disturbance direction information.

TIP: Click the item name to open a Details view for the item.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 525

Reference Web Applications Guide

Timeline
Each Analysis item is represented by a dot on the timeline or a burst data display. The color of
6 the dot indicates the priority of the item. Alarms with a start and end event are shown with two
dots, connected by a line. Waveforms are shown with a white dot. Zoom in to see the
waveforms timeline. Click a waveform dot to open the waveform viewer.
Analysis item Options
7
Hide an item from view or choose to open a Details view for an item.

Page 526 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Timeline Analysis View Settings UI

View Name
1
Shows the name of the Timeline View.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 527

Reference Web Applications Guide

Location and sharing

Determines where the View is stored in the Library and who can access it.
2
NOTE: Everyone in your User Group can see a public View. No one except you and
Supervisor level users can see a private View.

Quick Expand
3 Click this option to extend the time window of the view and adds all devices, and all
categories.
Priority filter
4 Click the priority buttons to include or exclude Alarms with that priority. The priorities are,
from left to right: No, Low, Medium, High.
Sources selector
5
Include all sources, or select specific sources.
Show control
Show or hide Burst data, Waveform data, the Notes area, Spanning Alarms, Hidden Items.

6 NOTE: Spanning Alarms are Alarms that started before the Time Window. Hidden Items are
Analysis items that are marked as hidden through the item Options menu. Hidden items
appear dimmed when shown.

Category selectors
Include or exclude certain categories of Alarms from the Analysis and choose specific types
within each category. The following categories are available:
Power Quality
7 Asset Monitoring
Energy Management
General
Diagnostics
See Alarms for a list of available types in each category.

Page 528 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Alarm to Incident mapping

The following table shows the mapping of Alarm types to Incidents:

Incident Category Incident Type Alarm Types

Interruption Interruption
Over Voltage Over Voltage
Under Voltage Under Voltage
Unclassified Disturbance Unclassified Disturbance
Sag Sag (Voltage)
Swell Swell (Voltage)
Transient Transient
Flicker Flicker
Power Quality
Frequency Variation Frequency Variation
Harmonics
Harmonics (Current)
Harmonics
Harmonics (Power)
Harmonics (Voltage)
Unbalance
Unbalance Unbalance (Current)
Unbalance (Voltage)
Communication Status Communication Status
Diagnostics Device Status Device Status
System Status System Status
Air Air
Demand Demand
Electricity Electricity
Energy Management Gas Gas
Power Factor Power Factor
Steam Steam
Water Water
Protection Protection
Backup Power Backup Power
Over Current
Asset Monitoring Sag (Current)
Current Monitor
Swell (Current)
Under Current
Thermal Monitor Thermal Monitor
General Event
Clock / Time
Clutter
General Device Settings
Unassociated Dropout
General Setpoints General Setpoint

7EN02-0409-00 Page 529

Reference Web Applications Guide

Page 530 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Alarms Terminology
The following is a list of commonly used terms related to Alarms in PME.

Alarm
The term Alarm is commonly used to describe both, an Alarm Definition and an Alarm Instance.
Which one it represents in any particular application must be derived from the context in which it is
used. It is better to use the terms Alarm Definition and Alarm Instance to avoid ambiguity.

Alarm Definition
An Alarm Definition is the specification of defined condition for a particular measurement from a
particular source. When the condition is met, the Alarm goes active. When the condition is no longer
met, the Alarm goes inactive. Example: An Overcurrent Alarm that goes active when the measured
current for a load goes above a defined limit. The Alarm Definition includes the Alarm Name, the
source and measurement, the Alarm limits, and any other conditions that are relevant for the Alarm.

Alarm Instance
An Alarm Instance is a record of an occurrence where a monitored load exceeds the limits set in the
Alarm Definition. An Alarm Instance starts when the Alarm state goes active and ends when it goes
inactive. An Alarm Instance has a start and end date.

Alarm Occurrence Count

The Alarm Occurrence Counts is a count of the Alarm Instances that have happened for an Alarm
Definition.

Alarm State
The Alarm State shows if the monitored load presently meets the conditions defined in the Alarm
Definition or not. If it meets the conditions, the Alarm State is Active. If it does not meet the
conditions, the Alarm State is Inactive.

Alarm Acknowledgment
An Alarm Acknowledgment is a way to indicate in the software that you have seen the Alarm and
that it is being managed. When you acknowledge an Alarm, the date and time of the
acknowledgment is recorded together with an optional note that you can enter in the acknowledge
window.

An Alarm can be acknowledged after it has gone active. An Alarm stays unacknowledged until you
acknowledge it. After you have acknowledged an Alarm, it stays acknowledged until the next time it
goes active. At that point it is reset to unacknowledged and is waiting for you to acknowledge it
again.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 531

Reference Web Applications Guide

NOTE: You can acknowledge Alarms in Status Views and History Views. If you acknowledge
Alarms through an Incident History View, all Alarms that are part of this Incident will be
acknowledged. Whenever you acknowledge an Alarm, from any of these locations, you are
acknowledging the Alarm Definition itself, not a particular instance of it. That means
acknowledging an alarm marks it as Acknowledged for all Instances and resets the
Unacknowledged occurrence counter.

Incident
An Incident combines Alarms, Waveforms, and Burst data from many sources in the system. The
elements are combined based on the proximity in time when the data was recorded and based on an
analysis of the type of data. The goal is to create a single representation of a real world power event
that shows the impact of this event on the power system as a whole.

Burst Data
Burst data is pre- and post event data that is logged during an Alarm Instance. The recording of the
data is triggered by an Alarm going active. Devices that support Burst data keep a continuous buffer
of data logs in memory, until a Burst data capture is triggered. At that point, the data is recorded and
uploaded to the software. By showing both pre- and post event data, Burst data is a very effective
analysis tool. Burst data can be high speed data, such as half-cycle RMS measurements of
voltages, currents, and other quantities, or it can be 1 second measurements for slowly changing
parameters.

Event
Events are records of activity or conditions in the monitoring system. Events are generated by
devices and the software and are logged and displayed as they happen in the system without any
processing or aggregation. The system uses Event records to determine Alarm types and states.

Status View
A Status View in the Alarms application shows Alarm Definitions in the system, their present state,
how often they occurred, their priority, and other relevant information.

History View
A History View in the Alarms application shows instances of Incidents, Alarms, or Events that have
occurred in the system.

Page 532 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Dashboards references
This section contains reference information related to using Dashboards.

Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Dashboards user interface (UI)

7EN02-0409-00 Page 533

Reference Web Applications Guide

Dashboards user interface (UI)

Main UI

Dashboard Library
Contains all the Dashboards that are configured in the system. Dashboards can be listed
individually or they can be organized within folders.

1
TIP: To hide the Library, click the Hide Library icon ( or ) in the top right corner of the

Library. To show the Library, click the Show Library icon ( or ) at the top of the Library
ribbon, or click anywhere in the minimized Library ribbon.

Dashboards display pane.

2
Shows the Dashboard selected in the View Library.

Gadget Settings UI

Page 534 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Gadget settings tabs.

1 The tabs group the different setting options for the gadget. Different gadget types can have
different settings tabs and different settings options within those tabs.

Dashboard Settings

Options menu and Hide Library icon .

Contains options relevant to the Dashboard Library. The following options are available:
1 Add Dashboard
Add Folder
Slideshow Manager

7EN02-0409-00 Page 535

Reference Web Applications Guide

Search filter.
2
Enter text to search and filter the Dashboards displayed in the Library.
Back button.
3
Exit the Dashboard Settings and go back to the Library.
Dashboard Name.
4
Set the name of the Dashboard in the Library.
Add Gadget.
5
Add new gadgets to the Dashboard. See Adding a gadget to a dashboard for more information.
Styling.
6 Set the appearance of the Dashboard by adding a background image, setting the background
color, and setting the gadget opacity. See Styling a dashboard for more information.
View Access Permissions selector.
7
Select Public to make this Dashboard public. Select Private to make this Dashboard private.
Location.
8
Determine where the Dashboard is stored in the Library.

Page 536 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Power Quality Performance Module references

This section contains reference information related to using the Power Quality Performance Module.

Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Power Quality Performance events and disturbances

7EN02-0409-00 Page 537

Reference Web Applications Guide

Power Quality Performance events and disturbances

Events

Power Quality (PQ) events are short-term disturbances that are characterized by magnitude,
duration, and direction.

The following table provides definitions for the different PQ events:

Magnitud Duratio Consequenc

PQ Events Summary Source
e n e
½ cycle
Loss of the Less than
Interruption Utility or to 1
supply 10% of Downtime
s facility minute
voltage nominal
or more
90% to
Utility or
Decrease 10% of ½ cycle
Voltage large Malfunction
in voltage nominal to 1
Sag motors or downtime
magnitude voltage minute
starting
(typical)
110% to
Increase in ½ cycle Equipment
Voltage 180% of Utility or
voltage to 1 malfunction
Swell nominal facility
magnitude minute or damage
(typical)
Switchin
Short- Potentiall
g
duration y several <50 ns Electronic
Transient activities
high thousand to 50 equipment
Voltage or
overvoltag s of volts ms damage
lightning
e and amps
strikes
Sustained 110% to Equipment
More
Over increase in 120% of Utility or malfunction
than 1
Voltage voltage nominal facility or motor
minute
magnitude (typical) heating
Sustained 80% to
More Equipment
Under decrease 90% of Utility or
than 1 malfunction
Voltage in voltage nominal facility
minute or damage
magnitude (typical)

Power Quality event classifications

The following image illustrates the classification of events in relation to a CBEMA chart. The Power
Quality Performance gadgets and reports follow this same color classification of Power Quality
Events.

Page 538 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Percent of nominal No impact

A B C Transient D Swell
voltage region
Under
E Over Voltage F Sag G H Interruption
Voltage

Disturbances

Power Quality (PQ) disturbances are long-term disturbances.

The following table provides definitions for the different PQ disturbances:

PQ
Magnitu Consequen
Disturbanc Summary Source Duration
de ce
es
0.5% -
Non- 2.5% of Overheatin
Voltage Utility or Steady
symmetric nominal g or
Unbalance facility state
al voltages voltage malfunction
(typical)
1.0% -
Non- 30% of Malfunction
Current Utility or Steady
symmetric nominal and breaker
Unbalance facility state
al current current trip
(typical)

7EN02-0409-00 Page 539

Reference Web Applications Guide

PQ
Magnitu Consequen
Disturbanc Summary Source Duration
de ce
es
Malfunction
Voltage Waveform 0 to 20% Nonlinear Steady
and
Harmonics distortion (typical) loads state
overheating
Malfunction
Current Waveform 0 to 20% Nonlinear Steady
and breaker
Harmonics distortion (typical) loads state
trip
Up to Standby
Deviation
5% generators
of the Malfunction
Frequency deviatio or poor Intermitte
frequency or motor
Variation n of power nt
from the degradation
nominal infrastructu
nominal
(typical) re
Load
Voltage Flickering
0.1% to exhibits
waveform Intermitte lights,
Flicker 7% significant
envelope nt equipment
(typical) current
variations malfunction
variations

Page 540 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Reports references
This section contains reference information related to using Reports.

Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

Report input parameters

Model creation example
Interpreting the Energy Regression Analysis Report results
Reports UI
Reports Icons
Reports Terminology

7EN02-0409-00 Page 541

Reference Web Applications Guide

Report input parameters

The report input area opens when you select a report in the Report Library. You must specify the
necessary input parameters before you can generate the report. For saved reports, some or all of the
input parameters may already be specified.

After you generate a report, you can display or change the input parameters you specified for it by
clicking show inputs in the top-right corner of the report display area. To return to the generated
report without changing any of the input parameters, click hide inputs. If you change any of the
input parameters, click Generate Report to regenerate the report.

The following information describes the inputs for the report templates. The available inputs vary by
report template listed in the Reports Library.

Aggregation Data
This input determines the period of time over which data is accumulated for presentation in the
report, such as day, week, and so on. From the dropdown list, select the aggregation interval that
you want to use. If a custom report includes a predefined aggregation interval, contact the owner to
adjust the interval for your use.

Aggregation Interval
This input determines the period of time over which data is accumulated for presentation in the
report, such as day, week, and so on. From the dropdown list, select the aggregation interval that
you want to use. If a custom report includes a predefined aggregation interval, contact the owner to
adjust the interval for your use.

Aggregation Period
This input determines the period of time over which data is accumulated for presentation in the
report, such as day, week, and so on. From the dropdown list, select the aggregation interval that
you want to use. If a custom report includes a predefined aggregation interval, contact the owner to
adjust the interval for your use.

Aggregation Type
The aggregation data that will be displayed: Average, Maximum, or Minimum.

Align Day of Week for Months

When the Aggregation Interval is Month, selecting Yes includes the data in the table by day of week
(Sun, Mon, Tues, and so on). Selecting No includes the data in the table by the day of the month (1,
2, 3, and so on). The default is Yes.

ATS Summary
1. Click ATS Summary.

2. Click Include ATS Summary to include the Automatic Transfer Switch Summary section in
the report. The remaining options in the screen are enabled. Alternatively, clear this check box
to exclude the Automatic Transfer Switch Summary section from the report.

3. Click Include Pass/Fail Indicator to include both the Required Transfer Time and Test
Status results. The Test Status shows the pass/fail grade. Alternatively, clear this check box
to exclude the results from the report.

Page 542 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

4. Lead ATS - Select the ATS device that you want to use as the lead ATS in reporting the trans-
fer time. The lead ATS is the ATS upon which the pass/fail grade is based.

You can choose the Auto Select Lead ATS option if you want the system to
automatically select the lead ATS. The ATS device that is first to enter test mode becomes
the lead ATS. If multiple ATS devices enter test mode at the same time, or if none of the
devices enter test mode, the system selects the ATS based on alphabetical order.

5. Click OK to save your changes and return to the report template.

Auto-scale Y-Axis
Select whether or not to scale the chart normally. Selecting No sets the starting point of the Y-axis
at zero. The default is Yes.

Baseline Date
Use the Baseline Date to compare the current state of the breaker settings to a baseline point in
time. If a change is detected between the state of the settings today and the state of the settings on
the baseline date the change will be noted in the report.

CBEMA (1996), CBEMA (Updated), ITIC, SEMI F47 curves

Click Yes for the power quality curve (CBEMA (1996), CBEMA (Updated), ITIC, or SEMI F47) that
you want to show in the incident plots. Click No to hide the curve.

You can select one or more of the curves.

Change Summary
Click Yes to include the Change Summary section of the report. Click No to not include it. The
default is No.

Chart Type
Select one of the available chart types from the dropdown list to graphically display the data that you
specified for the report.

Choose a Model and a Reporting Aggregation Interval

Select the model you want to use for the report from the Model drop-down list.

Select the aggregation interval you want to use for the report from the Reporting Aggregation
Interval drop-down list. The options available in this drop-down list depend on the selected model.

Circuit Breaker Inventory

Click Yes to include the Inventory section of the report. Click No to not include it. The default is
Yes.

Comments
Use this field to add comments that will appear at the bottom of the generated report.

Company Name
Type a name for the company in the text box.

Cumulative Degradation Threshold

Enter the value that represents the maximum total voltage difference between the reference
waveform and the evaluated waveforms. For example, if the waveform is off by 1.0 on each point
from the reference, the total degradation is 10. If the threshold value is 8, then the degradation

7EN02-0409-00 Page 543

Reference Web Applications Guide

exceeds the threshold.

Custom Page Height

Specify a custom output page height. This value is ignored if Page Size is set to Fit to Page.

Custom Page Width

Specify a custom output page width. This value is ignored if Page Size is set to Fit to Page.

Custom Units Label

Enter any text to be used as the measurement label for instances when normalization is used , for
example, kWh/Person. The default is kWh.

Custom URL
(Optional) Specify the URL for any page or image that you would like to include in the report. This
could be a page from an external or internal website, or a local image.

Customers
Click Select Customers. Select the customers that you want to include in the report from the list.
Click Select All to select all the customers from the list. Click None to deselect all the customers.
Click OK.

Data Center Energy Measurement

Click Select Measurement to choose the measurement for interval energy usage for the entire data
center. This will typically be a 15-minute interval value.

Data Center Power Measurement

Click Select Measurement to choose the measurement for instantaneous power consumption for
the entire data center.

Data Center Source

Click Select Source to choose a single source to represent the entire data center facility.

Degree Days Pivot Point

The Degree Days Pivot Point is the point where either heating or cooling is required to keep the
temperature within the designated degree range.

Dependent Variable
The dependent variable is the measurement you want to model. For example, if you are modeling
the energy consumption of a building based on outside temperature, then the energy is the
dependent variable.

To specify the dependent variable,

1. Click Select Source and select a device from the Devices list or a Hierarchy node from the
Views list.

2. Click Select Measurement and select the measurement to be modeled.

3. Select an aggregation method for the measurement from the Aggregation Method drop down
list.

The following aggregation methods are available:

Page 544 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

AVG: calculates the average measurement value over the interval.

SUM: adds up the measurements values over the interval.
DELTA: subtracts the beginning measurement value from the end measurement value of the
interval.

NOTE: If you are using a Hierarchy node as a source for the dependent variable and you are using
a cumulative measurement, such as Real Energy (kWh), you must use SUM as aggregation
method. This is because the hierarchy converts the cumulative measurement into interval
measurements.

Deviation Type
Enter a percentage or specific value to specify the type of deviation to show in the report.

Display Billing ID
Click Yes to show an alphanumeric billing ID for a tenant which can be used by third party billing
engine.

Display Mode
Select in which form you would like to see the report output from the Display Mode drop-down list.

The following display modes are available:

Forecast: Compare the model output for the reporting period to the actually measured data for that
period, where the model was created for a baseline period in the past.
Backcast: Compare the model output for a past period to the actually measured data for that
period, where the model was created for the reporting period in the present time.

Display Zero Days

Select whether or not to show days where data is logged but the values are all zero. Note that days
with no logged values at all are still included in the report. The default is No.

Driver Data Quantity

Click Select Measurement. Navigate to and select a measurement, and then click OK.

Driver Data Source

Click Select Source, and then choose from the dropdown list a Grouping: None, Group Name, Site,
or Device Type. Navigate to and select a source, and then click OK.

Email Recipients (comma separated)

A comma-separated list of email addresses to which to email the transformed XML.

Email XML Export

Select Yes to email the transformed XML output ('XML Export File') to the addresses specified in
Email Recipients.

End Hour
Select the end hour to display when filtering the data by the time of day.

The time range in the list is in 24-hour format in descending order.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 545

Reference Web Applications Guide

Energy Cost per kWh

Enter the appropriate value for the blended cost of energy. This value is used in the calculations for
the cost of losses in the report. Only numeric values with up to two decimal places will be used in
the report.

The currency symbol used to display the cost values is set in Web Applications SETTINGS >
Localization.

Energy Measurement Label

Type a label to describe the measurements selected in Energy Measurements.

Use this label to aggregate disparate units into a common measurement unit.

For example, for Gas (GJ) and Electricity (kWh) values you could define the Energy Label as 'BTU'.

Energy Measurements
1. Click Select Load Measurement to open the Load Measurement Selector dialog.

2. Under Load, click Select Source to open the Source Selector.

The Source Selector dialog provides options to show Devices or Views.

Use the Devices option to select the devices you want to include in the report.

From the Grouping list, select the way in which you want to display the sources (for
example by device type or by group name). Click + and - to expand and collapse items in
the navigation tree. Click the check box beside a device (or group of devices) to select it.
Click Select All or Select None in the top-right corner to select or clear all the check
boxes.

Use the Views option to select a hierarchy view (a tree of relationships) or virtual meters.

The hierarchy views and virtual meters are configured in the Hierarchy Manager
component. (See the Hierarchy Manager Help for further information about hierarchies,
virtual meters, and views.) Click + and - to expand and collapse items in the tree. Click
the check box beside any hierarchy item in the tree or any virtual meter to select it.

Click OK after making your selections.

3. Under Measurements:
a. Click Select Measurement to open the Measurement Selector.

b. Choose the measurement you want to use for the energy comparison and click OK.

c. If required, enter a Multiplier value.

The multiplier lets you add multiple measurements. For example, a multiplier can be used
to get gas and electricity energy currencies onto the same unit footings, so they can be
added together.

4. (Optional) Use Normalization to normalize measurement values.

a. In Label, enter the normalization label value.

b. In Value, enter the value that you want to normalize.

For example: To normalize energy usage per square foot of a building, enter Energy per
Square Foot in the Label value, and the square footage of the building in the Value field.

Page 546 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

5. Click OK.

Enter an optional coefficient in % to be applied on the modeled data

(Optional) Enter coefficients that are applied to the modeled data to adjust the model output based
on known or expected changes.

For example, if you implemented an energy conservation measure on June 1, 2016 for which you
are expecting an energy saving of 15%, enter -15 as a coefficient and June 1, 2016 as the start date
from which to apply it on. All modeled data, starting with that date, will be adjusted by -15%. You
can add multiple coefficients at multiple dates. Coefficients are applied cumulatively, on top of any
previously applied coefficients.

To specify a coefficient,

1. Enter the coefficient value in percent, including the sign, in the text box.

2. Enter the date on which this coefficient takes effect into the date box.

To add additional coefficients, click the + sign next to the coefficient text box. Click - to remove a
coefficient.

EPSS Group
Select the transfer switches and other equipment group for the report. The list shows the groups that
you defined in the configuration utility. When you select a group from the list, the field to the right
shows the devices included in the group.

Evaluation Limits
Click Configure to configure the EN50160 parameters used in the report. Default values are
provided based on the EN50160 standard.
Click the links in the dialog box to access configuration options for various measurements included
in the report:

l Basic Configuration: Type the maximum percentage of intervals in an observation period

where the component does not meet the EN50160 N1 and N2 requirements before the com-
ponent is considered non-compliant.

l Supply Voltage Dips: Type the maximum percentage of intervals in an observation period that
the RMS value can drop below 90% of the nominal voltage for each duration and depth presen-
ted in the dialog box before the component is considered non-compliant.

l Short and Long Interruptions: Type the maximum percentage of intervals in an observation
period that the RMS value can be less than 1% of the nominal voltage for the given duration
before the component is considered non-compliant.

l Temporary Overvoltages: Type the maximum percentage of intervals in an observation period

that the RMS value can exceed the nominal voltage by each magnitude for each duration
presented in the dialog box before the component is considered non-compliant.

NOTE: The EN50160 standard defines the observation period for the above components as one
week.

Event Location
Select how you want to identify the location of the events that are included in the generated report.
The available selections are Internal and External, Internal only, or External only.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 547

Reference Web Applications Guide

Event Priority
Select the priority of alarms and events that you want to include in the report. The options include
high, medium, and low priority alarms and events.

Events Summary
1. Click Events Summary.

2. Click Include Events Summary to include the Events Summary section in the report. The
remaining options in the screen are enabled. Alternatively, clear this check box to exclude the
Events Summary section from the report.

3. Click Include Generator Events to include generator events in the report. Alternatively, clear
this check box to exclude generator events from the report.

4. Click Include ATS Events to include ATS events in the report. Alternatively, clear this check
box to exclude ATS events from the report.

5. Click OK to save your changes and return to the report template.

Exclude Days with Rollover

Exclude days that contain rollover from the report.

Exclude Incomplete Days

Exclude days that are incomplete from the report.

Exclude Incomplete Weeks

Exclude weeks that are incomplete from the report.

Exclude Sources
(Optional) Define the sources to exclude from the report:

a. In the Sources Included area, select sources to exclude and then click > to move those
sources to the Sources Excluded area.

b. To move all of the sources into the Sources Excluded area, click >>.

c. Click OK to save the sources and return to the report template.

The devices in the group appear in the Sources section of the generated report. Excluded devices
appear as grayed-out entries.

Exclude Values Over

Enter a value to indicate the point at which values over this number are not plotted in the chart. The
default value is No Exclusions.

Exclude Values Under

Enter a value to indicate the point at which values over this number are not plotted in the chart. The
default value is No Exclusions.

Facility Location
(Optional) Type the data center facility location.

Facility Name
Type the data center facility name.

Page 548 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Flicker Baseline - High

Type the Flicker Baseline High value if the default is not appropriate for your needs.

Flicker Baseline - Low

Type the Flicker Baseline Low value if the default is not appropriate for your needs.

Frequency Baseline [%]

Type the Frequency Baseline value if the default is not appropriate for your needs.

Frequency Nominal [Hz]

Type the nominal frequency of the system (for example, 60).

Generator Summary
1. Click Generator Summary.

2. Click Include Generator Summary to include the Generator Summary section in the report.
The remaining options in the screen are enabled. Alternatively, clear this check box to exclude
the Generator Summary section from the report.

3. Click Include Pass/Fail Indicator to include both the pass/fail grade and the test method
used to evaluate each generator. The pass/fail grade is based on both the run duration and the
minimum specified percentage of the prime nameplate rating. Alternatively, clear this check
box to exclude the pass/fail grade and the test method from the report.

4. Select the Electric Data options to specify the electrical data in the report:
Include Chart: Select this check box to include a generator chart showing kW Load, kVA
Load, and the threshold for the minimum acceptable power load based on the specified
load percentage for the run duration.

Include Avg., Min, Max Table: Select this check box to include a table showing min-
imum, average, and maximum electrical readings for the longest continuous load at (or
above) the specified load percentage. The electrical readings measured are: kW, kVA, Ia,
Ib, Ic, In, Vab, Van, Vbc, Vbn, Vca, Vcn.

Include Details: Select this check box to include a table showing the generator electrical
details. The data is organized by time intervals and displays the readings for kW, kVA,
load (the percentage of maximum load identified on the generator nameplate), Power
Factor (PF), I avg, VLL avg, VLN avg, and Frequency.

5. Select the Engine Temperature Data options to specify the engine temperature data in the
report:
Include Chart: Select this check box to include a chart showing the engine temperature
for the run duration, and a horizontal line identifying the minimum temperature required for
the run duration.

Include Avg, Min, Max Table: Select this check box to include a table showing Min-
imum, Average, and Maximum engine temperature readings for the longest continuous
engine temperature equal to or above the minimum acceptable engine temperature.

Include Details: Select this check box to include a table showing the Longest Continu-
ous ET (Engine Temperature) time period, the Minimum ET, Required Run Duration (Min),
and Actual Run Duration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 549

Reference Web Applications Guide

NOTE: The configuration tool does not convert the engine temperature values from one
temperature type to another.

6. Select the Exhaust Gas Temperature Data options to specify the exhaust gas temperature
data in the report:
Include Chart: Select this check box to include a chart showing the exhaust gas tem-
perature for the run duration, and a horizontal line identifying the minimum temperature
required for the run duration.

Include Avg, Min, Max Table: Select this check box to include a table showing Min-
imum, Average, and Maximum exhaust gas temperature readings for the longest con-
tinuous engine temperature equal to or above the minimum acceptable exhaust
temperature.

Include Details: Select this check box to include a table showing the Longest Continu-
ous EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature) time period, the Minimum EGT, Required Run Dur-
ation (Min), and Actual Run Duration.

7. Under Engine Data, click Include Details to include engine details in the report. Details for
each generator include:
Generator name

Generator start and stop times by date

A label to indicate whether the data was collected automatically or manually.

A table of measurements; such as battery voltage and coolant temperature. Each meas-
urement includes a timestamp and the corresponding values.

8. Click OK to save your changes and return to the report template.

Gauge Scale Override

Choose a specific value for all of the gauge scales to use in custom situations, such as when
normalizing data. This input is optional.

Group
Keep the default option All Groups or select a specific power quality group from the list.

The groups are defined in the Power Quality Group configuration file, which is implemented during
Power Quality Performance commissioning.

Grouped By
Select from the dropdown list to determine how the circuit breaker aging and electrical wear analysis
results are sorted.

High Target Line (Left and Right Axis)

Enter a value for the target line representing the target for the high end of your energy use. This
target line is red in the generated report. The default is No Target Line.

High Target Name (Left and Right Axis)

Enter a name to identify the high target line in the chart legend for the left and right axis,
respectively. The defaults are Left Axis High Target and Right Axis High Target, respectively.

Page 550 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Highlight End
Select the end hour to stop the highlighting of the line in the chart.

The time range in the list is in 24-hour format in descending order.

Highlight Start
Select the start hour to begin the highlighting of the line in the chart.

The time range in the list is in 24-hour format in ascending order.

Incident Interval
Select the incident interval that you want to use in the report (such as, 20 seconds, 10 minutes, 1
week).

The incident interval is the time window used by the generated report to group multiple disturbances
together into a single incident. The default value is 20 seconds.

Include Activity Details

Click Yes to include a generator details section in the report. Click No to exclude this section.

Include Aggregation Chart

Select whether or not to include a bar chart in the generated report showing a summary of the
measurement you chose for the selected sources. The default is Yes.

Include 100% Area Chart

Select whether or not to include an area chart showing the data results stacked to a 100% level. The
default is Yes.

Include Area Chart

Select whether or not to include an area chart in the generated report to view the contribution of data
over a given period of time.

Include Average Harmonic Charts

Select whether or not to include charts showing the average values related to harmonic compliance.
The default is Yes.

Include Breakers with Minor Aging and Wear

Select Yes or No. Selecting Yes allows all of the breakers to appear in the report regardless of the
current electrical aging and electrical wear levels. Selecting No allows only breakers with moderate
or critical electrical aging and electrical wear to appear.

Include Chart
Select whether or not to include the chart in the generated report. The default is Yes.

Include Column Chart

Select whether or not to include a column chart in the generated report to compare the data
represented in the chart. The default is Yes.

Include Data Table

Select whether or not to show the data table in the generated report. The default is No.

Include Data Tables

Click Yes to include a section for capacity data in the report. Click No to exclude capacity data.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 551

Reference Web Applications Guide

Include Data Tables in the Detail Section

Select whether or not to show data table for power quality events in the generated report. The
default is No.

Include Data Warnings

Click Yes to include data warnings in the report. If there are none, the section is not included. Click
No to exclude this section.

Include Duplicates
Select whether or not to show duplicate data in the generated report. The default is No.

Duplicate data collection is disabled in Power Monitoring Expert by default. In order to be able to
include duplicate data in a report, duplicate data collection must first be enabled for the system.

Include Electrical Details

Select the option to specify the start records. When you click Select Reference Starts you can
choose the specific start records by generator and date. For example, you can use this option to
compare yesterday's Gen 1 start voltage signature to the Gen 1 start voltage signature from six
months prior.

Include EN50160 Configuration Parameters

Select whether or not to include the configuration inputs entered in the Configure Evaluation Limits
dialog in the generated report.

Include Event History

Click Yes to include event log data in the report. Click No to exclude it.

Include Events And Disturbances in the Detail Section

Click the field to open the Events and Disturbances dialog. By default, all items under Events and
Disturbances are selected, as well as Power Factor.

Clear the checkboxes for any specific items that you do not want to include in the generated report.
If you clear or select Events or Disturbances, the checkboxes for all of the items included in that
category are cleared or selected.

Include Gauges
Select whether or not to include the gauges in the generated report. The default is Yes.

Include Harmonic Detail Charts

Select whether or not to include charts showing a second level of harmonic compliance detail for the
generated report. The default is No.

Include Interval Column Trend

Select whether or not to include a bar chart in the generated report showing the measurement you
chose for the sources for each hour in the 24-hour period for the specified days. The default is Yes.

Include Interval Line Trend

Select whether or not to include a line chart in the generated report showing the measurement you
chose for the sources for each hour in the 24-hour period for the specified days . The default is No.

Page 552 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Include Line Chart

Select whether or not to include a line chart in the generated report to display the data trend over a
given time period. The default is Yes.

Include Measured Data

Choose to include the actual data with the modeled data or not by selecting Yes or No for Include
Measured Data.

Include Non Impacting Events

Select Yes if you want to include events in the Power Quality Events — Details section of the
generated report that are classified as having no impact on the power quality of your site. By default,
power quality events with no impact are excluded from the generated report.

Include Pie Chart

Select whether or not to include a pie chart in the generated report to show a numerical proportion of
the results. The default is Yes.

Include Report Parameters Summary

Select whether or not to include report parameters in the generated report. The default is Yes.

Include Stacked Aggregation Chart

Select whether or not to include a stacked chart in the generated report showing the measurement
you chose for the selected sources. The default is No.

Include Stacked Column Chart

Select whether or not to include a stacked column chart in the generated report to display the
proportions for the data represented in the chart. The default is Yes.

Include Tables
Select whether or not to include the tables in the generated report. The default is Yes.

Include THD/TDD Charts

Select whether or not to include charts showing the total harmonic distortion (THD) of the voltage
waveform, and the total demand distortion (TDD) of the current waveform, in the generated report.
The default is Yes.

Include Two Specific Periods Only

Select whether or not to include only the first and last period of data in the selected date range. The
default is No.

Include Unassociated Breakers

Include breakers that are not defined as being part of Switchboards and Groups in the report. The
default is Yes.

Include Undetermined Incidents

This option represents the number of events that cannot be classified as External or Internal.
Select Yes or No to include or exclude the data for these events from the generated report.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 553

Reference Web Applications Guide

Independent Variable
The independent variable is the driver that influences the measurement you want to model. For
example, if you are modeling the energy consumption of a building based on outside temperature,
then the outside temperature is the independent variable. You can specify one or more independent
variables.

To specify the independent variables,

1. Click Select Source and select a source from the list. Hierarchies are not supported for inde-
pendent variables.

2. Click Select Measurement and select the measurement.

3. Select an aggregation method for the measurement from the Aggregation Method drop down
list.

The following aggregation methods are available:

AVG: Calculates the average measurement value over the interval.

SUM: Sums the measurements values over the interval.
DELTA: Subtracts the beginning measurement value from the end measurement value of the
interval.
MIN: Selects the minimum measurement value over the interval.
MAX: Selects the minimum measurement value over the interval.
CDD: Calculates the Cooling Degree Days.
HDD: Calculates the Heating Degree Days.

For CDD or HDD, enter the base temperature in the Degree Days Base Temperature input
box that is displayed when one of these options is selected.

To add additional variables, click the + sign next to the Select Source button. Click - to remove a
variable. To enable or disable a variable, select or clear the check box next to the Select Source
button.

Input Source Measurements

Select one or more measurements and their sources, to be used in the calculation of the KPI. Each
measurement is associated with a label, for example A,B,C, ... which you use to define the KPI
formula.

Insert Data
You can save the output of the model report into the Power Monitoring Expert database and use it
for display in Dashboards and Trends. The source name created for this data in the database is
Modeled_Data.<model name>. The following measurements will be recorded for this source:

Measured: This is a copy of the dependent variable measured data.

Modeled Data: This is the data calculated by the model for the dependent variable.
Residual: This is the delta between the Measured data and the Modeled data
Residual%: This is the Residual data in percent.

To save the data into the database, select Yes for Insert Data.

Page 554 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

TIP: Setup a subscription to run the model report weekly for the last 7 days and save the output
into the database. This will ensure you have a complete data set for modeled data for use in
Dashboards and Trends.

Interval and Sub Model Configuration

Select the reporting interval from the Interval drop-down list.

Select the sub model from the Sub Model drop-down list. The options in this drop-down list depend
on the selected Interval and the sub models that have been defined in Settings > Configuration
Tools > Modeling Configuration.

The Database Driven option is used to define operating conditions instead of time periods for sub-
modeling. For example, you could define the condition of Power Factor < 0.8. That means that one
sub-model is used when the Power Factor is < 0.8 and a different one when it is >= 0.8. This is
similar to sub-modeling based on weekdays versus weekend days, just that the Power Factor value
is used as a condition instead of the day of the week.

When you select Database Driven, additional input boxes are displayed to select the Source,
Measurement, Key, and Value. The Key is the condition, for example for Power Factory < 0.8,
enter <0.8 in the Key input box. The Value box is just a label to identify the condition, so you could
enter Low PF for low Power Factor.

You can add one or more conditions. Click the + icon to add additional conditions.

NOTE: Conditions are applied in the order in which they are defined in the report.

IT Equipment Energy Measurement

Click Select Measurement to choose the measurement for interval energy usage for all the IT
equipment used. This will typically be a 15-minute interval value.

IT Equipment Power Measurement

Click Select Measurement to choose the measurement for instantaneous power consumption for
all the IT equipment used.

IT Equipment Source
Click Select Source to choose the single source that represents all the IT equipment operated in
the data center facility.

Keep True Totals

Select Yes if you want the totals in the report to be unaffected by the filtering. If you want the totals
in the report to be based on line item and tenant filter, select No.

KPI Formula
Enter the mathematical formula that is used to calculate the KPI from the input parameters. Use the
labels that are associated with the input parameters in the Input Source Measurements section as
variables in the formula. You can use the following operators +, -, /, *, Pow(), Sqrt().

Here are some examples of valid formula syntax:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 555

Reference Web Applications Guide

l (A + B) / C

l A+B+C

l C / (A + B)

l Pow(A+B+C,2)

l Sqrt(A+B)

KPI Measurement
Select the measurement that is used to represent the KPI output value. The calculated KPI values
will be logged under this measurement and the KPI Source. Use the KPI Measurement Override
if you cannot find a suitable output measurement.

KPI Measurement Override

Only use this input if you cannot find a suitable measurement under KPI Measurement.

Manually enter the name of a measurement to be used to represent the KPI output value. This
overrides any measurement selected under KPI Measurement. If the measurement you enter does
not already exist in Power Monitoring Expert, it is created.

KPI Source
Enter the name of the source for which the calculated KPI values are logged in Power Monitoring
Expert. The source is created automatically, if it does not exist already.

Line Item Filter

Anything entered in the Line Item Filter parameter (comma separated) includes rows from the Item
column. For example, to include the On Peak Usage line item, enter On Peak Usage in the Line
Item Filter. To include both On and Off Peak usage, enter Peak Usage.

Load Measurement
Select the source you want.

Lock Chart Scales at Zero

Select whether or not to force the y-axis to start at zero rather than scaling the chart normally. The
default is Yes.

Logged Measurement
1. Click Select Source to open the Source Selector dialog.

2. Select the source and then click OK.

3. Click Select Measurement to open the Measurement Selector dialog.

4. Select the instantaneous measurement (power, power factor, current, THD, etc.) and then
click OK.

Low Target Line (Left and Right Axis)

Enter a value for the target line representing the target for the low end of your energy use. This target
line is yellow in the generated report. The default is No Target Line.

Low Target Name (Left and Right Axis)

Enter a name to identify the low target line in the chart legend for the left and right axis, respectively.
The defaults are Left Axis Low Target and Right Axis Low Target, respectively.

Page 556 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Lower Target Line

Enter a value for the target line representing the target for the low end of the energy use. The lower
target is a yellow line in the report. Columns in charts that are on lower target line, or between the
lower target line and the upper target line, are outlined in yellow. The default value is 0.

Maintenance Status
Click Yes to include the Maintenance Status section of the report. Click No to not include it. The
default is Yes.

Manual
Click Manual to select the runs according to a date range and run reason, and then do the following:

1. Select the Reporting Period date range for th eruns to include in the report.

2. Select the Run Reason for the runs to include in the report.

If you select Most recent run and define excluded sources, the exclusions are ignored
when you generate the report.

The devices in the group will appear in the Sources section of the report. Devices that you excluded
from the report will be gray-shaded.

Max Authorized Deviation

Enter a value by which deviation is allowed for the report.

Measurement Label
Input the label to be used to describe the measurements selected in Load Measurement.

Measurements (Reports other than Load Profile)

Use this input to select the measurements you want to include in the report.

Click Select Measurement to open the Measurement Selector dialog. Click + and - to expand and
collapse items in the navigation tree. For reports where you can select multiple measurements,
click the check box beside a measurement (or group of measurements) to select it. For reports
where you can only select a single measurement, click the measurement name to select it.

After selecting the measurements, click OK.

Measurements (with Smart Mode)

Smart Mode is enabled in the Measurement Selector when you select the Views radio button in
the Source Selector, which then lets you select a hierarchy view or a virtual meter for your source
parameter.
When you open the Measurement Selector, Smart Mode lists general measurement names by
default. A Detailed Mode option is also available for the measurements.

Smart Mode provides a general measurement name for you to select. The measurement is based
on a subset derived from all of the available measurements in the particular measurement category.
The underlying operation selects an applicable measurement for each device to produce equivalent
results for reporting purposes.

The following image illustrates how measurements in Smart Mode are determined and applied from
the priority list of measurements. The priority list contains measurements that usually provide
equivalent results for the measurement selected in Smart Mode.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 557

Reference Web Applications Guide

For example, for each device included in a hierarchy view or in a virtual meter, the report starts with
the Real Energy measurement in the priority list. If data for that measurement exists, then it is used
in the report. If data does not exist for the Real Energy measurement, then the report goes to the
Real Energy Total measurement in the list. If data exists for that measurement, then it is used. The
report continues to progress through the priority list to select a measurement that pertains to each
device associated with a hierarchy view or a virtual meter.

You can select Detailed to change to the detailed selection mode. This mode allows you to select
from a full list of measurements.

Smart Mode Detailed Mode

Page 558 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

The Measurement Selector provides a full list of measurements when you select the Devices
radio button in the Source Selector.

Click + and - to expand and collapse items in the navigation tree. For reports where you can select
multiple measurements, click the check box beside a measurement (or group of measurements) to
select it. For reports where you can only select a single measurement, click the measurement name
to select it.

After selecting the measurements, click OK.

Measurements (Load Profile Report)

This input determines whether the report is calculated using demand or power measurements.
Select either Demand or Power from the dropdown list.

Measurement Interval
Select the observation period (that is, the measurement interval) of 2 Hour, 10 Minute, or 3
Second to use for the IEC61000-4-30 report.

Measurement Target Line

Select a measurement to use with the source identified in Source Target Line to establish ON and
OFF peak target lines in the generated report.

Model Data Quantity

Click Select Measurement. Navigate to and select a measurement, and then click OK.

Model Data Source

Click Select Source, and then choose from the dropdown list a Grouping: None, Group Name, Site,
or Device Type. Navigate to and select a source, and then click OK.

Multiplier
Enter a value to use as a muliplier in normalizing the raw data in the report. The default is 1.

n % Crossing
Type a value for the duration percentage. This value indicates where to place a cross on the plotted
line identifying where that percentage value occurs.

Notes
Any notes appear at the bottom of the report page.

Sub-reports
The options available for selection are Generate dynamically and Embed into single report.

l Select Generate dynamically to generate an incident summary report only. You can click the
links in the report to view incident details and also associated waveforms.

This option provides a convenient way to generate a summary of incidents to give you an
indication for investigating a particular incident or waveform. This option is recommended for
interactive viewing and analysis within the reporting period.

l Select Embed into single report to include the incident summary, the incident details, and the
waveforms associated with those incidents in a single generated report. This single report

7EN02-0409-00 Page 559

Reference Web Applications Guide

format facilitates exporting the information to one of the available download formats, and it also
facilitates setting and delivering a report subscription. This option is recommended for attaching
the report to an email.

This option provides a convenient way to extract and share power quality-related information.
Although power quality events vary from system to system, it takes longer to generate the
report using this option because the system queries more data, including data-intensive
waveforms. To prevent possible report timeouts, it is suggested that you keep the number of
waveforms to a minimum by:
Selecting a single source.

Specifying a reporting period of a single day or less.

Operating Room
The hospital rooms whose panels you want to include in the report.

Overwrite XML Export

Selecting Yes overwrites an existing file if it exists, and selecting No appends the new data to an
existing file.

Page Size
Select from the dropdown list. Select Fit to Page to automatically scale each output page to fit onto
a single report page. Select Custom to scale the output based on the height and width values
provided in the Custom Page Height and Custom Page Width boxes.

Page Wait Time in Seconds

Specify the maximum time the report waits for the slideshow or custom URL to load. If you selected
multiple slideshows, then this maximum wait time is applied to each of the slideshows. If a
slideshow or URL loads faster than the maximum wait time, the report completes before this time
has elapsed.

Power Factor Target

The target power factor for the site. The default target is 92, which you can change to match you site
power factor target.

The target power factor is configured in the Power Factor Impact Rate.xml file when the Power
Quality Performance module is commissioned. This rate file is included in the Billing Module, which
is subject to licensing. Contact your Schneider Electric representative for further information.

Primary Sort
Select the primary sort column from the drop-down list. Your choice sets the primary sort column for
the report; customer, rack or circuit. Depending on how your hierarchy is configured, the sort might
contain customer and circuit only.

Priority
Select the priority of alarms and events that you want to include in the report. The options include
high, medium, and low priority alarms and events.

Protection Modes
Click Yes to include the Protection Modes section of the report. Click No to not include it. The
default is Yes.

Page 560 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

PUE Category
Select a number for the report category. The value appears as a label below the report title. The label
will be “Category n”, where “n” represents the number selected.

Category 1 is measured at the Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS). Category 2 is measured at the
Power Distribution Units (PDU). Category 0 and 3 are not included in the PUE Report.

Rate
Select the appropriate rate structure to apply to this report. The rate determines how the cost for
each tenant is calculated.

Rates
Use this input to set up parameters for energy cost reporting. Click Configure Rates to open the
Energy Rates dialog.

l Click Energy and Demand to configure basic rate parameters for the report.
In the Select Measurements section, click the check box beside a measurement to
include it in the report.

In the Select Billing Calculation section, select Flat Rate or select TOU Schedule. If
you select TOU Schedule, select a time of use (TOU) schedule from the dropdown list
(see the Time of Use Editor topic in the online help for Management Console Tools for
information on configuring a time of use schedule).

In the Set Rates section, enter the rates for the selected measurements.

In the Set Demand Calculation section, select the calculation method used to determine
demand: Independent (peak demand is calculated independently for each source) or Coin-
cident (the demand measurements of the sources are correlated with the peak demand of
the main meter). If you select Coincident for the calculation method, click Main Meter to
select the source to which you want to correlate the demand measurements.

l Click WAGES to include WAGES (Water, Air, Gas, Electricity, Steam) measurements in the
report. Click the +/- buttons to add or remove measurements. Enter a name for the meas-
urement then click Select Source and Select Measurement to select a source and meas-
urement. Enter a rate for the measurement in the Rate field.

l Click Additional Fees to add additional rate information to the report. Enter a name in the Rate
Name field and rate information in the Amount field.

Recovery Value Multiplier

Enter the multiplier value from 0.01 to 1.00. This value is used by the algorithm to determine the
waveform recovery voltage value and time (relative to the waveform voltage drop) for both reference
and comparison waveforms.

Regression Type
Choose from the dropdown list Single-Line or Broken-Line.

Report Data
Select one or more system configurations to use in the report:

1. Click Select Generator Systems. The Selector screen appears with the UPS systems you
set up in the Generator Power Configuration Utility.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 561

Reference Web Applications Guide

2. Select one or more generator systems.

3. Click OK.

Report Data Generators

Select one or more system configurations to use in the report:

1. Click Select Generator Systems. The Selector screen appears with the UPS systems you
set up in the Generator Power Configuration Utility.

2. Select one or more generator systems.

3. Click OK.

Report Data UPS

Select one or more system configurations to use in the report:

1. Click Select UPS Systems. The Selector screen appears with the UPS systems you set up
in the UPS Power Configuration Utility.

2. Select one or more UPS systems.

3. Click OK.

Report End Date

Select either Today or Fixed Date for the data you want to generate in the report. If using Fixed
Date, enter the desired date.

Select either Server Local Time or UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).

Report Group
Select the group for which the report is intended.

Reporting Period
Use this input to select the timeframe for the data you want to view in the report.

Select the reporting period from the dropdown list. The timeframe options in the timeframe dropdown
are relative to the date the report is run. To run a report that starts and ends in the past, select the
fixed date option. Type a start and end date in the date boxes or click the arrows beside the dates to
display a pop-up calendar and select a date. Type a time in the time boxes or click the up and down
arrows beside the time to adjust the hours or minutes up or down.

Select whether you want to view timestamps in either Server Local Time, UTC (Universal
Coordinated Time), or in the timezone of the source.

Reporting Period (with additional options)

The Reporting Period input contains the following fields and dropdown lists:

l Timezone: Select whether you want to view timestamps in either Server Local Time or UTC
(Universal Coordinated Time).

l Aggregation Period: Select the block of time for which you want to compare data (i.e., day,
week).

l Comparison Type: Select what period of data you want to compare the selected Aggregation
Period to (i.e., today vs. the same day from the previous month or current month vs. the same
month from the previous year). The options vary depending on the Aggregation Period selected.

Page 562 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

l Number of Comparisons: Enter the number of periods you want to compare.

l Aggregation Interval: This input appears when you select Month for the Aggregation
Period. Select how you want data grouped for the report: by date (Day of Month) or the day of
the week.

l Selected Dates: This box displays the dates of the data that will appear in the report based on
the options selected.

For example, to compare the selected measurements for the same day of the month over the last 12
months, set Aggregation Period to Day, set Comparison Type to Today vs. Same Weekday
From Previous Month, and enter 12 in the Number of Comparisons field.

Reporting Period (for Power Quality report)

Use this input to select the timeframe for the data you want to view in the report. The report retrieves
all events over the duration of the reporting period. The events are summarized into incidents and
displayed on the report according to the Incident Interval setting.

Select the reporting period from the dropdown list. The timeframe options in the timeframe dropdown
are relative to the date the report is run. Use a relative date option for reports that you want to
generate on a regularly scheduled basis. To run a report that starts and ends in the past, select the
fixed date option. Type a start and end date in the date boxes or click the arrows beside the dates to
display a pop-up calendar and select a date. Type a time in the time boxes or click the up and down
arrows beside the time to adjust the hours or minutes up or down.

Select whether you want to view timestamps in either Server Local Time or UTC (Universal
Coordinated Time).

Report Type
Select either Summary or Detail.

l Summary – Shows only the aggregated values for all racks/circuits for a given tenant.

l Detail – Shows the aggregated value as well as child values of the racks and circuits.

Rollup
Select from the dropdown list the period of time for which the report data is rolled up.

Save Billing Totals

Save Billing Totals calculates the billing total per Tenant (Source) and writes the value back into
the database so that it can be used in other applications, such as Dashboards, Diagrams or
Reports.

Save Calculated Values

Click No to preview the report outputs without saving them to the database. Click Yes to save the
report outputs in the database.

The report overwrites any values, for this KPI, that already exist in the database from previous
report runs.

Save Model Configuration

Choose to save the created model to the database or not by selecting Yes or No for Safe Model
Configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 563

Reference Web Applications Guide

For saving the model, enter the model name in the Model Name input box that is displayed when
Yes is selected for Safe Model Configuration.

Scale Measurement
Select the measurement as the base against which to scale the main dataset. This input is optional.

Scale Source
Select the source as the base against which to scale the main dataset. This input is optional.

Select
Select Top (highest result) or Bottom (lowest result) to indicate the order of the gauges in the
generated report. The default is Top.

Select Date Range

Select this if you want to select the runs according to a date range and run reason, and then do the
following:

1. Select the Reporting Period date range for the runs to include in the report.

2. Select the Run Reason for the runs to include in the report.

The devices in the group will appear in the Sources section of the report. Devices that you excluded
from the report will be gray-shaded.

Select EPSS Group

Select the group for which the report is intended.

Select Generator Starts

Select the option to specify the start records. When you click Select Reference Starts you can
choose the specific start records by generator and date. For example, you can use this option to
compare yesterday's Gen 1 start voltage signature to the Gen 1 start voltage signature from six
months prior.

Select Group
Select the group for which the report is intended.

Select Number
Enter the number of sources that you want to include in the ranking. The default is 99.

Select Time of Use

Select a TOU schedule to use for the report. Existing time of use schedules are referenced in the
list. If you have not created a time of use schedule, the field indicates that no time of use schedule
is available.

Select Waveforms
1. Click Select Source, choose a source from the list, and then click OK.

2. Click Select Reference Waveform, select the check box next to one or more comparison
waveforms, and then click OK.

Page 564 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

3. Define the comparison waveforms using one of the following:

Click Enter the number of comparison waveforms and enter a value in the field.

By default, the report looks for the five most recent waveforms that have been captured
for the source to be compared against the reference waveform. Use this mode for reports
that are to be delivered using a report subscription.

Click Select the comparison waveforms, then click Select Comparison Waveforms,
select the check box next to the waveforms you choose, and then click OK.

This mode allows you to select specific comparison waveforms. It is not recommended to
use this mode with a report subscription.

Shifts
Use the +/- buttons to add additional shifts. For each shift, enter a name and set the start and end
time for the shift.

To configure a shift that spans midnight, use two shifts with the same name. For example, to set up
a day shift and a night shift, add three shifts: Day from 8:00 AM to 8:00 PM, Night from 8:00 PM to
12:00 AM, and Night from 12:00 AM to 8:00 AM.

Show Daily Rollups

Click Yes to include the daily peak load for the equipment. If you click No, the report shows the
peak load for the entire reporting period.

Show Data Warnings

Click Yes to include data warnings in the report. If there are none, the section is not included. Click
No to exclude this section.

Show Detailed Results

Choose to include details in the report or not by selecting Yes or No for Show Detailed Results.

Details include the calculated formulas and individual relationship between each driver and the sub
model data.

Show Errors
Click Yes to include error messages in the report, or No to exclude them.

Show Header & Footer

Click Yes to include the standard report header and footer in the report. Click No to not include the
standard report header and footer in the report.

The standard report header includes the logo, report title, and report generation information.

Show Occurrences Chart

Click Yes to include an Occurrences chart in the report. Click No to exclude this chart.

Show Report Parameters Summary

Select whether or not to show report parameters in the generated report. The default is Yes.

Show Start & End Periods Only

Select to show or not in the report the start and end periods. The default is No.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 565

Reference Web Applications Guide

Show Min/Max Timestamps

Click Yes to include the report period timestamps. Click No to exclude them.

Signaling Voltage 1, 2 and 3 Eval Limit [%]

Type the maximum percentage of intervals in an observation period in which the mean value of the
signaling voltage can exceed the curve defined in the EN50160 standard before that mains signaling
voltage is considered non-compliant.

Slideshows
This box shows all available slideshows in your system. Select the slideshows you want to include
in the report.

Source Label
Select an option for the format of the label describing the source. The options are Source Name,
Source Description, and Combined Name/Description.

Sources
Use this input to select the devices you want to include in the report.

Click Select Sources to open the Source Selector dialog. From the Grouping list, select the way in
which you want to display the sources (for example by device type, by group name, and so on).
Click + and - to expand and collapse items in the navigation tree. Click the check box beside a
device (or group of devices) to select it. Click Select All or Select None in the top-right corner to
select or clear all the check boxes.

After selecting the devices, click OK.

Sources (Devices and Views)

The Source Selector dialog provides options to show Devices or Views:

Use the Devices option to select the devices you want to include in the report.

From the Grouping list, select the way in which you want to display the sources (for example by
device type or by group name). Click + and - to expand and collapse items in the navigation tree.
Click the check box beside a device (or group of devices) to select it. Click Select All or Select
None in the top-right corner to select or clear all the check boxes.

After selecting the devices, click OK.

Use the Views option to select a hierarchy view (a tree of relationships) or virtual meters. The
hierarchy views and virtual meters are configured in the Hierarchy Manager component. (See the
Hierarchy Manager Help for further information about hierarchies, virtual meters, and views.) Click +
and - to expand and collapse items in the tree. Click the check box beside any hierarchy item in the
tree or any virtual meter to select it.
Click OK after making your selections.

Source Target Line

Select a source to use with the measurement selected in Measurement Target Line to establish
ON and OFF peak target lines in the generated report.

Start Hour
Select the start hour to display when filtering the data by the time of day.

The time range in the list is in 24-hour format in ascending order.

Page 566 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

State Labels
Use state labels to add labels to equipment state codes. For example: value = 1, state =
maintenance.

NOTE: State labels are related to the state measurements in the Power Monitoring Expert
database.

For each state that you want to include in the report:

1. In the Value field, enter a state value.

2. In the State field, enter the value's corresponding state. For example, if the state with a value
of 3 = medium, enter 'medium'.

3. (Optional) Click + and then repeat steps 1 and 2 to add a state label for each state that you
want to include in the report.

4. (Optional) Click - to delete a state label.

NOTE: If you do not add state labels for every source state, and you set Include Data Warnings
to Yes, the generated report will include error warnings indicating that equipment states are
unaccounted for in the State Label mapping.

State Measurement
Use state measurement to select a piece of equipment with state values.

1. Click Select Source to open the Source Selector dialog.

2. Select the source and then click OK.

3. Click Select Measurement to open the Measurement Selector dialog.

4. Select the equipment state measurement and then click OK.

Depending on how your state measurements are configured, the equipment state
measurement could be grouped under "Miscellaneous" or "Custom".

State Measurements
Use state measurement to select equipment with state values.

1. Click Select Source to open the Source Selector dialog.

2. Select the source and then click OK.

3. Click Select Measurement to open the Measurement Selector dialog.

4. Select the equipment state measurement and then click OK.

Depending on how your state measurements are configured, the equipment state
measurement could be grouped under "Miscellaneous" or "Custom".

5. (Optional) Click + and add another source measurement pair.

Stylesheet (optional)
Apply further transformation of the XML file by selecting a stylesheet file to create an HTML page to
display of the billing data with enhanced formatting.

Technical knowledge of XML, XSLT, and HTML is recommended.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 567

Reference Web Applications Guide

Target Line
Enter a value for the target line in relation to the measurement you selected. The default value is not
to include a target line.

Target Line (kW)

Enter a value for the location of the target line in the kW chart in the generated report. The default is
0.

Target Line (kVAr)

Enter a value for the location of the target line in the kVAr chart in the generated report. The default
is 0.

Target Line (kVA)

Enter a value for the location of the target line in the kVA chart in the generated report. The default is
0.

Technician Name
Type a name for the technician in the text box.

Tenant
Click Select Source to open the Source Selector dialog. Select a view name or Virtual Meter in the
View dropdown list. Select a tenant name, a device under a tenant name, or a virtual meter. Click
OK to add your selection to the report.

Selecting by view allows you to choose a source associated with a hierarchy configuration, such as
a floor in a physical layout or a circuit in an electrical view. Virtual meters available for selection are
defined separately in Hierarchy Manager. For additional information regarding hierarchies and virtual
meters, see Hierarchy Manager Help.

Tenant (multiple selection)

Click Select Source to open the Source Selector dialog. Select a view name or Virtual Meter in the
View dropdown list. Select one or more tenant names, one or more devices under a tenant name, or
one or more virtual meters. Click OK to add your selections to the report.

Selecting by view allows you to choose sources associated with hierarchy configurations, such as
a floor in a physical layout or a circuit in an electrical view. Virtual meters available for selection are
defined separately in Hierarchy Manager. For additional information regarding hierarchies and virtual
meters, see Hierarchy Manager Help.

Tenant Filter
Anything entered in the Tenant Filter parameter (comma separated) that matches any Billing meta
data line items (Tenant column) is included. An '*' can be entered to include everything.

THD Baseline [%]

Type the THD Baseline value if the default percentage is not appropriate for your needs.

Title
Type a title for the report in the text box.

Threshold
Enter the percentage for the maximum test run load capacity. This is the percentage of the
equipment electrical rating (in amps) entered in the Transfer Switches tab or the Equipment tab.

Page 568 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Threshold Hours
Enter the maximum number of hours the generators should run in non-emergency use. Enter a value
that is in compliance with local authority requirements. For example, in the United States, the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requires that generators can run no more than 100 hours in
non-emergency use.

Timestamp Coincidence
Select either with Customer Peak or with Data Center Peak.

Trip Settings
Click Yes to include the Trip Settings section of the report. Click No to not include it. The default is
Yes.

Unbalance Baseline [%]

Type the Unbalance Baseline value if the default percentage is not appropriate for your needs.

Upper Target Line

Enter a value for the target line representing the target for the high end of your energy use. The upper
target is a red line in the report. Columns in charts that on or above the upper target line are outlined
in red. The default value is 0.

UPS Group
Add the UPS groups that you wan tto include in the report.

Use Exception Periods

Choose to use exception periods or not by selecting Yes or No for Use Exception Periods.

Use Run History

Click Use Run History to select the most recent run, or select other specific runs that are stored in
history, and then do the following:

1. Click Refresh Run History to populate the Runs list with the latest run records.

2. In the Runs list, select Most recent run or the specific run record. The date and reason for
the run appear below the dropdown list.

If you select Most recent run and define excluded sources, the exclusions are ignored
when you generate the report.

Voltage Baseline [%]

Type the Voltage Baseline value if the default percentage is not appropriate for your needs.

Voltage Nominal [V]

Type the nominal voltage of the system (for example, 120).

Voltage Threshold
Enter voltage threshold value. This input represents a nominal voltage that is used by the report to
display a voltage threshold area below the reference waveform voltage drop.

Waveform Drop Percentage

Enter a percentage value from from 1.00 to 100.00. This input value represents the percentage that
is used by the algorithm to detect the first voltage drop in the reference and comparison waveforms.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 569

Reference Web Applications Guide

Waveform Drop Sample Size

Enter a value for this sample size. This input represents the number of waveform samples (or
points) - from 2 to a total number of waveform samples (for example, 1024, 2048, and so forth) -
used by the algorithm in the detection of the waveform voltage drop for the reference and
comparison waveforms.

X Axis Calculation Method

Choose from the dropdown list one of the following methods: Cooling Degree Days, Heating Degree
Days, Average, Sum, or Delta.

XML Export File

Type the name of the XML output file (including the file share or physical path) that is created after
the XML transform has been applied. For example: C:\bill_
report\MonthlyBillingDataMain.xml.

XML Transform File

Select the XML transform (xslt) file (via file share or physical path) to transform the default XML
output into a specific format.

Technical knowledge of XML and XSLT is recommended.

Y Axis Calculation Method

Choose from the dropdown list one of the following methods: Average, Sum, or Delta.

Y-Axis Max Value (% Nominal)

Choose one of the available percentage values to visually increase the level of detail above the
nominal value. The percentage value that you select sets the maximum vertical axis in the incidents
plot. The default value is 500%.

Page 570 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Model creation example

The following example shows the process of creating a model for use with the Use Model Report. It
shows the steps for creating a basic model and then improving it iteratively.

In this example we use the report to model the HVAC related electrical energy consumption of a
building. Our goal is to create a daily model for energy consumption based on outside temperature
and humidity. We use consumption data for the year 2017 to create the model.

Model creation run 1

The dependent variable is the electrical Real Energy (kWh) measurement for the HVAC system of
the building. The independent variables are the outside temperature and humidity.

We use the following inputs for the Create Model report:

Title Create Model Report

Source = HVAC - Fans and Compressors
Dependent Variable Measurement = Real Energy (kWh)
Aggregation Method = SUM
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Temperature (°C)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Independent Variable(s) Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Relative Humidity
(%)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Reporting Period 1/1/2017 - 12/31/2017, Server Local Time
Interval = Week
Interval and Sub Model Configuration
Sub Model = No Sub Model
Use Exception Periods No
Show Detailed Results No
Save Model Configuration No

For the first run we choose an interval of Week, only to see if there is a strong relationship between
consumption and the independent variables. Later we change this to Day to get a Daily Model.

Results:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 571

Reference Web Applications Guide

TIP: Move your pointer over the chart line to see tooltips with measurement details.

The model accuracy, measured by the R² value, is pretty high, which show that there is a correlation
between the energy consumption and the outside temperature as well as humidity.

For the next run, we use a Daily aggregation method.

Model creation run 2

We change the Interval to Day.

We use the following inputs for the Create Model report:

Title Create Model Report

Source = HVAC - Fans and Compressors
Dependent Variable Measurement = Real Energy (kWh)
Aggregation Method = SUM

Page 572 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Temperature (°C)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Independent Variable(s) Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Relative Humidity
(%)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Reporting Period 1/1/2017 - 12/31/2017, Server Local Time
Interval = Day
Interval and Sub Model Configuration
Sub Model = No Sub Model
Use Exception Periods No
Show Detailed Results No
Save Model Configuration No

Results:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 573

Reference Web Applications Guide

The R² has dropped and the visual correlation is not very high. The charts show that there is a big
difference in consumption between weekdays and weekends. This difference cannot be explained
by outside temperature or humidity alone. For the next run we use sub-models for weekdays and
weekends.

Model creation run 3

We use a Weekday vs Weekend sub-model.

We use the following inputs for the Create Model report:

Title Create Model Report

Source = HVAC - Fans and Compressors
Dependent Variable Measurement = Real Energy (kWh)
Aggregation Method = SUM
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Temperature (°C)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Independent Variable(s) Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Relative Humidity
(%)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Reporting Period 1/1/2017 - 12/31/2017, Server Local Time
Interval = Day
Interval and Sub Model Configuration
Sub Model = Weekday vs Weekend
Use Exception Periods No
Show Detailed Results No
Save Model Configuration No

Results:

Page 574 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

The R² has much improved. There is a good correlation between outside temperature and humidity
and consumption. There are still a few days with a large negative residual value. Upon closer
inspection we find that most of these days are holidays. For the next run we use exception periods
to account for the holidays.

Model creation run 4

We use exception periods to account for the holidays.

We use the following inputs for the Create Model report:

Title Create Model Report

Source = HVAC - Fans and Compressors
Dependent Variable Measurement = Real Energy (kWh)
Aggregation Method = SUM

7EN02-0409-00 Page 575

Reference Web Applications Guide

Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Temperature (°C)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Independent Variable(s) Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Relative Humidity
(%)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Reporting Period 1/1/2017 - 12/31/2017, Server Local Time
Interval = Day
Interval and Sub Model Configuration
Sub Model = Weekday vs Weekend
Use Exception Periods Yes
Show Detailed Results No
Save Model Configuration No

Results:

Page 576 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

We have again improved the model. In our example, the building is cooled electrically, which means
the greatest impact of outside temperature on energy consumption is during the cooling season. To
account for that, we change the Aggregation Method for outside temperature to Cooling Degree
Days (CDD) for the next run.

Model creation run 5

We change the Aggregation Method for outside temperature to Cooling Degree Days (CDD) with a
base temperature of 11 °C.

We use the following inputs for the Create Model report:

Title Create Model Report

Source = HVAC - Fans and Compressors
Dependent Variable Measurement = Real Energy (kWh)
Aggregation Method = SUM
Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Temperature (°C)
Aggregation Method = CDD
Independent Variable(s) Source = Victoria.Weather
Measurement = Weather Relative Humidity
(%)
Aggregation Method = AVG
Reporting Period 1/1/2017 - 12/31/2017, Server Local Time
Interval = Day
Interval and Sub Model Configuration
Sub Model = Weekday vs Weekend
Use Exception Periods Yes
Show Detailed Results No
Save Model Configuration No

Results:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 577

Reference Web Applications Guide

We now have a pretty accurate model of our energy consumption based on outside temperature and
humidity.

TIP: Choose to include model creation details in the report.

Select Yes for Show Detailed Results in the Report Inputs to include information on the modeling
formulas and the relationship between the drivers and the sub model data. The following are
selected examples of the type of details you can get.

Page 578 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Statistical information:

Weekday sub-model data driven by outside temperature vs measured data:

Weekday sub-model data driven by outside temperature with influence of humidity removed vs
measured data:

7EN02-0409-00 Page 579

Reference Web Applications Guide

Weekend sub-model data driven by outside temperature vs measured data:

Weekend sub-model data driven by relative humidity vs measured data:

Next Step:

Run the Create Model report one last time with the Save Model Configuration parameter set to
Yes. This saves the model into the database and makes it available for use with the Use Model
Report.

Page 580 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Interpreting the Energy Regression Analysis Report results

The Energy Regression Analysis Tool is a highly configurable tool that allows you to monitor and
manage a building or facility’s energy and resource consumption. This practice, called energy
modeling, involves analyzing building energy systems, monitoring energy consumption, and
detecting anomalies or changes in system behavior that may require that you perform energy
efficiency upgrades or fixes. The Energy Regression Analysis Report allows you to model energy
data one independent variable at a time with a wide range of desired independent variables, such as
weather or occupancy rate.

It is recommended that users have a basic understanding of energy modeling and understand how
to create an Energy Regression Analysis Report. This section discusses in detail the purpose of
each parameter in the report and how to read and interpret meaningful results of an Energy
Regression Analysis Report. After generating the report, conclusions can be drawn from the
generated tables and charts to monitor energy consumption and make cost saving decisions.
Energy Regression Analysis Report results provide a characterization of a building's performance.
You can perform different types of energy analysis with this information, including the following:

l Energy Benchmarking

l Energy Budgeting

l Energy Savings

Glossary of terms

Term Definition
Measurement designed to reflect the demand for energy needed
Cooling Degree Days (CDD)
to cool a building.
Comparing energy profiles against expected profiles and
Cost Savings Analysis
identifying outlying data that may signify areas of improvement.
One degree of departure, on a single day, of the daily mean
Degree Day
temperature from a given standard temperature.
Comparing the energy performance of similar buildings, or
Energy Benchmarking
comparing the energy performance of a single building over time.
Determining future energy use and associated costs for different
Energy Budgeting
times of the year.
Computerized simulation of a building that focuses on energy
Energy Modeling consumption, utility bills and life cycle costs of various energy
related items such as air conditioning, lights, and hot water.
Measuring savings by comparing performance profiles before
Energy Savings
and after energy efficiency modifications.
Disaggregating building energy into different categories, such as
Energy Use Breakdowns weather-dependent energy use or weather-independent energy
use.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 581

Reference Web Applications Guide

Term Definition
Measurement designed to reflect the demand for energy needed
Heating Degree Days (HDD)
to heat a building.
Performance (Regression) Line The statistical line of best fit.
Statistical process for estimating the relationships among
variables. Includes many techniques for modeling and analyzing
Regression Analysis
several variables, when the focus is on the relationship between
a dependent variable and one or more independent variables.

Page 582 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Reading the report

This section discusses how to read the different types of information in the report.

Report Parameters Summary table

The Report Parameters Summary table appears at the beginning of the report. Based on what you
select for the Show Report Parameters Summary option on the prerequisite page, you can make
this table appear or be hidden in the report.

This table provides important details, such as data sources, calculation methods, and other
parameters about how the report inputs are configured that can help the user understand report
results.

Regression Analysis Chart

The Regression Analysis Chart shows the relationship between the driver and model data.

In this chart, the blue dots represent real data points. In this case, the data is aggregated weekly
over the course of one year, therefore, there are 52 data points with each data point representing one
week of the year. The yellow line is the regression line, or performance line, of the building. The
performance (regression) line is the best fit line--a line that indicates the expected energy
consumption. The slope of the performance line is a measure of how much extra fuel, energy, or
other resource is consumed for an increase in the independent variable (such as degree days,
production units, and so forth).

7EN02-0409-00 Page 583

Reference Web Applications Guide

Deviations between building performance lines over time means that something has changed in the
way the facility consumes energy. This may be a result of energy efficiency modifications, or it
could indicate an issue with building systems, equipment, or processes. The performance line
provides a benchmark by which changes in energy consumption can be monitored, and appropriate
actions can be taken if variations are detected.

The point of intersection between the two performance lines is called the breakpoint. For energy
consumption analyzed with respect to average temperature, the breakpoint indicates the
temperature at which heating or cooling of a facility begins. Therefore, having a breakpoint further to
the right is better because this indicates that heating or cooling systems are running for less time,
which results in less energy usage.

Regression Analysis Main Characteristics Table

The Regression Analysis Main Characteristics Table provides information about the Regression
Analysis Chart.

The Side column shows the left and right sides. The Slope column shows the slope values of the
two best-fitting lines intersect. This intersection point is called the breakpoint. The Y-Intercept
column shows a point where the graph of a function or relation intersects with the y-axis of the
coordinate system. Therefore, these points satisfy x = 0.

Page 584 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

The R2 column shows a value that indicates how well the data fits the model. The RMSE column
shows the square root of the mean/average of the square of the error. The X Value and Y Value
columns show the coordinates of the Change point.

Monitoring the slopes and breakpoint values provides useful information about a facility’s energy
consumption. Flatter slope lines are better as they indicate a smaller increase in energy
consumption for every additional unit of the independent X-axis variable.

For more information on interpreting the report results, see Interpreting the report.

Measured Values Against Expected Values Chart

The Measured Values Against Expected Values Chart shows the relationship between the model
data and time.

In this chart, the blue line indicates the real energy usage over time and the performance line
indicates the expected energy usage over time based on the regression analysis.

The time axis, or X-axis, has different units depending on the selected aggregation period. For
weekly aggregation, the numbers on the X-axis represent the weeks of the year and for daily
aggregation, they represent the days of the year. The year or years contained within the reporting
period are displayed on the chart directly below the X-axis values.

Exceptions Table

The Exceptions Table below shows information for any data point that falls outside of the exception
range defined by the Deviation Type and Max Authorized Deviation parameters.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 585

Reference Web Applications Guide

If there are no exception points, this table does not appear in the report.

Full Table

The Full Table below shows information for all data points.

Within the Full Table, there is a row with missing values.

This row stores information about the breakpoint from the Regression Analysis Chart.

This report generates with almost any set of data and regardless of other parameter selections.
However, the generated report is only of assistance in monitoring energy consumption if the
parameters are configured correctly and with specific intent.

The following section provides specific examples of how to use the Energy Modeling Report to
monitor certain aspects of a facility’s energy consumption.

Page 586 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Interpreting the report

After generating the report, the data can be analyzed in different ways to draw different conclusions
about energy and resource consumption. Below are two examples involving different independent
variables.

Example 1: Justifying Energy Efficiency Upgrades

Regression analysis of energy or resource consumption with respect to Degree Days can provide
valuable information about a facility’s energy efficiency with respect to outside changes in
temperature. Such information can be used to determine when energy efficiency upgrades are
necessary, and to monitor the effectiveness of such solutions after implementation.

For example, a facility manager could compare the Heating Degree Day energy profile of their
building to another facility in a similar climate. If the other building proves to be much more energy
efficient, an analysis could be performed on the differences in building design that could cause
these results. Perhaps the only significant difference is that the more efficient building recently
upgraded their insulation. The less efficient building could then use this information, along with the
Regression Analysis charts to pitch the case that an insulation upgrade should take place to reduce
natural gas usage at the facility.

If the upgrade is successful, a change appears in the Regression Analysis chart the following year.
The chart above shows a possible Regression analysis for the year before the energy efficiency
modifications. The red line in the chart shows how the performance lines and breakpoint could
change when the upgrades are successful. The slopes of the lines in the second figure are flatter,
indicating less energy usage for every additional degree day. The breakpoint also occurs later,
indicating that heating does not have to begin at as low of a temperature as before, thereby saving
additional resources.

Example 2: Identifying Equipment Failure

Regression analysis can also be used to detect equipment deterioration or failure. Below are two
Regression Analysis charts showing natural gas consumption with respect to production units.

The red line in the chart has a steeper slope and an earlier X-axis intersection point. This indicates
that more natural gas is being used for every unit of production. If data for these charts is collected
over different periods of time, but with no changes to manufacturing processes or equipment, the
steeper regression line in the second chart could indicate deterioration of equipment.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 587

Reference Web Applications Guide

Plotting energy consumption data against any independent variable, not just time, allows you to
analyze in greater detail the energy efficiency of your buildings or facilities, and to make necessary
upgrades or cost analysis decisions.

Conclusion

Energy modeling is a relatively new practice for monitoring and analyzing energy consumption in
buildings and facilities. It involves using computerized simulations to analyze energy consumption,
and it allows customers to understand their expected energy consumption and use this information
to make system design decisions and perform cost benefit analysis.

The Energy Modeling Report, or XY Regression Report, allows users to create energy profiles for
their buildings or facilities. These benchmark energy models provide valuable information about
energy and resource consumption that can help Facility Managers save resources by identifying
and addressing consumption issues.

Recommendations

Many of the report parameters on the prerequisite page are interdependent and configuring this page
requires close attention. It is recommended to rely on documentation to correctly configure the
report. Note that there is no filtering of parameters on the prerequisite page.

Page 588 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Reports UI

Report Library
The Report Library contains all the Reports that are configured in the system. Reports can be
listed individually or they can be organized within folders.

1
TIP: To hide the Library, click the Hide Library icon ( or ) in the top right corner of the

Library. To show the Library, click the Show Library icon ( or ) at the top of the Library
ribbon, or click anywhere in the minimized Library ribbon.

Reports Inputs panel

The top part of the Reports Display pane shows the inputs for the selected report. Different
2
reports have different input types. Some inputs are preset with default values, others are
unassigned and must be set before the report can be generated.
Hide Report Inputs / Show Report Inputs link
3
Click this link to hide or show the report input panel.
Generate Report button
4
Click this button to generate the report after you have set all the required input parameters.
Report Display panel
5 View the report output after generating the report. Use Download report as, at the top of the
panel, to download the report in PDF, Excel, or Tiff image format.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 589

Reference Web Applications Guide

Reports Icons
Reports uses different icons to differentiate between reports and report templates in the Report
Library. The following is a list of icons used.

Report template

Private Report with some inputs saved

Private Report with all inputs saved

Public Report with some inputs saved

Public Report with all inputs saved

Page 590 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Reports Terminology
The following is a list of commonly used terms related to Reports in PME.

Report
A report is a report template that has been saved with some or all of its input parameters set. Every
time you run a report, it queries the database to retrieve the required data. A report does not store the
output data after it was generated. To save a permanent copy of the output, download the report in
one of the supported formats and save it externally.

Report Template
A report template defines the output layout, the types of inputs and the information in the database
that is accessed for that report. The difference between a report and a report template is that a report
has one or more of its input parameters saved and a template does not.

In the Report Library, report templates are shown with an icon that does not have a small circle on
its lower right corner .

Downloaded Report
A downloaded report is a copy of the output of a report. You can download a report in different
formats. Download a report to permanently save a copy of its output.

Report Input Parameters (or Inputs)

Report input parameters are the variables that must be entered before a report can be generated. For
example, the input parameters can determine for which devices a report is run, or which
measurements are included. Different report templates have different input parameters.

NOTE: You can identify a reports and report templates in the Report Library by their icon. See
Reports Icons for more information.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 591

Reference Web Applications Guide

Trends references
This section contains reference information related to using Trends.

Use the links below to find the content you are looking for:

The Trends user interface

Trend options

Page 592 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

The Trends user interface

The Trends user interface consists of a trends display pane and a Trend Library pane.

Trends display pane

The Trends display pane shows the trends selected in the Trend Library. When you create a trend,
it automatically opens in the display pane and the trend name is selected in the Trend Library. You
can select multiple trends to be shown simultaneously in the display pane. Scroll the display pane to
view all of the trends that you selected in the Trend Library. For information on the options and
controls available in the trend view, see Trend options.

If you log out of the application, your selections are retained and are loaded in the Trends display
pane the next time you log in.

Trend Library
The Trend Library contains all the trends that are configured in the system. Trends can be listed
individually or they can be organized within folders. You use the Trend Library to select the trends
you want to view.

TIP: To hide the Library, click the Hide Library icon ( or ) in the top right corner of the Library.

To show the Library, click the Show Library icon ( or ) at the top of the Library ribbon, or click
anywhere in the minimized Library ribbon.

For information on how to configure Trends, see Trends configuration.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 593

Reference Web Applications Guide

Trend options
The following options are available in the upper right area of the trend in the display pane.

These options are summarized in the following table.

This icon appears only if there is an information,

error, or warning message associated with the
device. If the icon pulses, the viewer contains a
new error or warning message that has not yet
Open the Diagnostic been viewed. When you open the viewer, you
Log Viewer can click Clear Log to remove the existing
entries. This action removes the icon from the
trend display area until new information is logged
in the viewer. Click Close to close the viewer
and return to the trend display.
The setting for the time range on the X-axis.
Select a time range from the dropdown list. The
view window reflects the time in minutes or
hours from the last data point read from the
View list
source. For example, if you are viewing a 15
minute window and the last data point occurred
20 minutes ago, then the trend time range spans
the previous 35 to 20 minutes.
Acts as toggle to enable and disable the
inspection mode for the trend. When you enable
inspection mode, inspect icons appear on the
trend when you place your pointer anywhere on
the diagram. A slider also opens below the X-
Inspect
axis. Use the slider to adjust the time range for
the trend. Data values are not updated in the
trend but they continue to be updated in the
legend. When you disable inspection mode, all
data that was captured is shown.
Opens the Trend Setup dialog. You can modify
Edit
any of the settings for the trend.
Saves the trend data that is displayed in the
Download trend data diagram in a CSV file on your system. When
as CSV events occur, you can download the data to a
CSV file for further analysis.

Page 594 7EN02-0409-00

Web Applications Guide Reference

Displays the trend in a full browser page. Click

Maximize the Restore icon to return to the default size
in the trend display area.
Closes the trend. This also clears the checkbox
Close
for the trend in the Trend Library.

Trend legend
The legend opens on the right of the trend by default. You can select Left or Off on the Chart tab in
the Add Trend or Trend Setup dialogs to change the location of the legend or to remove it from the
trend display.

The legend provides the following capabilities:

l You can close and open the legend by clicking the arrow on the left side of the legend.

l If you have enabled multiple axes in your trend, when you place your mouse pointer over a
measurement series in the legend, it indicates which axis the series is drawn on.

l You can temporarily disable a measurement series by clicking the color swatch for the series.

l The background color of a measurement series entry changes to match the threshold colors
when the series passes into the upper or lower threshold. You set the threshold colors on the
Axes tab of the Add Trend or the Trend Setup dialog.

Inspection mode
The following icons appear when you enable the inspection mode and you place your pointer on the
trend.

A Reset Zoom (100%) - resets the trend to its default size.

Pan the chart - after you zoom in to an area of the diagram, click Pan
B the chart, then click and hold the left mouse button on the diagram
and drag it left or right.

7EN02-0409-00 Page 595

Reference Web Applications Guide

Zoom in to selection area - zooms in when you drag the mouse over
C an area of the chart. The zoom action occurs when you release the
left mouse button.

When the trend is in inspection mode, the trend remains static until you toggle inspection mode off
to return the trend to its update mode. Note that the data in the legend continues to update in real
time with the latest values even though the trend remains static for analysis purposes. When you
toggle inspection mode off, the trend refreshes and includes all of the data that was captured while
you were in inspection mode.

You can drag the slider below the X-axis to the right to decrease the time range for the trend. For
example, if the time range is set to 15 minutes and you drag the slider to the right, the range values
decrease, and if you continue to drag the slider to the right, the values decrease further to show
minutes and seconds on the scale.

Page 596 7EN02-0409-00

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil Malmaison – France

Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 70 00

www.schneider-electric.com

As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, please

ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication.

© 2018 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

7EN02-0409-00 09/2018